Ford Transit 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

2018 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual
2018 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com ford.ca
May 2018
Third Printing
Owner’s Manual
Transit
Litho in U.S.A.
JK3J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.

Part Number: JK3J 19A321 AA 201705 20180412151133
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and

maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your
hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Introduction Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......55

About This Manual ..........................................7 Airbag Disposal ..............................................56
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9 Automatic Crash Notification
Perchlorate ........................................................12
System
Ford Credit ........................................................12 911 Assist ...........................................................57
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12 Keys and Remote Controls
Special Notices ...............................................13 Principle of Operation .................................59
Mobile Communications Equipment General Information on Radio
...........................................................................1 4 Frequencies .................................................59
Export Unique Options ................................15 Remote Control - Vehicles Without:
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
..........................................................................60
Environment
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Passive
Protecting the Environment .......................16 Anti-Theft System (PATS) .....................61
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
Child Safety ..........................................................................6 3
General Information ......................................17
Installing Child Restraints ...........................18 MyKey™
Booster Seats .................................................33 Principle of Operation .................................64
Child Restraint Positioning ........................35 Creating a MyKey ..........................................65
Child Safety Locks .........................................37 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................66
Checking MyKey System Status .............66
Seatbelts Using MyKey With Remote Start
Principle of Operation .................................39 Systems ........................................................68
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................40 MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................68
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................42
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Doors and Locks
Chime ............................................................42 Locking and Unlocking ................................70
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................43
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Security
Maintenance ...............................................44 Passive Anti-Theft System ........................75
Seatbelt Extension .......................................45 Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................76
Supplementary Restraints Power Running Boards

System Using Power Running Boards ....................77
Principle of Operation .................................46
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................47 Steering Wheel
Side Airbags ....................................................52 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ..................80
Safety Canopy™ ............................................53 Audio Control .................................................80
2018 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, JK3J 19A321 AA enUSA, Edition date: 201705, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Voice Control ...................................................81 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate

Cruise Control ..................................................81 ..........................................................................110
Information Display Control ......................82 Rear Passenger Climate Controls ............111
Heated Windows and Mirrors ...................111
Wipers and Washers Remote Start ..................................................112
Windshield Wipers .......................................83
Autowipers ......................................................83 Seats
Windshield Washers ....................................84 Sitting in the Correct Position ..................113
Head Restraints .............................................113
Lighting Manual Seats .................................................114
General Information .....................................85 Power Seats ...................................................116
Lighting Control .............................................85 Rear Seats .......................................................118
Autolamps .......................................................86 Heated Seats ................................................120
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................87
Daytime Running Lamps ............................87 Auxiliary Power Points
Direction Indicators .......................................87 Auxiliary Power Points ...............................122
Interior Lamps ................................................88 Cigar Lighter ...................................................123
Cargo Lamps ..................................................88
Storage Compartments
Windows and Mirrors Cup Holders ...................................................125
Power Windows ............................................90 Overhead Console .......................................125
Exterior Mirrors ................................................91 Bottle Holder .................................................125
Interior Mirror ..................................................92 Front Door Storage Compartment .......125
Rear Quarter Windows ................................92
Starting and Stopping the
Instrument Cluster Engine
Gauges ..............................................................93 General Information ...................................126
Ignition Switch ..............................................126
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............95
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................127
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............98
Starting a Diesel Engine .............................127
Information Displays Switching Off the Engine ..........................129
General Information ....................................99 Engine Block Heater ...................................129
Trip Computer ...............................................102
Personalized Settings ................................102
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .......................................131
Information Messages ...............................103
Fuel Quality - Diesel ....................................132
Climate Control Fuel Quality - Gasoline ..............................134
Manual Climate Control ...........................109 Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................135
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................136
Running Out of Fuel ...................................136
Table of Contents
Refueling .........................................................137 Driving Aids

Fuel Consumption .......................................139 Speed Limiter ...............................................169
Driver Alert .....................................................169
Engine Emission Control Lane Keeping System ................................170
Emission Law .................................................141 Steering ............................................................172
Catalytic Converter - 3.5L/3.7L ...............142
Selective Catalytic Reductant System - Load Carrying
3.2L Diesel ..................................................143
Load Retaining Fixtures .............................174
Diesel Particulate Filter - 3.2L Diesel
.........................................................................145 Load Limit .......................................................174
Transmission Towing
Automatic Transmission ............................151 Towing a Trailer ............................................180
Tow/Haul ........................................................154 Trailer Sway Control ....................................181
Recommended Towing Weights ............181
Brakes Essential Towing Checks ..........................183
General Information ...................................156 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......189
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................156 Driving Hints
Parking Brake - Vehicles With: Breaking-In ......................................................191
Mechanical Parking Brake ....................157 Reduced Engine Performance .................191
Parking Brake - Vehicles With: Push Economical Driving ......................................191
Down Parking Brake ................................157
Cold Weather Precautions ........................191
Hill Start Assist .............................................158
Driving Through Water ...............................192
Floor Mats .......................................................192
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ...............................160
Roadside Emergencies
Using Traction Control ..............................160
Roadside Assistance ..................................194
Hazard Flashers ...........................................195
Stability Control
Emergency Exit .............................................195
Principle of Operation .................................161
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................195
Using Stability Control ...............................162
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................196
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................198
Parking Aids
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................198
Principle of Operation ................................163
Towing Points ...............................................199
Parking Aid .....................................................163
Rear View Camera ......................................165
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............201
Cruise Control
In California (U.S. Only) ...........................202
Principle of Operation ...............................168
Using Cruise Control ..................................168
Table of Contents
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Brake Fluid Check ........................................241
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................203 Power Steering Fluid Check .....................241
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Washer Fluid Check ...................................242
Program (Canada Only) ......................204
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 3.2L
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Power Stroke Diesel ..............................242
Canada .......................................................204
Fuel Filter - Gasoline .................................244
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.......................................................................206 Changing the 12V Battery ........................244
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) Checking the Wiper Blades ....................246
.......................................................................206 Changing the Front Wiper Blades ........246
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only) Adjusting the Headlamps ........................247
.......................................................................206 Removing a Headlamp ............................248
Changing a Bulb .........................................249
Fuses Bulb Specification Chart ..........................253
Fuse Box Locations ...................................208 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Fuse Specification Chart - 3.2L Power Power Stroke Diesel ..............................255
Stroke Diesel ............................................208 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.5L
Fuse Specification Chart - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ...............................................256
Ecoboost™/3.7L ......................................217 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.7L .....257
Changing a Fuse ..........................................227 Drive Belt Routing - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel ..........................................................258
Maintenance Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™/
General Information ..................................229 3.7L ...............................................................258
Opening and Closing the Hood .............229
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power Vehicle Care
Stroke Diesel ............................................230 Cleaning Products .....................................260
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™ Cleaning the Exterior ..................................261
.........................................................................231 Waxing ............................................................262
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L ...................232 Cleaning the Engine ...................................262
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
Diesel ...........................................................233 ........................................................................263
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Ecoboost™ Cleaning the Interior ..................................263
........................................................................234
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L .........................234 Instrument Cluster Lens ......................265
Engine Oil Check .........................................234 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............265
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Cleaning the Wheels .................................266
........................................................................235
Vehicle Storage ...........................................266
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................235
Engine Cooling Fan - Diesel ....................236
Wheels and Tires
Engine Cooling Fan - E85/Gasoline .....236
General Information ..................................268
Engine Coolant Check ..............................236
Tire Care .........................................................269
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................240 Using Winter Tires ......................................286
Table of Contents
Using Snow Chains ....................................286 SYNC™

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........287 General Information ..................................349
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................292 Using Voice Recognition ...........................351
Technical Specifications ..........................303 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........353
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......365
Capacities and Specifications Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................370
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power SYNC™ Troubleshooting .........................379
Stroke Diesel ............................................305
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™ SYNC™ 3
.......................................................................306
Engine Specifications - 3.7L ....................307
Home Screen ...............................................396
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel ..........................................................308 Using Voice Recognition ..........................396
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....308 Entertainment .............................................402
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L ..............................310 Phone ...............................................................412
Vehicle Identification Number .................311 Navigation .......................................................417
Vehicle Certification Label .......................312 Apps ................................................................425
Transmission Code Designation ............312 Settings ..........................................................428
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................442
Power Stroke Diesel ................................313
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Accessories
Ecoboost™ ................................................316 Accessories ...................................................454
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L Auxiliary Switches ......................................455
.........................................................................321
Audio System Ford Protect

Ford Protect ..................................................457
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio ............................327 Scheduled Maintenance
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/ General Maintenance Information ......459
FM/CD ........................................................329 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........462
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
SYNC ............................................................331 Maintenance ............................................464
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/USB Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........466
Port/Bluetooth ........................................333
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM ......339 Appendices
Digital Radio .................................................342 Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............477
Satellite Radio .............................................344 End User License Agreement .................479
Audio Input Jack ..........................................347
USB Port .........................................................347
Media Hub .....................................................348
6
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual may qualify the location of a

component as left-hand side or right-hand
Thank you for choosing Ford. We side. The side is determined when facing
recommend that you take some time to forward in the seat.
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend E154903
against the use of any hand-held device

while driving and encourage the use of A Right-hand side.
voice-operated systems when possible. B Left-hand side.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Note: This manual describes product These are some of the symbols you may
features and options available throughout see on your vehicle.
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It Air conditioning system
may describe options not fitted to the
E162384
vehicle you have purchased.
Air conditioning system lubricant
Note: Some of the illustrations in this type
E231157
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different Anti-lock braking system
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your Battery
vehicle.
Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an
authorized Ford dealer may have originally Battery acid
sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle
modifier who upfitted it. As a result, it may
have different options and features than
described in this manual.
Introduction
Brake fluid - non petroleum Fan warning

based
Brake system Fasten seatbelt

E71880
Brake system Flammable

E231160
E270480
Cabin air filter Front airbag

E67017
Check fuel cap Front fog lamps
Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers
Heated rear window

Cruise control
E71340
Windshield defrosting system
Do not open when hot
Interior luggage compartment

Engine air filter
release
Jack
Engine coolant
Keep out of reach of children

Engine coolant temperature
E161353
Lighting control
Engine oil
Low tire pressure warning

Explosive gas
Introduction
Maintain correct fluid level Passenger airbag deactivated

E270850
Note operating instructions Side airbag
Horn control Shield the eyes

E270945
E167012
Panic alarm Stability control

E138639
Parking aid Hill descent control

E163957
E139213
Parking brake Trail control

E271982
Power steering fluid Windshield wiping system

E270969
Windshield wash and wipe

Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout

DATA RECORDING
Requires registered technician Service Data Recording

E231159 Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
Safety alert diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
See Owner's Manual systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
See Service Manual service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
E231158
and repair facilities may access or share
Service engine soon among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Passenger airbag activated Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
E270849
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
Introduction
information for vehicle improvement or Event Data Recording

with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact This vehicle is equipped with an event
information), to offer you products or data recorder. The main purpose of an
services that may interest you. Data may event data recorder is to record, in
be provided to our service providers such certain crash or near crash-like
as part suppliers that may help diagnose situations, such as an airbag
malfunctions, and who are similarly deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
obligated to protect data. We retain this this data will assist in understanding
data only as long as necessary to perform how a vehicle’s systems performed.
these functions or to comply with law. We The event data recorder is designed to
may provide information where required record data related to vehicle dynamics
in response to official requests to law and safety systems for a short period
enforcement or other government of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
authorities or third parties acting with The event data recorder in this vehicle
lawful authority or court order, and such is designed to record such data as:
information may be used in legal
• How various systems in your vehicle
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
were operating;
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health • Whether or not the driver and
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent passenger safety belts were
that certain diagnostic information may buckled/fastened;
also be accessed electronically by Ford • How far (if at all) the driver was
Motor Company and Ford authorized depressing the accelerator and/or
service facilities, and that the diagnostic the brake pedal; and
information may be used to provide
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
services to you, personalizing your
and
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you • Where the driver was positioning
products and services that may interest the steering wheel.
you, where permitted by law. For Canada This data can help provide a better
only, for more information, please review understanding of the circumstances in
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at which crashes and injuries occur.
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 349).
10
Introduction
Note: Event data recorder data is Note: Including to the extent that any
recorded by your vehicle only if a law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data applies to SYNC or its features, please
is recorded by the event data recorder note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
under normal driving conditions and no equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
personal data or information (e.g., name, may, through any paired and connected
gender, age, and crash location) is cell phone, disclose to emergency
recorded (see limitations regarding 911 services that the vehicle has been in a
Assist and Traffic, directions and crash involving the deployment of an
Information privacy below). However, airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
parties, such as law enforcement, could activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
combine the event data recorder data Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
with the type of personally identifying may also be capable of being used to
data routinely acquired during a crash electronically or verbally provide to 911
investigation. operators the vehicle location (such as
To read data recorded by an event data latitude and longitude), and/or other
recorder, special equipment is required, details about the vehicle or crash or
and access to the vehicle or the event personal information about the
data recorder is needed. In addition to occupants to assist 911 operators to
the vehicle manufacturer, other provide the most appropriate emergency
parties, such as law enforcement, that services. If you do not want to disclose
have such special equipment, can read this information, do not activate the 911
the information if they have access to Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 349).
the vehicle or the event data recorder. Additionally, when you connect to
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Traffic, Directions and Information (if
Canada do not access event data equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
recorder information without obtaining GPS technology and advanced vehicle
consent, unless pursuant to court order sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
or where required by law enforcement, location, travel direction, and speed
other government authorities or other (“vehicle travel information”), only to
third parties acting with lawful help provide you with the directions,
authority. Other parties may seek to traffic reports, or business searches
access the information independently that you request. If you do not want
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Ford or its vendors to receive this
Canada. information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 349).
11
Introduction
PERCHLORATE REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners We have built your vehicle to the highest
and remote control batteries may contain standards using quality parts. We
perchlorate material. Special handling recommend that you demand the use of
may apply for service or vehicle end of life genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
disposal. whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
For more information visit:
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
Web Address by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- packaging.
ouswaste/perchlorate
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
FORD CREDIT
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
US Only
is to have it maintained in line with our
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing recommendations using parts that
and lease plans to help you acquire your conform to the specifications detailed in
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
your business. specifications.
We offer a number of convenient ways for Collision Repairs
you to contact us, and to manage your
account. We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
For more information about Ford Credit meet our stringent requirements for fit,
and access to Account Manager, go to finish, structural integrity, corrosion
www.ford.com/finance. protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
12
Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts On Board Diagnostics Data Link

Connector
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused WARNING: Do not connect wireless
to your vehicle as a result of failed plug-in devices to the data link connector.
non-Ford parts. For additional information, Unauthorized third parties could gain
refer to the terms and conditions of the access to vehicle data and impair the
Ford Warranty. performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
SPECIAL NOTICES their equipment to the data link connector.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
For a detailed description of what is conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
covered and what is not covered by your vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, reprogramming services. Installing an
refer to the Warranty Manual that is aftermarket device that uses the DLC
provided to you along with your Owner’s during normal driving for purposes such as
Manual. remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
Special Instructions
devices or entities, or altering the
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted performance of the vehicle, may cause
with sophisticated electronic controls. interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
WARNING: You risk death or serious devices unless approved by Ford. The
injury to yourself and others if you do not vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
follow the instruction highlighted by the caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
specific warnings and instructions could
Utility Type Vehicles
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Never place front seat

mounted rear-facing child or infant seats WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
in front of an active passenger airbag. significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read

this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
13
Introduction
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow Other Vehicle Modifications

Do not use this vehicle for If converting or modifying your vehicle
snowplowing. from production specification, refer to
Your vehicle is not equipped with a the Truck Body Builder Advisory
snowplowing package. website:
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Web Address
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas

Ambulance Preparation Package, it may
be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges
ambulance manufacturers to follow the MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete EQUIPMENT
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
pertinent supplements. WARNING: Driving while distracted
For additional information, please and injury. We strongly recommend that
contact the Truck Body Builders you use extreme caution when using any
Advisory Service: device that may take your focus off the
Web Address operation of your vehicle. We recommend
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
You can also call us at Make sure you are aware of all applicable
1–877–840–4338. local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
14
Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
15
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor

Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
16
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION Technician (CPST) to make sure that you

properly install the child restraint in your
See the following sections for directions vehicle and that you consult your
on how to properly use safety restraints pediatrician to make sure you have a child
for children. restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
WARNING: Always make sure your 1-888-327-4236 or go to
child is secured properly in a device that is www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
appropriate for their height, age and Transport Canada toll free at
weight. Child safety restraints must be 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
bought separately from your vehicle. find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to follow these instructions and Failure to properly restrain children in child
guidelines may result in an increased risk restraints made especially for their height,
of serious injury or death to your child. age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic WARNING: On hot days, the
Safety Administration and other safety temperature inside the vehicle can rise very
organizations, base their recommendations quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
for child restraints on probable child height, these high temperatures for even a short
age and weight thresholds, or on the time can cause death or serious heat
minimum requirements of the law. We related injuries, including brain damage.
recommend that you check with a NHTSA Small children are particularly at risk.
Certified Child Passenger Safety
17
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
Child Child size, height, weight, or age
type
Use a child safety seat

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four Use a belt-positioning
Small children
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb booster seat.
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than shoulder belt centered
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom- across the shoulder and
mended by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seatback
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States and Canada. RESTRAINTS
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster Child Safety Restraint
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. E142594
18
Child Safety
Use a child safety restraint (sometimes • Keep the buckle release button
called an infant carrier, convertible seat, pointing up and away from the safety
or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or restraint, with the tongue between the
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less child restraint and the release button,
(generally age four or younger). to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
WARNING: Do not place a rearward locking mode. See Step 5. Your vehicle
facing child restraint in front of an active does not require the use of a locking
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction clip.
could result in personal injury or death.
Perform the following steps when
WARNING: Properly secure children installing the child restraint with
12 years old and under in a rear seating combination lap and shoulder belts:
position whenever possible. If you are Note: Although the child restraint
unable to properly secure all children in a illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
rear seating position, properly secure the the steps are the same for installing a
largest child on the front seat. If you must rearward facing child restraint.
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you

secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure E142528
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly 1. Position the child safety restraint in a
restrained. seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
When installing a child safety restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the correct
buckle until you hear a distinct click
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue
is securely fastened in the buckle.
19
Child Safety
E142529 E142531
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and 4. Insert the belt tongue into the correct
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap buckle (the buckle closest to the
belt together. direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a distinct click and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according E142875
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure the belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic
webbing is not twisted. locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
20
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor 10. Before placing the child in the seat,
to make sure the retractor is in the forcibly move the seat forward and
automatic locking mode (you should back to make sure the seat is securely
not be able to pull more belt out). If the held in place. To check this, grab the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the seat at the belt path and attempt to
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for correct
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is correctly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCH)
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.

Force the seat down with extra weight, WARNING: Do not attach two child
for example, by pressing down or safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
kneeling on the child restraint while crash, one anchor may not be strong
pulling up on the shoulder belt. This is enough to hold two child safety restraint
necessary to remove the remaining attachments and may break, causing
slack that exists once the extra weight serious injury or death.
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the WARNING: Depending on where you
correct snugness of the child restraint secure a child restraint, and depending on
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight the child restraint design, you may block
lean toward the buckle helps to remove access to certain seatbelt buckle
remaining slack from the belt. assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child rendering those features potentially
restraint is equipped). unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three

vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
E142534
21
Child Safety
LATCH compatible child safety restraints restraint, however the seatbelt can still be
have two rigid or webbing mounted used to attach the child restraint. For
attachments that connect to the two lower forward-facing child restraints, the top
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating tether strap must also be attached to the
positions in your vehicle. This type of correct top tether anchor, if a top tether
attachment method eliminates the need strap has been provided with your child
to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint.
E258858
22
Child Safety
E254574
E258864
23
Child Safety
E254575
E266915
24
Child Safety
E254576
E258867
25
Child Safety
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
child restraint installation at the seating Outermost Seating Positions (Center
positions marked with the child restraint Seating Use)
symbol.
Note: In addition to those shown, other
seating positions may also have LATCH WARNING: The standardized
lower anchor points. You can identify these spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
with the child restraint symbol shown on (280 mm) center to center. Do not use
those seating positions. LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower

anchor if an adjacent child restraint is
attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety restraint,
check that the seat is correctly attached
to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a correct installation.
If the safety restraint is not anchored
correctly, the risk of a child being injured in
E177639 a crash greatly increases.
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
of the rear seat between the cushion and Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
seat backrest above the symbols as Restraints
shown. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions to correctly When used in combination, either the
install a child restraint with LATCH seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
attachments. Follow the instructions on be attached first, provided a correct
attaching child safety restraints with tether installation is achieved. Attach the tether
straps. strap afterward, if included with the child
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the restraint.
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
26
Child Safety
Using Tether Straps Contact the manufacturer of your child

restraint for information about ordering a
Many forward-facing child safety tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
restraints include a tether strap strap if the tether strap on the safety
which extends from the back of restraint does not reach the appropriate
the child safety restraint and hooks to an top tether anchor in your vehicle.
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an Once the child safety restraint has been
accessory for many older safety restraints. installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E254595
27
Child Safety
E258857
E258859
28
Child Safety
E258865
E258863
29
Child Safety
E267027
E258866
30
Child Safety
E258868
Perform the following steps to install a

child safety restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Front Passenger Seating Position

1. Adjust the front passenger seat fully
forward.
2. Route the child safety restraint tether
strap over the back of the seat, under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts.
31
Child Safety
3. Locate the correct anchor on the back

panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Adjust the front passenger seat fully
rearward.
6. Tighten the child safety restraint tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
Rear Seats
1. Route the child safety restraint tether
strap over the back of the seat, under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts.
E178096
32
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder

section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
E177640 Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back when seated without a booster seat:
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety restraint tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system has a tether strap, and the child
restraint manufacturer recommends E142595
its use, we also recommend its use. • Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
33
Child Safety
• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats

E70710
• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
E68924 adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
• Backless booster seats shoulder. The following drawings compare
If your backless booster seat has a the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
removable shield, remove the shield. If a uncomfortably close to the neck and a
vehicle seating position has a low seat shoulder belt that could slip off the
backrest or no head restraint, a backless shoulder. The drawings also show how the
booster seat may place your child's head lap belt should be low and snug across the
(as measured at the tops of the ears) child's hips.
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
34
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a WARNING: Properly secure children
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet 12 years old and under in a rear seating
liner under the booster seat may improve position whenever possible. If you are
this condition. Do not introduce any item unable to properly secure all children in a
thicker than this under the booster seat. rear seating position, properly secure the
Check with the booster seat largest child on the front seat. If you must
manufacturer's instructions. use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
CHILD RESTRAINT possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
POSITIONING or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow

WARNING: Do not place a rearward the instructions and warnings provided by
facing child restraint in front of an active the manufacturer of any child restraint to
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction determine if the restraint device is
could result in personal injury or death. appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
35
Child Safety
manufacturer's instructions and warnings

provided for installation and use in WARNING: Properly secure child
conjunction with the instructions and restraints or booster seats when they are
warnings provided by your vehicle not in use. They could become projectiles
manufacturer. A safety seat that is in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
improperly installed or utilized, is this instruction could result in personal
inappropriate for your child's height, age, injury or death.
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
death.
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
WARNING: Do not allow a under their arm or behind their back. Failure
passenger to hold a child on their lap when to follow this instruction could reduce the
your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
instruction could result in personal injury the risk of injury or death in a crash.
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
WARNING: Do not use pillows, follow this instruction could result in
books or towels to boost your child's personal injury or death.
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
36
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined LATCH LATCH Seatbelt Seatbelt Seatbelt

Weight of (Lower (Lower and Top and LATCH Only
Restraint Anchors Anchors Tether (Lower
Child and
Type and Top Only) Anchor Anchors
Child
Restraint Tether and Top
Anchor) Tether
Anchor)
Rear facing
Up to 65 lb
child X X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Rear facing
Over 65 lb
child X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Up to 65 lb
X X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Over 65 lb
X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
113).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)
WARNING: You cannot open the

rear doors from inside if you have put the E176718
child safety locks on.
37
Child Safety
E259284
The child safety lock is on the rear side

door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
38
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly which is made up of one buckle
with the seatback upright and the lap belt and one tongue that are designed to be
snug and low across the hips. used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
swing the seatbelt around your neck over
injury, make sure children sit where they
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
can be properly restrained.
belt for more than one person.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
WARNING: When possible, all
hold a child on his or her lap while your
children 12 years old and under should be
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
properly restrained in a rear seating
protect the child from injury in a crash
position. Failure to follow this could
which may result in serious injury or death.
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of the
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats can
vehicle, including the driver, should always
become hot in a vehicle that has been
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
closed up in sunny weather; they could
an airbag supplemental restraint system
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
buckles before you place a child anywhere
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
near them.
of injury or death.
WARNING: Front and rear seat
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
occupants, including pregnant women,
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
should wear seatbelts for optimum
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
protection in an accident.
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped All seating positions in this vehicle have
with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a the vehicle should always properly wear
seatbelt properly. their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an The seatbelt system consists of:
unbelted person is significantly more likely • Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
39
Seatbelts
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal E142588
and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, 2. Press the button to release the seatbelt
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together tongue.
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the seatbelt pretensioners Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
activate when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
The front outermost and rear safety hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
restraints in your vehicle are combination seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
lap and shoulder belts. women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142587
1. Insert the seatbelt tongue into the E170730

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch.
Note: Make sure that the seatbelt tongue
is properly fastened in the seatbelt buckle.
40
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their Vehicle Sensitive Mode

seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should This is the normal retractor mode which
be positioned low across the hips below allows free shoulder belt length
the belly and worn as tight as comfort adjustment to your movements and
allows. The shoulder belt should be locking in response to vehicle movement.
positioned to cross the middle of the For example, if you brake suddenly or turn
shoulder and the center of the chest. a corner sharply, or your vehicle receives
an impact of approximately 5 mph
Seatbelt Locking Modes (8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
WARNING: After a crash, have a In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
qualified technician check all the seatbelts if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
to make sure the seatbelts including the the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
automatic locking retractor feature for the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
child restraints operate properly. We to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
recommend replacing any system that has pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
damage or does not operate properly. small length of webbing back toward the
Failure to do so can result in personal injury stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
or death in the event of a sudden stop or the rear seat backrest or push the seat
another crash. backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
WARNING: You must replace the toward the stowed position.
seatbelt if the automatic locking retractor Automatic Locking Mode
or any other seatbelt function is not
operating correctly. Failure to replace the In this mode, the shoulder belt
seatbelt and retractor assembly could automatically pre-locks. The seatbelt still
increase the risk of injury in a crash. retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
All seatbelts in your vehicle are is not available on the driver seatbelt.
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking Using Automatic Locking Mode
mode, and the front outermost passenger
You should use automatic locking mode
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
when a child safety seat, except a booster,
locking modes described as follows:
is on the front passenger seat or rear seat.
Children 12 years old and under should be
correctly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 17).
41
Seatbelts
1
2
E142591
2
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire
seatbelt out. 3
E165022
3. Let the seatbelt retract.
Note: As the seatbelt retracts, you will hear 1. Press the button.
a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt 2. Slide the height adjuster up or down.
is now in the automatic locking mode.
3. Release the button and pull down on
Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
locking mode and return the seatbelt to AND INDICATOR CHIME
the vehicle sensitive mode.
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
SEATBELT HEIGHT E71880 driver seatbelt has not been
ADJUSTMENT fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
WARNING: Position the seatbelt

height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the seatbelt correctly could
reduce its effectiveness and increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
42
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
If Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the warning chime sounds for a few
tion... seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning light and warning
indicator light is illuminated and the chime turn off.
warning chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning light and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position... chime remain off.
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function by providing additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the seatbelt
warning light when the driver seat is
occupied and the seatbelt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The Belt-Minder feature will not turn on.
ignition is switched on or less than two
minutes have elapsed since the ignition was
switched on.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled when the The Belt-Minder feature is turned on - the
vehicle has reached at least 6 mph (9.7 km/ seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
h) and two minutes have elapsed since the warning chime sounds for six seconds every
ignition was switched on. 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the driver seatbelt is
buckled.
The driver seatbelt becomes unbuckled for The Belt-Minder feature is turned on - the
about one minute while the vehicle is trav- seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
eling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more warning chime sounds for six seconds every
than two minutes have elapsed since the 25 seconds, repeating for about five
ignition was switched on. minutes or until the driver seatbelt is
buckled.
43
Seatbelts
Switching the Belt-Minder on and off • This will disable the feature if it is
currently enabled.
• This will enable the feature if it is
WARNING: While the system allows currently disabled.
you to switch it off, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving a crash. We CHILD RESTRAINT AND
recommend you leave the system SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
switched on. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not switch the system on or off while Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
driving your vehicle. safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
proceeding with the programming restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
procedure. no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
The system can be switched on and off by
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
carrying out the following procedure:
buckle assemblies, buckle support
Before following the procedure, make sure assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
that: shoulder belt height adjusters (if
• The parking brake is set. equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
• The transmission selector lever is in LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
position park (P). hardware, should be inspected after a
• The ignition is switched off. crash. Read the child restraint
• The driver seatbelt is unbuckled. manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the specific to the child restraint.
engine.
We recommend that all seatbelt
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
turns off (about one minute). After crash be replaced. However, if the crash
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds was minor and an authorized dealer finds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once that the belts do not show damage and
Step 3 is started, the procedure must continue to operate properly, they do not
be completed within 30 seconds. need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
3. Buckle then unbuckle the driver not in use during a crash should also be
seatbelt three times at a moderate inspected and replaced if either damage
speed, ending in the unbuckled state. or improper operation is noted.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
will illuminate.
Care (page 260).
4. While the seatbelt warning light is
illuminated, buckle then unbuckle the
driver seatbelt. After Step 4, the
seatbelt warning light will flash for
confirmation.
44
Seatbelts
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the

vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions

provided free of charge by Ford Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt

extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt

extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions

to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
45
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate supplementary restraint system or
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from associated components. Failure to follow
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to this instruction could result in personal
the trim covering the airbag module. injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Several airbag system

vehicle, including the driver, should always components get hot after inflation. To
properly wear their seatbelts, even when reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
an airbag supplemental restraint system after inflation.
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk WARNING: If a supplementary
of injury or death. restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
WARNING: Even with advanced and associated components inspected as
restraints systems, properly restrain soon as possible. Failure to follow this
children 12 and under in a rear seating instruction could result in personal injury
position. Failure to follow this could or death.
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
WARNING: Do not place your arms system and are designed to work with the
on the airbag cover or through the steering seatbelts to help protect the driver and
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction right front passenger from certain upper
could result in personal injury. body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
not affix anything to or over the airbag cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
covers. Objects could become projectiles airbag deploys. This is normal.
during airbag deployment or in a sudden The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could upon activation. After airbag deployment,
result in personal injury or death. it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
a child in a child restraint. Never place a (to lubricate the bag) or sodium
rear-facing child restraint in front of an compounds (for example, baking soda)
active airbag. If you must use a that result from the combustion process
forward-facing child restraint in the front that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
seat, move the seat upon which the child sodium hydroxide may be present which
restraint is installed all the way back. may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
46
While the system is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
E151127
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that The driver and front passenger airbags will
occupants be properly restrained as far deploy during significant frontal and near
away from the airbag module as possible frontal crashes.
while maintaining vehicle control.
The driver and passenger front airbag
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not system consists of:
required.
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
DRIVER AND PASSENGER with readiness indicator. See Crash
AIRBAGS Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
55).
WARNING: Never place your arm or

E67017
any objects over an airbag module. Placing
your arm over a deploying airbag can result Passenger Airbag On and Off
in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Switch (If Equipped)
Objects placed on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to
be propelled by the airbag into your face WARNING: Even with Restraints
and torso causing serious injury. Systems, children 12 and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure position. Failure to follow this could
a child in a child seat. Never place a seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing WARNING: The front passenger
child seat in the front seat, move the seat airbag is not designed to offer protection
upon which the child seat is installed all to an occupant in the center seating
the way back. position.
47
WARNING: An airbag ON and OFF

switch may be installed in this vehicle.
Before driving, always look at the face of
the switch to be sure the switch is in the
proper position in accordance with these
E170613
instructions and warnings. Failure to put
the switch in a proper position can increase The front passenger airbag on and off
the risk of serious injury or death in a crash. switch has indicators that will illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is located on the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON lamps illuminate for a short
period of time when you switch the ignition
on to confirm it is functional.
Switch position Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag

indicator
Off OFF: Lit Disabled

ON: Unlit
On OFF: Unlit Enabled
ON: Lit
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off

WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing
seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
WARNING: If the light fails to injuries from a deploying passenger airbag.
Rear facing infant seats should never be
illuminate when the passenger airbag
switch is off and the ignition is on, have the placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.
passenger airbag switch serviced at your
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING: In order to avoid

inadvertent activation of the switch,
always remove the ignition key from the
passenger airbag on and off switch.
48
2. When the ignition is turned on, the pass

airbag off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then turns
back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNING: The seatbelts for the

driver and right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically designed
to function together with the airbags in
certain types of crashes. When you turn off
your airbag, you not only lose the
protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your seatbelt
system, which was designed to work with
the airbag. If you are not a passenger who
meets the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria turning off the airbag
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.
E181523
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear
seats, always transport children who are
12 years and under in the rear seat. Always
use seatbelts and child restraints correctly.
Do not place a child in a rear facing infant
seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on and off switch
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
is because the back of the infant seat is
too close to the inflating airbag and the
risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the pass airbag off

light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is on and the ignition is on,
E181522
have the passenger airbag switch serviced
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch at your authorized dealer immediately.
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key. The passenger airbag remains off until you
turn it back on.
49
choose to deactivate your airbag, you are

losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also
reducing the effectiveness of the seatbelts,
because seatbelts in modern vehicles are
designed to work as a safety system with
the airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special

energy management seatbelts for the
E181521 driver and right front passenger. These
particular belts are specifically designed
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the to work with airbags to help reduce the risk
switch to ON. of injury in a crash. The energy
2. The pass airbag off light will briefly management seatbelt is designed to give
illuminate when the ignition is turned or release additional belt webbing in some
to on. This indicates that the passenger accidents to reduce concentration of force
airbag is operational. on an occupant's chest and reduce the risk
of certain bone fractures and injuries to
The passenger side airbag should always
underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag
be on (the pass airbag off light should not
is turned off, this energy management
be illuminated) unless the passenger
seatbelt might permit the person wearing
meets the requirements stated either in
the belt to move forward enough to incur
Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National Highway
a serious or fatal injury. The more severe
Traffic Safety Administration or Transport
the crash, and the heavier the occupant,
Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
The vast majority of drivers and passengers turned on for any person who does not
are much safer with an airbag than qualify under the National Highway Traffic
without. To do their job and reduce the risk Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can 1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
pose a potentially deadly risk in some must ride in the front seat because:
situations, particularly when a front seat
passenger is not using the seatbelt • The vehicle has no rear seat;
correctly. The most effective way to reduce • The vehicle has a rear seat too small
the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries to accommodate a rear-facing infant
without reducing the overall safety of your seat; or
vehicle is to make sure all passengers are • The infant has a medical condition
correctly restrained in the vehicle, which, according to the infant's
especially in the front seat. This provides physician, makes it necessary for the
the protection of seatbelts and permits the infant to ride in the front so that the
airbags to provide the additional protection driver can constantly monitor the
they were designed to provide. If you child's condition.
50
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must the belt to move forward enough to incur
ride in the front seat because: a serious or fatal injury. The more severe
• The vehicle has no rear seat; the crash, and the heavier the occupant,
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
the rear seat(s) whenever possible, turned on for any person who does not
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must qualify under the National Highway Traffic
ride in the front because no space is Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or 1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• The child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's • My vehicle has no rear seat;
physician, makes it necessary for the • The rear seat in my vehicle cannot
child to ride in the front seat so that the accommodate a rear-facing infant
driver can constantly monitor the seat;
child's condition.
• The infant has a medical condition
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a which, according to the infant's
medical condition which, according to his physician, makes it necessary for the
or her physician: infant to ride in the front seat so that
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose the driver can monitor the infant's
a special risk for the passenger; condition.
• Makes the potential harm from the 2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
passenger airbag in a crash greater under must ride in the front seat because:
than the potential harm from turning • My vehicle has no rear seat;
off the airbag and allowing the
• Athough children age 12 and under ride
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
in the rear seat whenever possible,
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
children age 12 and under have no
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria option but to sometimes ride in the
(Canada Only) front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
• The child has a medical condition that,
WARNING: This vehicle has special according to the child's physician,
energy management seatbelts for the makes it necessary for the child to ride
driver and right front passenger. These in the front seat so that the driver can
particular belts are specifically designed monitor the child's condition.
to work with airbags to help reduce the risk 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
of injury in a crash. The energy medical condition that, according to his or
management seatbelt is designed to give her physician:
or release additional belt webbing in some
accidents to reduce concentration of force
on an occupant's chest and reduce the risk
of certain bone fractures and injuries to
underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag
is turned off, this energy management
seatbelt might permit the person wearing
51
• Poses a special risk for the passenger Children and Airbags

if the airbag deploys; and
• Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
than the potential harm from turning a child in a child seat. Never place a
off the airbag and experiencing a crash rear-facing child seat in front of an active
without the protection offered by the airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
airbag child seat in the front seat, move the seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
Proper Driver and Front Passenger the way back.
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from

the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals E142846
comfortably.
Children must always be properly
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
degrees) from the upright position.
children are safer when properly restrained
After all occupants have adjusted their in the rear seating positions than in the
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very front seating position. Failure to follow
important that they continue to sit these instructions may increase the risk of
properly. Properly seated occupants sit injury in a crash.
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on SIDE AIRBAGS (If Equipped)
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
WARNING: Do not place objects or
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
mount equipment on or near the airbag
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
is greatly increased.
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
52
WARNING: Do not use accessory

seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head

on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
E152533
WARNING: Do not attempt to The system consists of the following:

service, repair, or modify the airbag, its
• A label or embossed side panel
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing
indicating that side airbags are found
an airbag as you could be seriously injured
on your vehicle.
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. • Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
WARNING: If the side airbag has passenger seats.
deployed, the airbag will not function ·Crash sensors and monitoring
again. The side airbag system (including system with readiness indicator.
the seat) must be inspected and serviced E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not Indicator (page 55).
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash. The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
The side airbags are located on the testing procedures that were developed
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front by a group of automotive safety experts
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the known as the Side Airbag Technical
airbag on the side affected by the crash Working Group. These recommended
will be inflated. The airbag was designed testing procedures help reduce the risk of
to inflate between the door panel and injuries related to the deployment of side
occupant to further enhance the protection airbags.
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
SAFETY CANOPY™ (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not place objects or

mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
53
WARNING: Do not lean your head

on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.

service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
E75004
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always The system consists of the following:
properly wear their seatbelts, even when • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
an airbag supplemental restraint system the trim panels over the front and rear
is provided. Failure to properly wear your side windows identified by a label or
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
of injury or death. trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, the side doors to allow air curtain
do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment
deployment path of the airbag.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
WARNING: If a supplementary system with a readiness
restraint system component has deployed,
E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors
it will not function again. Have the system and Airbag Indicator (page 55).
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this Properly restrain children 12 years old and
instruction could result in personal injury under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
or death. will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
The Safety Canopy deploys during
downward from the headliner above the
significant side crashes or when a certain
doors along the side window opening.
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy The design and development of the Safety
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, Canopy included recommended testing
behind the headliner, above each row of procedures that were developed by a
seats. In certain sideways crashes or group of automotive safety experts known
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be as the Side Airbag Technical Working
activated, regardless of which seats are Group. These recommended testing
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
to inflate between the side window area related to the deployment of side airbags
and occupants to further enhance (including the Safety Canopy).
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
54
CRASH SENSORS AND • The warning lamp will either flash or

stay illuminated.
AIRBAG INDICATOR
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the fault, the warning lamp or
WARNING: Modifying or adding both are repaired.
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
If the above occurs, even intermittently,
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
have the system checked by an authorized
front end body structure, tow hooks and
dealer immediately. Unless repaired, the
hood pins) may affect the performance of
system may not operate correctly in the
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
event of a crash.
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle. The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbags are designed to deploy when the
The vehicle has a collection of crash vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration
sensors which provide information to the sufficient to cause the supplemental
supplemental restraint system control restraint system control module to deploy
module. The system will deploy the front a safety device.
seatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag, The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
passenger airbag, seat mounted side or front airbags did not deploy for all front
airbags or safety canopy based on the type seat occupants in a crash does not mean
of crash, for example frontal impact or side there is a fault with the system. The
impact. The supplemental restraint system supplemental restraint system control
control module will deploy the appropriate module determines crash conditions,
safety devices. severity and seatbelt usage to deploy the
The supplemental restraint system control appropriate safety devices.
module also monitors the readiness of the • The design of the front airbags is to
above safety devices plus the crash deploy only in frontal and near-frontal
sensors. The readiness of the crashes, for example not rollovers, side
supplemental restraint system is indicated impacts or rear impacts, unless the
by a warning lamp in the instrument cluster crash causes sufficient longitudinal
or by a backup tone if the warning lamp is deceleration.
not working. Routine maintenance of the
airbags is not required. • The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to deploy only in
If a fault is present in the supplemental frontal and near-frontal crashes, and
restraint system it is indicated by one or may also deploy if a safety canopy
more of the following: deploys.
The warning lamp will not
illuminate when you switch the
E67017 ignition on.
55
• The design of the side airbags is to

deploy only in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may deploy in
other types of crashes if your vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the safety canopy is to
deploy only in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The safety
canopy may deploy in other types of
crashes if your vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation, or the likelihood of a
rollover event.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
56
Automatic Crash Notification System
911 ASSIST If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding

knee airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts
[if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist be able to contact emergency services by
setting is set on before a crash, the system dialing 911 through a paired and connected
will not dial for help which could delay Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
response time, potentially increasing the more about the 911 Assist feature, by
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. visiting:
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist Website

to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services www.owner.ford.com
immediately to avoid delayed response www.syncmyride.ca
time which could increase the risk of www.syncmaroute.ca
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds For important information about airbag
of the crash, the system or phone may be deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
damaged or non-functional. please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
WARNING: Always place your phone your owner manual.
in a secure location in your vehicle so it To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
does not become a projectile or get the settings information. See Settings
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may (page 428).
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist To make sure that 911 Assist works
from working properly. correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be properly at the time of the incident and
set on before the incident. throughout feature activation and use.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only • The 911 Assist feature must be set on
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory before the incident.
in which 911 is the emergency number. • You must pair and connect a
Note: Before setting this feature on, make Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy cell phone to SYNC.
Notice later in this section for important • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
information. must have the ability to make and
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, maintain an outgoing call at the time
that setting applies for all paired phones. If of the incident.
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the must have adequate network coverage,
status bar. battery power and signal strength.
Note: Every phone operates differently. • The vehicle must have battery power
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most and be located in the U.S., Canada or
cellular phones, some may have trouble in a territory in which 911 is the
using this feature. emergency number.
57
Automatic Crash Notification System
In the Event of a Crash 911 Assist Privacy Notice

Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the disclose to emergency services that your
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell vehicle has been in a crash involving the
phone sustains damage or loses its deployment of an airbag or activation of
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
will search for and try to connect to a updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will of electronically or verbally disclosing to
then attempt to call the emergency 911 operators your vehicle location or other
services. details about your vehicle or crash to assist
Before making the call: 911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
• SYNC provides a short window of time not want to disclose this information, do
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. not switch the feature on.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If

• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
58
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The typical operating range for your

transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
The remote control allows you to: Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
• remotely lock or unlock the vehicle could cause a decrease in operating range:
doors
• Weather conditions.
• unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent • Nearby radio towers.
access only) • Structures around the vehicle.
• remotely open the power liftgate (if • Other vehicles parked next to your
equipped) vehicle.
• remotely start or stop the engine (if Other short distance radio transmissions,
equipped) for example amateur radios, medical
• arm and disarm the anti-theft system equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems can also use
• activate the panic alarm.
the radio frequency used by your remote
control. If the frequencies are jammed, you
GENERAL INFORMATION ON will not be able to use your remote control.
RADIO FREQUENCIES You can lock and unlock the doors with the
key.
This device complies with Part 15 of the Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS leaving it unattended.
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation Note: If you are in range, the remote control
is subject to the following two conditions: will operate if you press any button
• This device may not cause harmful unintentionally.
interference, and
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
• This device must accept any electrical components. Exposure to moisture
interference received, including or impact may cause permanent damage.
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
59
REMOTE CONTROL - VEHICLES Make sure all new and existing remote
controls are present before beginning this
WITHOUT: PASSIVE ANTI- procedure. This procedure erases all
THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) existing programmed remote controls.
Reprogram all the existing remote controls
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If during this procedure.
Equipped) 1. Unlock the vehicle with the power door
unlock control.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on eight
times within six seconds, finishing in
the off position. A tone sounds to
indicate that it is now possible to
program a remote control.
3. Press and hold any button on the
remote control within 10 seconds. A
E177585 tone sounds as confirmation.
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and 4. Repeat step 3 within 10 seconds for
unlock or lock the driver door from outside each remote control.
your vehicle. Note: Programming ends when you switch
the ignition on, or after 10 seconds.
If you have successfully programmed the
remote control, it operates the remote
entry system.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat the process.
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
remote controls to your vehicle.
Changing the Remote Control

Battery
E138615
The remote control uses one coin-type
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
security label that provides important key equivalent.
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference. Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of remote control batteries.
Programming a New Remote Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
Control battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed remote control from your
vehicle. The remote control should operate
normally.
60
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note: If locking was not successful, any

door is open, or if the hood is open on
vehicles with an alarm or remote start then
the horn sounds but the direction indicators
do not flash.
Switching the Panic Alarm On and

Off
Press the button on the remote
control to switch the panic alarm
E138624 on. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to switch the panic
alarm off.
E138619
We recommend you do not use this
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the method to locate your vehicle.
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover. Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
2. Remove the old battery.
REMOTE CONTROL - VEHICLES

WITH: PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS)
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
E138620
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter. E177585
Locating Your Vehicle Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
Press the lock button on the remote your vehicle.
control twice within three seconds. The
horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash.
61
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E138615
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a E138619
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe 1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
place for future reference. transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
Programming a New Remote 2. Remove the old battery.
Control
To program a new remote control, See
Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75).
Changing the Remote Control

Battery
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or E138620
equivalent.
Note: Refer to local regulations when 3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
disposing of remote control batteries. instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the Press the battery down to make sure
battery terminals or on the back surface of it is fully in the housing.
the circuit board.
4. Reinstall the battery housing cover
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase onto the transmitter.
the programmed remote control from your
vehicle. The remote control should operate Locating Your Vehicle
normally.
Press the lock button on the remote
control twice within three seconds. The
horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash.
62
Note: If locking was not successful, any

door is open, or if the hood is open on
vehicles with an alarm or remote start then
the horn sounds but the direction indicators
do not flash.
Switching the Panic Alarm On and

Off
Press the button on the remote
control to switch the panic alarm
E138624 on. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to switch the panic
alarm off.
We recommend you do not use this

method to locate your vehicle.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Remote
Control (page 61).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
63
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Standard Settings

Not every vehicle includes the features
MyKey allows you to program keys with
listed below. If your vehicle has this
restricted driving modes to promote good
equipment, then you cannot change the
driving habits. You can only program up to
following settings when using a MyKey:
two keys with the restrictions. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator • Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
keys or admin keys. MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
You can use admin keys to: passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle Note: If your vehicle includes an
restrictions. AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
• Program certain MyKey settings. system, then the radio may not mute.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions. • Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
After you program a MyKey, you can view drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
the following information through the
information display: • Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
• The total number of admin keys and when you use the MyKey system. For
MyKeys for your vehicle. example, Blind Spot Information
• The total distance a MyKey driver System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
traveled with your vehicle. departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
able to turn the lane departure warning
restrictions and settings. You cannot
feature off, but this feature turns back
program them individually.
on automatically with every new key
Note: For vehicles equipped with a cycle.
push-button start switch: When both a • Restricted touchscreen operation in
MyKey and an admin key are present when some markets. For example, MyKey
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes may prevent manual navigation
the admin key only. destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
64
Note: Not every feature applies to every • Various vehicle speed reminders so
vehicle in every market. When they are MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
available for your vehicle, then they appear speed approaches the limits. Warnings
in your information display, providing appear in your information display and
choices to switch them on or off, or to select a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
a more specific setting. exceed the set vehicle speed.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the • The audio system's maximum volume
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
speeds. The information display shows concentrate on the road. A message
warnings followed by an audible tone appears in the information display
when the MyKey driver reaches the set when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
speed. You cannot override the set the limited volume. MyKey also
speed by fully depressing the disables the automatic volume control.
accelerator pedal. Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey • Always on setting. This setting forces
maximum speed limit to a limit that will certain features to remain on and
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe active for MyKey drivers. For example,
speed considering posted speed limits and E911 or emergency assistance and the
prevailing road conditions. The driver is do not disturb features stay on even if
always responsible to drive in accordance a MyKey driver uses the feature's
with local laws and prevailing conditions. control to switch it off. When you
Failure to do so could result in accident or select, you will not be able to turn off
injury. Advance Trac or traction control (if
your vehicle has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 127). If your vehicle is
equipped with a push-button start,
place the remote control into the
backup slot. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 127).
2. Switch the ignition on.
65
3. Access the main menu in the Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
information display and then scroll settings at any time during the same key
through the menus to change the cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
settings of your MyKey. From the have switched the vehicle off, however, you
MyKey menu select the option Create will need an admin key to change or clear
MyKey. See Information Displays your MyKey settings.
(page 99).
4. When prompted, hold the OK button CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
until you see a message informing you
to label this key as a MyKey. The When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
programmed restrictions apply when all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
you key off, open and close the driver their original admin key status at once. To
door and restart your vehicle with the clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
programmed key or transmitter. the information display.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
you label it so you can distinguish it from key.
the admin keys.
2. Access the main menu in the
You can also program configurable information display and then scroll
settings for the key(s). See through the menus to begin clearing
Programming/Changing Configurable your MyKey programming. See
Settings. Information Displays (page 99).
Programming/Changing 3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Configurable Settings 4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
Use the information display to access your MyKeys.
configurable MyKey settings.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
the transmitter you want to program. to their original admin key status. You
2. Access the main menu in the cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
information display and then scroll individually.
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 99).
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 99).
66
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
67
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start

systems. If you choose to install a remote
START SYSTEMS start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MyKey is not compatible with non
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 75).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 65).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
MyKey (page 65).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
68
Condition Potential Causes
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 75).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the keyless • An admin transmitter is present at vehicle

entry transmitter. start.
MyKey (page 65).
69
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Unlocking the Rear Cargo Doors

Press the button.
Locking
Locking With the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of Reprogramming the Unlocking
your vehicle. Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
Locking With the Remote Control either all the doors are unlocked or only the
Press the button once. The driver and passenger doors are unlocked.
direction indicators will flash. You can reprogram the unlocking function
Press the button again within so that all doors are unlocked.
three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The horn sounds and the Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
direction indicators flash. on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
Note: You can lock the driver door with the The direction indicators flash twice to
key. Use the key when the remote control confirm the change.
is not functioning.
To return to the original unlocking function,
Note: Make sure you have locked your repeat the process.
vehicle before leaving it unattended.
You can also change between the
Note: Do not leave the keys in your vehicle. unlocking modes using the information
display. See General Information (page
Unlocking 99).
Unlocking With the Key
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Turn the top of the key toward the front of From Inside
your vehicle.
B
Unlocking With the Remote Control
Press the button once. The
direction indicators will flash.
Note: You can unlock the driver door with

the key. Use the key when the remote
control is not functioning.
Note: When you leave your vehicle
unattended for several weeks, the remote A
control turns off. E148829
Note: Unlock your vehicle and start the

engine using the key. Unlocking and starting A Lock.
your vehicle once enables the remote B Unlock.
control.
70
Doors and Locks
Opening and Closing the Sliding Closing the Sliding Door

Door
Opening the Sliding Door
2 1
E171966
E148804
Pull the interior door handle to open the

door.
2
1
E172313
1. Pull the door handle to release the door

check feature.
2. Slide the door to close.
71
Doors and Locks
Opening the Double Rear Doors Fully Opening the Double Rear Doors
E148805
E178366
1. Slide the lever to release the catch.

2. Fully open the cargo door.
Unlocking and Opening the Double

Rear Doors From Inside
E148806
E175828
1. Lift the locking button up.
72
Doors and Locks
Rear Emergency Exit

Wagon and Bus
E255876
2. Pull the upper release lever toward you

or slide the lower release lever
downward to open the door. E236264
1. Lift the locking button up.
E148806
3. Pull the release lever to open the other E179501
door.
2. Pull the interior handle up to open the
door in an emergency.
Autolock (If Equipped)

Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
73
Doors and Locks
• You shift into any gear putting your You unlock the front doors and cargo area
vehicle in motion. when you:
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater • Press the unlock button on the remote
than 5 mph (8 km/h). control once.
Use the interior door unlock button or • Press the unlock button on the remote
switch the ignition off and use the key or control twice within three seconds.
remote control to unlock the rear or sliding
door. Zone Re-Locking (If Equipped)
Autounlock If you enable zone re-locking and open one

door, all other doors remain locked. See an
Autounlock unlocks all doors within 10 authorized dealer for further information.
minutes of the end of a drive cycle, when The locks on van, bus or wagon have two
the driver door is opened and the ignition zones, cabin and cargo. For van, the cargo
is off. area includes the rear doors and the sliding
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock door. For bus or wagon, the cargo area
includes the rear doors.
You can enable or disable autounlock in • Exit your vehicle and press the lock
the information display. See Information button.
Displays (page 99).
• Press the unlock button or the cargo
One-Stage Unlocking area unlock button once to open the
respective zone.
You can switch on this function using the
information display. See Information If you now open a door within the unlocked
Displays (page 99). zone, the other doors in that zone
automatically lock.
If you have switched on this function, you
unlock all doors including the rear doors Configurable Unlocking
and the sliding door.
Configurable unlocking is set when you
You unlock all of the doors when you: purchase your vehicle. It allows you to
• Press the unlock button on the remote select which doors unlock when you press,
control once. once or twice, the unlock button or the
• Press the interior unlock button once. cargo area unlock button on your remote
control. You cannot switch this feature
Two-Stage Unlocking back on if you had it switched off. See an
authorized dealer for further information.
You unlock the front doors when you:
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
• Press the interior unlock button once.
74
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Automatic Disarming

SYSTEM (If Equipped) Switching the ignition on with a correctly
coded key disarms the engine
Note: The system is not compatible with immobilization system.
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle Replacement Keys
starting problems and a loss of security The integrated keyhead transmitter
protection. functions as a programmed ignition key
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices that operates all the locks and starts your
or a second coded key on the same key vehicle, as well as a remote control.
chain may cause vehicle starting problems If your keys are lost or stolen and you do
if they are too close to the key when starting not have a spare correctly coded key, you
the engine. Prevent these objects from will need to have your vehicle towed to an
touching the coded key while starting the authorized dealer. You need to erase the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all coded keys from your vehicle and program
objects on the key chain away from the new coded keys.
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs. Store an extra correctly coded key away
from the vehicle in a safe place to help
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key prevent any inconveniences. See an
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and authorized dealer to purchase additional
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. spare or replacement keys.
SecuriLock® Programming a Spare Integrated
The system is an engine immobilization Keyhead Transmitter
system. It is designed to help prevent the You can program your own integrated
engine from being started unless a keyhead transmitter or standard
correctly coded key for your vehicle is used. SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
Using an incorrectly coded key may procedure will program both the engine
prevent the engine from starting. A immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
message may appear in the information portion of the remote control to your
display. vehicle
If you are unable to start the engine with a Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
correctly coded key, a malfunction has or standard SecuriLock keys.
happened and a message may appear in
the information display. You must have two previously
programmed correctly coded keys and the
Automatic Arming new unprogrammed key readily accessible.
See an authorized dealer to have the spare
The engine immobilization system arms key programmed if two previously
immediately after you switch the ignition programmed correctly coded keys are not
off. available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
correctly coded key into the ignition.
75
Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep ANTI-THEFT ALARM

the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Alarm System
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first correctly coded key from the The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
ignition. unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors, luggage compartment
4. After three seconds but within 10 and the hood.
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously correctly Triggering the Alarm
coded key into the ignition.
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
of the following ways:
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. • If someone opens a door, cargo area
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the or the hood without a valid key or
second previously programmed remote control.
correctly coded key from the ignition. • If you switch the ignition on without a
valid key.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off If the alarm is triggered, the horn will sound
and removing the previously for 30 seconds and the hazard warning
programmed correctly coded key, flasher will flash for five minutes.
insert the new unprogrammed key into Any further attempts to perform one of the
the ignition. above will trigger the alarm again.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds. Arming the Alarm
9. Remove the newly programmed To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
correctly coded key from the ignition. Doors and Locks (page 70).
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and Disarming the Alarm
operate the remote entry system (if the Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
new key is an integrated keyhead the doors with the key and switching the
transmitter). ignition on with a correctly coded key
If the key was not successfully within 12 seconds, or by unlocking the
programmed, wait 10 seconds and repeat doors or the cargo area with the remote
Steps 1 through 8. If you are still control.
unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
76
Power Running Boards
USING POWER RUNNING Automatic Power Deploy

BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,

excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
E171469
WARNING: Switch off the running
The power running board extends when
boards before jacking or placing any object
you open the door.
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and Automatic Power Stow
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the power running boards,

front and rear hinge assemblies, running
board motors or the running board
underbody mounts to lift your vehicle when
jacking. Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The power running boards may
operate more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
E171470
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the power running When you close the door, the power
boards to the deployed position. Then wash running board returns to the stowed
the system in particular the front and rear position after a two-second delay.
hinge arms with a high-pressure car wash
wand. Manual Power Deploy
Note: If you drive off when the power
You can manually operate the power
running boards are deployed the engine may
running boards in the information display.
stop.
See General Information (page 99).
Note: In the event of a malfunction you can
stow the power running boards manually.
77
To set the power running boards to the deployed position, scroll to:
Message Action
Driver assist Press the OK button.

Power step Press the OK button.
Deploy Press the OK button.
Enabling and Disabling

You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
99).
To enable or disable the power running board feature, scroll to:

Message Action and Description
Driver assist Press the OK button.

Power step Press the OK button.
Off Press the OK button. When disabled the power running
boards move to the stowed position regardless of the door
position.
Auto Press the OK button. When enabled the power running boards
move to the correct position based on the door position.
When you switch the ignition on, the

system turns on.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
Manual Operation
If the power running board does not return
to the stowed position, you can manually
stow it.
78
E171471
Insert the lug wrench into the guide hole

and turn the handle clockwise until the
running board is in the stowed position.
Resetting the System

You can reset the system by opening and
closing the sliding door.
79
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the

steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 113).
2 3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
2
1
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
80
Steering Wheel
You can operate the following functions VOICE CONTROL

with the control:
D B
C
E159531
E159789
Press the button to select or deselect voice
A Volume up. control. See SYNC™ (page 349). See
Audio Unit (page 333).
B Seek up, next or end call.
C Volume down.
CRUISE CONTROL
D Seek down, previous or accept
call.
Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
E142437
See Using Cruise Control (page 168).
81
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E130248
See Information Displays (page 99).
82
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe
E197526
E197525
A Short wipe interval.

A Single wipe.
B Intermittent wipe.
B Intermittent wipe.
C Long wipe interval.
C Normal wipe.
D High-speed wipe. Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: The wipers remain in a slightly raised
position during operation and only return to
Note: Make sure that you switch the
the park position when you switch
windshield wipers off before entering a car
intermittent wipe off.
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper When your vehicle speed increases, the
Blades (page 246). If that does not resolve interval between wipes decreases.
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Changing the Front Wiper Blades (page AUTOWIPERS
246).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry Autowipers uses a rain sensor in the area
windshield. This may scratch the glass or around the interior mirror. The wipers
damage the wiper blades. Always use the operate when the rain sensor detects
windshield washers before wiping a dry water on the windshield in front of it. The
windshield. rain sensor continues to monitor the
amount of water and adjusts the speed of
the wipers.
Note: The wipers remain in a slightly raised
position during operation and only return to
the park position a short time after the rain
sensor detects no water on the windshield.
83
Wipers and Washers
You can switch autowipers off in the Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
information display. If you switch you switch the windshield wipers on.
autowipers off, the windshield wipers
Note: Make sure that you switch the
operate in intermittent mode.
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Wet or winter weather conditions could
cause unexpected wiping or smearing.
To keep the windshield clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
E197526
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades. See
A High sensitivity. Changing the Front Wiper Blades (page
B Autowipers on. 246).
C Low sensitivity.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Move the wiper lever upward to the first
position to switch autowipers on.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Note: Keep the outside of the windshield
clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and
the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or E144498
insects hit the windshield. Pull the lever toward you to operate the
If you leave autowipers on, it may not windshield washers. When you release the
operate when you switch the ignition on lever, the wipers operate for a short time.
during freezing temperatures. This is Note: Do not operate the washers when
because the system has deactivated the the washer reservoir is empty. This may
rain sensor to prevent damage to the cause the washer pump to overheat.
windshield wipers. Defrost the windshield
before reactivating the rain sensor. You
can reactivate the rain sensor by moving
the rotary control or switching autowipers
off and on.
84
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front Lighting Control Positions
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have A B C D
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits E175211
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours A Off.
under dry weather conditions. B Parking lamps. Instrument panel
Examples of acceptable condensation are: lamps. License plate lamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, C Headlamps.
drip marks or large droplets). D Autolamps.
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens. Parking Lamps
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are: Select position B on the lighting control to
switch the parking lamps on.
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
when the ignition is off will cause the battery
present on the interior of the lens.
to run out of charge.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
Note: Parking lamps may turn off
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
automatically when the ignition is off. This
dealer.
prevents the vehicle battery from running
out of charge.
85
Lighting
Headlamp High Beam
E163718
E142451
Push the lever away from you to switch When the lighting control is in the
the high beam on. autolamps position, the headlamps
Push the lever forward again or pull the automatically turn on in low light situations
lever toward you to switch the high beams or when the wipers turn on.
off. The headlamps remain on for a period of
Headlamp Flasher time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 99).
Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can
only switch the high beam headlamps on
when the autolamps turn the headlamps
on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

E163719
Headlamps
Slightly pull the lever toward you.
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
WARNING: The autolamps switch
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
position may not activate the headlamps
activation:
in all low visibility conditions, such as
daytime fog. Always ensure that your • During a mist wipe.
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as • When the wipers are on to clear washer
appropriate, during all low visibility fluid during a wash condition.
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a • If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
crash.
86
Lighting
Note: If you switch autolamps and The daytime running lamps turn on when:
autowipers on, the headlamps will 1. The ignition is switched to the on
automatically turn on when the windshield position.
wipers continuously operate.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING or the parking brake is released for
DIMMER vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off or
autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E175219
Press it repeatedly or press it and hold it

until the desired level is reached.
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
loses charge the instrument lighting will
return to its brightest setting. E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If direction indicators.
Equipped)
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Also, the autolamps switch
position may not activate the headlamps
in all low visibility conditions, such as
daytime fog. Make sure the headlamps are
switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a crash.
87
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS Reading Lamps
Courtesy Lamp
A B C
E112208
If you switch the ignition off, the reading

lamps will automatically turn off after a
E112207 short period of time to prevent the vehicle
battery from losing charge. To switch them
A Off back on, switch the ignition on for a short
period of time.
B Door contact
C On
CARGO LAMPS
If you set the switch to position B, the
courtesy lamps will automatically turn on Switching the Cargo Lamps Off
when you unlock your vehicle or open a
Press the button to switch the cargo lamps
door. If you leave a door open with the
off when a door is open.
ignition switched off, they will
automatically turn off after a short period Note: The cargo lamps switch only
of time to prevent the vehicle battery from operates when the ignition is off.
losing charge. To switch them back on, The switch is inside the cargo area, behind
switch the ignition on for a short period of the left-hand rear door.
time.
The cargo lamps turn off after a short
The courtesy lamps will automatically turn period of time to prevent the battery from
on when you switch the ignition off. They running out of charge.
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time to prevent the vehicle Switching the Cargo Lamps On
battery from losing charge.
If you set the switch to position C with the
on.
ignition switched off, the courtesy lamps
will turn on. They will automatically turn If the cargo lamps turned off to prevent
off after a short period of time to prevent the battery from running out of charge or
the vehicle battery from losing charge. To you switched them off by pressing the
switch them back on, switch the ignition button, reset the switch first.
on for a short period of time.
88
Lighting
Resetting the Switch

To reset the switch, do one of the
following:
• Lock or unlock a door.
• Open or close a front door.
• Switch the ignition on then off.
on.
89
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS Driver Side One-Touch Down

Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
WARNING: To avoid risk of injury, do
not leave children or pets unattended in Driver Side One-Touch Up
your vehicle. Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, you should verify they are free Bounce-Back
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity The window will automatically stop and
of the window openings. reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the

bounce-back feature the window will not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To override this protection feature when

there is a resistance, for example in winter:
E146043
1. Close the window twice until it reaches
Press the control to open the window. The the point of resistance and let it
window will stop if you release the switch reverse.
before the window fully opens. 2. Close the window a third time to the
Lift the control to close the window. The point of resistance. Bounce-back is
window will stop if you release the switch now disabled and you can close the
before the window fully closes. window manually. The window will go
past the point of resistance and you
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when can close it fully.
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this If the window does not close after the third
noise. attempt the system requires service.
Accessory Delay Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
You can use the window switches for

several minutes when you switch the WARNING: The bounce-back
ignition off or until you open any door. feature remains turned off until it is reset.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.
90
Windows and Mirrors
2. Release the switch.

3. Lift the switch again for one second.
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift the switch again for one second.
6. Open the window and then try to close
using the one-touch feature.
7. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close using the one-touch
feature.
Note: If you disconnect the battery, you
E71281
must reset the bounce-back memory.
Move the controller in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the mirror.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
Power Exterior Mirrors
Folding and Unfolding
The power folding mirrors operate with the
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
ignition on, and for several minutes after
when your vehicle is moving. This could
you switch the ignition off.
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E72184
Move the controller downward to fold or

E71280
unfold the mirrors.
A Left-hand mirror Note: You can only fold the mirrors when
the controller is set to position B.
B Off
Note: If you fold and unfold the mirrors
C Right-hand mirror several times within one minute, the power
fold function may turn off to protect the
motors from overheating.
Note: Do not manually fold or unfold power
folding mirrors.
91
Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors REAR QUARTER WINDOWS

Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the Opening the Rear Quarter
mirror in its support when you unfold it. Windows
1
INTERIOR MIRROR
Manual Dimming Mirror
2
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you E170036

to reduce the effect of bright light from
1. Press the unlock button to release the
behind.
catch.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Depending on the lock type fitted,
you will have to either press the unlock
buttons together or down to release the
catch.
when your vehicle is moving. This could 2. Hold the catch and push the window
result in the loss of control of your vehicle, open. Make sure the catch engages.
serious personal injury or death. Note: There is an audible click when the
catch engages.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to Closing the Rear Quarter Windows
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into 1. Hold and pull the catch to close the
reverse (R). window.
Do not block the sensors on the front and 2. Press the catch to engage the lock.
back of the mirror. Note: There is an audible click when the
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear lock engages.
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
92
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
E184961
A Information display. See Trip Computer

Information Displays (page See Trip Computer (page 102).
99).
B Speedometer. Vehicle Settings and Personalization
C Engine coolant temperature See General Information (page 99).

gauge.
Engine Coolant Temperature
D Tripmeter reset and distance to Gauge
empty toggle button.
E Fuel gauge.
F Tachometer. WARNING: Never remove the
coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Information Display
Odometer At normal operating temperature, the
needle will remain in the center section.
Registers the distance your vehicle has
traveled.
Outside Air Temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.
93
Instrument Cluster
If the needle enters the red section, the The needle should move toward F when
engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
soon as it is safe to do so and switch the to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
engine off. Determine the cause once the vehicle needs service soon.
engine has cooled down. See Engine After refueling some variability in needle
Coolant Check (page 236). position is normal:
Note: Do not restart the engine until the • It may take a short time for the needle
cause of overheating has been determined to reach F after leaving the gas station.
and resolved. This is normal and depends upon the
Tripmeter Reset and Distance to slope of pavement at the gas station.
Empty (If Equipped) • The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
Press the button to change between the gauge indicated. This is normal and
tripmeter and distance to empty depends upon the slope of pavement
information. Press and hold the button to at the gas station.
reset the tripmeter. • If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
Fuel Gauge
gas pump nozzle.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. Low Fuel Reminder
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
indicate approximately how much fuel is gauge needle is at 1/16th.
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side
of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Variations:
Driving type (fuel economy Fuel gauge position Distance-to-empty
conditions)
Highway driving 1/16th 35 miles to 80 miles (56 km

to 129 km)
Severe duty driving (trailer 1/16th 35 miles (56km)
towing, extended idle)
94
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND If it illuminates when the engine is running

this indicates a malfunction. Have your
INDICATORS vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition Brake System Warning Lamp
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain WARNING: Driving extended
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the distances with the parking brake engaged
respective system warning lamp for further can cause brake failure and the risk of
information. personal injury.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the It illuminates when you engage
same as a warning lamp but do not the parking brake and the
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
E138644
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
Airbag Warning Lamp moving, make sure the parking brake is
If it does not illuminate when you disengaged. If the parking brake is
switch the ignition on, continues disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
E67017 to flash or remains on when the level or a brake system fault. Have your
engine is running, this indicates a vehicle immediately checked.
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked It momentarily illuminates when you
as soon as possible. switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning you switch the ignition on, or begins to
Lamp flash at any time, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a Diesel Warning Lamps (If Equipped)
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Lamp
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It illuminates when the diesel
exhaust fluid is low.
It momentarily illuminates when you E163176
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when If it illuminates, the information display
you switch the ignition on, or begins to message advises whether it is diesel
flash at any time, have your vehicle exhaust fluid level related or due to a
checked as soon as possible. system malfunction. If the diesel exhaust
fluid level is sufficient, this indicates a
system malfunction. Have your vehicle
Battery Charging Condition checked as soon as possible.
Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
95
Instrument Cluster
Glow Plug Indicator Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Lamp
If it illuminates, wait until it turns
off before starting. If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
Water In Fuel Warning Lamp vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
If it illuminates when the engine switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
is running this indicates there is checked as soon as possible.
excess water in the fuel filter.
This occurs when approximately 7 fl oz Engine Warning Lamps
(200 ml) of water accumulates in the fuel
filter water trap. Have your vehicle Powertrain Warning Lamp
Alternatively you may be able to drain the
fuel filter water trap. If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a malfunction. Drive in a
See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap moderate fashion (avoid heavy
(page 242). acceleration and deceleration). Continuing
Note: If it illuminates when the engine is to drive your vehicle may cause reduced
running after draining the fuel filter water power or the engine to stop. Switch the
trap, this indicates a fuel filter service is ignition off and attempt to restart the
required. Have your vehicle checked as soon engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Direction Indicator
It illuminates when you switch a
direction indicator or the hazard If it illuminates when the engine is running
flashers on. Flashes during this indicates a malfunction. The On Board
operation. An increase in the rate of Diagnostics system has detected a
flashing warns of a failed indicator bulb. malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
could also indicate that the trailer tow If it flashes, engine misfire may be
system has detected a fault that requires occurring. Increased exhaust gas
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon temperatures could damage the catalytic
as possible. converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
Door Ajar acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.
the ignition on and remains on if It illuminates when you switch the ignition
any door or the hood is open. on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
96
Instrument Cluster
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is If it does not illuminate when you switch
cranked and automatically turns off if no the ignition on, or flashes when the engine
malfunctions are present. However, if after is running, this indicates a malfunction.
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this Have your vehicle checked as soon as
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. System (page 287).
See Engine Emission Control (page 141).
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp Lamp
It illuminates and a chime
It illuminates when the washer
sounds until you fasten the
fluid is low.
E71880 seatbelts. E132353
Headlamp High Beam Indicator Message Center Indicator

It illuminates when you switch It illuminates when a new
the headlamp high beam on. message is stored in the
information display.
Lamps on Indicator The indicator is red or amber depending

on the severity of the condition and it
It illuminates when you switch remains on until the condition is resolved.
the headlamp low beam or the See Information Messages (page 103).
side and rear lamps on.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
Lane Departure Warning Indicator
the system off. WARNING: If it illuminates when you
It illuminates when the system are driving do not continue your journey,
is not available and may indicate that the even if the oil level is correct. Have your
system requires service. Have your vehicle vehicle checked.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp malfunction. Stop your vehicle
If it illuminates when you are as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
driving, refuel as soon as engine off.
possible.
Check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
sufficient, this indicates a system
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp malfunction. Have your vehicle
(If Equipped) immediately checked.
It illuminates if the tire pressure
in one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.
97
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control and Traction Exterior Lamps On

Control Indicator
Sounds when you open the driver door and
Flashes during operation. the exterior lamps are on.
E138639 If it does not illuminate when you Transmission Selector Lever Not
switch the ignition on, or remains in park (P)
on when the engine is running, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle Sounds when you open the driver door and
checked as soon as possible. the transmission is not in park (P).
Note: The system automatically turns off
if there is a malfunction.
Key in Ignition
See Stability Control (page 161). See Sounds when the driver door is open and
Traction Control (page 160). the key is in the ignition.
Stability Control and Traction Parking Brake On

Control Off Warning Lamp Sounds when the parking brake is on and
It illuminates when you switch your vehicle is moving. If the warning
the system off. chime remains on after you have released
E130458 the parking brake, the system has detected
a fault that requires service. Have your
Tow/Haul Warning Lamp vehicle immediately checked.
It illuminates when you switch Seatbelt Reminder
the system on.
E161509
If it flashes when the engine is
running this indicates a malfunction and WARNING: Do not sit on top of a
could lead to transmission damage that fastened seatbelt to prevent the seatbelt
may not be covered by the vehicle reminder from coming on. The occupant
Warranty. Have your vehicle checked as protection system will only provide
soon as possible. optimum protection when you use the
seatbelt properly.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in

INDICATORS an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
Airbag Secondary Warning
Sounds when the airbag system and the
airbag warning lamp requires service.
Door Ajar
Sounds when a door is not fully closed and
your vehicle is moving.
98
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION • Press the up and down arrow buttons

to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
WARNING: Driving while distracted submenu.
and injury. We strongly recommend that • Press the left arrow button to exit a
you use extreme caution when using any submenu.
device that may take your focus off the • Press the OK button to choose and
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe confirm settings or messages.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device Menu Structure
voice-operated systems when possible. You can access the menu using the
Make sure you are aware of all applicable information display control.
local laws that may affect the use of This icon gives you the ability to
electronic devices while driving. switch a feature on or off. A
E204495 check in the box indicates the
You can control various systems on your feature is enabled, and unchecked
vehicle using the information display indicates the feature is disabled.
controls on the steering wheel. Note: Some options may appear slightly
The information display shows the different or not at all if the items are
corresponding information. optional.
Information Display Controls Main Menu

Trip computer 1
Trip computer 2
Information
Settings
E138659
99
Trip computer 1
Trip computer 2
1
All Values
Speed
Trip Odometer
Average Fuel Ford EcoMode Gear Shifting
Anticipation
Speed
Information
Distance to E
Trip Timer
Outside Temp.
1 This feature is seen on high level clusters.
Note: The trip computer readings can be

reset independently. See Trip Computer
(page 102).
Information
Driver Alert
DEF Level
Exhaust Filter
Engine Hours
Engine Hours
Trailer Brake
MyKey
MyKey Info
System Check
100
Settings
Driver Assist Traction Ctrl
Auto Exh.Clean
Driver Alert
Tire Monitor
Power Step Auto
Deploy
Off
Trailer Brake Electric
Elec.-Hydraulic
Lane Keeping
Display Navigation info
Language Choose your applicable setting.
Distance Choose your applicable setting.
Temperature Choose your applicable setting.
Convenience Compass Display
Calibrate
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Global Unlock
Custom Lock
MyKey Create MyKey Create MyKey
Traction Ctrl Always On
User selectable
Max Speed Choose your applicable setting.
Off
Speed Warning Choose your applicable setting.
101
Settings
Off
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Clear MyKey
System Check Distance to Empty
All active warnings will display first if Indicates the approximate distance your
applicable. The system check menu may vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
appear different based upon equipment
cause the value to vary.
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll Outside Air Temperature
through the list. See Information
Messages (page 103). Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Odometer
TRIP COMPUTER
Registers the distance traveled of
Resetting the Trip Computer individual journeys.
Press and hold OK on the current screen Trip Timer
to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and average fuel consumption information. Registers the elapsed time of individual
journeys or the total time since the function
All Values was last reset.
Indicates all the respective trip, distance, Digital Speedometer
time and average fuel consumption
information. Provides a digital display of the current
vehicle speed.
Average Fuel Consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumption PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
since the function was last reset.
Measure Units
You can choose personalized settings
using the information display control on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 99).
102
To swap between imperial and metric units, scroll to:

Display Press the OK button.

Measure unit Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.
Swapping between imperial and metric units will affect the
following displays:
• Average fuel consumption.
• Distance to empty.
• Odometer.
• Outside temperature units.
• Trip odometer.
• Digital Speedometer.
Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
INFORMATION MESSAGES information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short period of time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages.
The indicator is red or amber depending
on the severity of the condition and it
remains on until the condition is resolved.
A system-specific symbol with a message
indicator may supplement some
messages.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
E130248 and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
Airbag
Message Action
Airbag fault Service now Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
103
Battery and Charging System

Message Action
Electrical system over- Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
voltage Stop safely engine off.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Battery low See manual Displays if the battery is low or has no charge. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical equipment. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level

Message Action
DEF level low Range XXX Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
mi Refill now diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty. Refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
max in XXX mi diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty and when it will restrict
your vehicle speed. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon
as possible.
DEF level empty Speed Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
limited to YY MPH your vehicle speed is being restricted. Refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
max Upon restart your vehicle speed will be restricted when you restart your
vehicle. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty Engine Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
idled soon the engine will soon be restricted to idle operation.
DEF level empty Engine Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
idled See manual the engine is restricted to idle operation.
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank from empty, there may be a short period
before the increased diesel exhaust fluid level is registered. The system must register the
increased diesel exhaust fluid level before your vehicle will return to full power.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid System Malfunction

Message Action
DEF fault YY MPH max in Indicates that your vehicle speed will soon be restricted.
XXXX mi
104
Message Action
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have

your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF fault Speed limited Indicates that your vehicle speed is restricted.
to YY MPH The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
DEF fault Engine idled Indicates that the engine will soon be restricted to idle oper-
soon ation.
DEF fault Engine idled Indicates that the engine is restricted to idle operation.
See manual The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates that your vehicle speed will be restricted when you
max Upon restart restart your vehicle.
Door Open
Message Action
Driver door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
(P), apply the parking brake and close the door.
Driver side rear door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
Passenger door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
Passenger side rear door Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
ajar (P), apply the parking brake and close the door.
Hood open Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
(P), apply the parking brake and close the hood.
Rear load compartment Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, shift into park
door ajar (P), apply the parking brake and close the door.
105
Engine
Message Action
Engine fault Service now Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
High engine temperature Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your
Stop safely vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, switch the engine off
and allow it to cool. If the problem persists, have your vehicle
See Engine Coolant Check (page 236).
Lighting
Message Action
Brake lamp Bulb fault Displays if a brake lamp bulb fails.

See Lighting (page 85).
Low beam Bulb fault Displays if a low beam bulb fails.
See Lighting (page 85).
Headlamp fault Service Displays if an electrical malfunction occurs with the headlamp
required system. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Maintenance
Message Action
Oil change required Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and your vehicle
requires an oil change.
See Engine Oil Check (page 234).
Water detected in fuel Displays if the system detects there is excess water in the
Service required fuel filter.
See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 242).
Brake fluid level low Displays if the brake fluid level is low or if there is a brake
Service now system fault. Have your vehicle checked immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 241).
Washer fluid level low Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.
See Washer Fluid Check (page 242).
106
Occupant Protection
Message Action
Service Beltminder The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
Parking Aid
Message Action
Parking aid fault Service The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
required your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parking Brake
Message Action
Park brake applied Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and your vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the warning message remains on after you have released
the parking brake, the system has detected a fault that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Starting System
Message Action
Press brake to start Displays when you start your vehicle as a reminder to fully
press the brake pedal.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 126).
Cranking time exceeded Displays if your vehicle fails to start.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 126).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Message Action
Low Tire Pressure Displays if the tire pressure in one or more tires is below the
correct pressure.
107
Message Action
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 287).

Tire Pressure Monitor The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
Fault your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Displays if the system detects a fault with a tire pressure
Fault sensor or the spare tire is in use.
If the warning message remains on after you have checked
the tire pressures, the system has detected a fault that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
108
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
A B C D E
E147011
A Fan speed control: Controls the C Temperature control: Controls

volume of air circulated in your the temperature of the air
vehicle. Adjust to select the circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
desired fan speed or switch off. to select the desired
If you switch the fan off, the temperature. If you select MAX
windshield may fog up. A/C, the system distributes
recirculated air through the
B Recirculated air: Press the instrument panel air vents. This
button to switch between mode is more economical and
outside air and recirculated air. efficient than normal air
When you select recirculated air, conditioning. Turn the
the air currently in the passenger temperature control to
compartment recirculates. This maximum heat to turn the
can reduce the time needed to auxiliary heater on
cool the interior, when used with
A/C, and reduce unwanted D Air conditioning: Press the
odors from entering your vehicle. button to switch the air
conditioning on or off. To
Note: Recirculation air may turn improve air conditioning when
off automatically, or be starting your vehicle, drive with
prevented from turning on in all the windows open for two to
airflow modes except MAX A/C three minutes.
to reduce risk of fogging.
Recirculated air may also turn on E Air distribution control: Adjust
and off automatically in to select the desired air
instrument panel or instrument distribution.
panel and floor airflow modes
during hot weather to improve Select to distribute air through
cooling efficiency. the instrument panel air vents.
109
Climate Control
Select to distribute air through Heating the Interior Quickly

the instrument panel air vents
and footwell air vents. • Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Select to distribute air through • Adjust the temperature control to the
the footwell air vents. highest setting.
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
Select to distribute air through footwell air vents position.
the windshield air vents and
footwell air vents. Recommended Settings for
Select to distribute air through Heating
the windshield air vents. You can • Adjust the fan speed to the second
also use this setting to defog or speed setting.
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice. You can also increase the temperature • Adjust the temperature control to the
and fan speed to improve clearing. midway point of the hot settings.
footwell and windshield air vents
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE position.
INTERIOR CLIMATE Cooling the Interior Quickly
General Hints • Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. • Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
Note: A small amount of air may be felt
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
instrument panel air vents position.
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside Recommended Settings for
your vehicle, do not drive with the system Cooling
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on. • Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
• Adjust the temperature control to the
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
midway point of the cold settings.
to the rear seats.
Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the instrument panel air vents position.
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate control Vehicle Stationary for Extended
system to function effectively. Periods During Extreme High
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield Ambient Temperatures
during humid weather, adjust the air
• Apply the parking brake.
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position. Increase the temperature • Move the transmission selector lever
and fan speed and press the A/C button to to position P or neutral.
improve clearing, if required.
110
Climate Control
• Adjust the temperature control to the Directing Air to the Footwell Air
MAX A/C position. Vents
• Adjust the fan speed to the lowest When you direct air to the
speed setting. footwell air vents, the system
Side Window Defogging in Cold distributes hot air.
Weather
Directing Air to the Overhead Air
• Adjust the air distribution control to the Vents and the Footwell Air Vents
instrument panel and windshield air
vents positions. When you direct air to the
• Press the A/C button. Overhead and footwell air vents,
the system distributes warm air.
desired setting.
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest HEATED WINDOWS AND
setting. MIRRORS
• Direct the instrument panel side air
vents toward the side windows. Heated Rear Window (If Equipped)
• Close the instrument panel vents.
Note: Make sure the engine is running
Maximum Cooling Performance in before operating the heated windows.
Instrument Panel or Instrument Note: The heated rear window button is
Panel and Footwell Positions located on the instrument panel, near the
instrument cluster.
lowest setting. Press the button to clear the
• Press the A/C and recirculated air E72507
heated rear window of thin ice
buttons. and fog. The heated rear
window will automatically turn off after a
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest short period of time.
setting initially and then adjust it to suit
the desired comfort level. Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE The vehicle warranty does not cover
CONTROLS damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Adjusting the Blower Motor Speed
Heated Exterior Mirrors
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the heated exterior
Directing Air to the Overhead Air mirrors will automatically turn
Vents on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
When you direct air to the with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
overhead air vents, the system when it is frozen in place.
distributes cold air.
111
Climate Control
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: On vehicles without a heated exterior
mirror button, the mirrors turn on
automatically when you switch the heated
rear window on.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)

When you remote start your vehicle using
a Ford Original Accessory remote start
system, the engine shuts down if you do
any of the following:
• Unlock your vehicle and open any door.
• Insert the key in the ignition.
• Press the brake pedal.
For more information, refer to the separate
Vehicle Security and Remote Start
Systems Owner’s Manual provided with
your vehicle or contact an authorized
dealer.
112
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest more
WARNING: Do not recline the than 30°.
seatback too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt, • Adjust the head restraint so that the
resulting in serious injury in the event of a top of it is level with the top of your
collision. head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
WARNING: Always sit upright
against your seatback with your feet on • Keep sufficient distance between
the floor. yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
WARNING: Do not place objects
the airbag cover.
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
result in personal injury or death in the slightly bent.
event of a sudden stop or crash. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: The adjustable head

E68595 restraint is a safety device. Whenever
When you use them properly, the seat, possible it should be installed and correctly
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will adjusted when the seat is occupied. An
provide optimum protection in the event incorrectly adjusted head restraint may
of a crash. provide reduced protection to an occupant
during certain rear impacts.
113
Seats
The head restraint consists of: Removing the Head Restraint
WARNING: Do not remove the head

restraint from an occupied seat.
1. Lift the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons B and C.
3. Remove the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint

E215998
A Energy absorbing head restraint. WARNING: Install head restraints

B Guide sleeve adjust and unlock correctly to help minimize the risk of neck
button. injury in the event of a crash.
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button. 1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
D Steel stems.
2. Press and hold buttons B and C.
Adjusting the Head Restraint 3. Push the head restraint down.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Adjust the head
restraints for all passengers before you Moving the Seat Backward or
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize Forward
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving. WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright before returning it to the original position.
driving position before adjusting the head Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that it has fully latched after returning the seat
the top of it is level with the top of your head backrest to its original position. An
and as far forward as possible. unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Raising the Head Restraint
Lift the head restraint up. WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat when your vehicle is moving. This may
Lowering the Head Restraint result in sudden seat movement, causing
the loss of control of your vehicle.
1. Press and hold button B.
2. Push the head restraint down.
114
Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)
WARNING: Make sure the driver seat
fully locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward.
E146386
1. Rotate the handle clockwise or counter

E177638 clockwise to attain the desired lumbar
support.
1. Lift the handle.
2. Move the seat backward or forward to Recline Adjustment
attain the desired position.
3. Release the handle.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
Note: The driver seat has removable stop seat backrest when your vehicle is moving.
bolts on the track to enable access to the This may result in sudden seat movement,
vehicle battery. See Changing the 12V causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
Battery (page 244).
WARNING: Do not adjust the recliner
from inside your vehicle if the seat is
unoccupied. The seat back may move
suddenly and cause personal injury.
115
Seats
Adjusting the Armrest
E95256
2
1. Raise the armrest fully.
2. Lower the armrest to the stowed
position.
E175474
3. Raise the armrest to attain the desired
1. Lift the handle. position.
2. Move the seat back backward or
forward to attain the desired position. POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
3. Release the handle.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver

seat when your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
WARNING: The driver seat has

removable stop bolts on the track to
enable access to the vehicle battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 244).
116
Seats
E138647
117
Seats
Power Lumbar Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
WARNING: When reclining the seat

backrest forward and backward, take care
not to get your hands caught between the
seat backrest and the frame, catches or
mechanism. Failure to take care may result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that any cargo

or objects are not trapped behind the seat
backrest. Make sure the seatbelts are not
trapped in any way when unfolding the
seat backrest up. Failure of an occupant
to be able to use a trapped seatbelt
increases the risk of serious personal injury
E138648 or death.
WARNING: Make sure that the seat

REAR SEATS (If Equipped) backrest is fully engaged in its catch. A seat
backrest which is not fully engaged in its
catch could move in the event of an
accident. This may result in serious
WARNING: Do not use the bench personal injury or death.
seats as a bed when your vehicle is moving.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place any objects

on a folded seat. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
Note: Rear seat arrangements vary

depending on the vehicle.
E172224
With the seat occupied, pull the lever or

strap to recline or raise the seat backrest.
118
Seats
Removing Seats (Passenger

Vehicles)
WARNING: Seats can weigh up to

176 lb (80 kg). Do not attempt to lift or
carry a seat on your own.
WARNING: Do not use the release

handles to lift or carry the seat.
1
E173870
1. Pull the release handle up at an angle

from the floor.
119
Seats
2. While holding the handle in this

position, tilt the top of the seat forward
to release the seat frame rear catches
from the floor.
3. When the rear seat latches are clear of
the floor, release the handle.
4. Pull the seat backward to release the
seat frame front catches.
5. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Note: Two persons are required to release
the seat handles and remove the seat.
Note: You can only remove seats that have
integral release handles.
Note: The seatback does not fold forward.
Installing the Seats
WARNING: Make sure that the floor

catches are free from foreign material
before installing the seats.
WARNING: Make sure that you E178062

securely fasten the seat catches when
installing. Check the latches are correctly 1. Align the seat frame front catches.
engaged by checking the red latch 2. Push the seat forward to engage the
indicators. seat frame front catches.
3. Align the seat frame rear catches.
4. Allow the seat to drop under its own
weight for the last 6-8 in (15-20 cm).
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable

to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
120
Seats
anything on the seat that may block the

heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not place heavy objects on the

seat.
Note: If you spill water or any other liquid
onto the seat, allow the seat to dry
thoroughly before you switch the heated
seat on.
E234067
The heated seat switch is on the seat base.

Press the button to switch the heated seat
on or off. The system reaches maximum
temperature after five or six minutes. It is
regulated automatically.
The heated seat remains on until you
switch it off. If the heated seat is on when
you switch the ignition off, it will be on
when you switch the ignition back on.
Note: Do not switch the heated seat on
unless your vehicle is running. This prevents
the vehicle battery from running out of
charge.
121
Auxiliary Power Points
To prevent the battery from running out of

12 Volt DC Power Point charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
WARNING: Do not plug optional running.
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter • Do not leave devices plugged in
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter overnight or when you park your vehicle
can cause damage not covered by the for extended periods.
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury. Locations
WARNING: Do not use a power
point for operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty, and
can result in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you

can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition E185878
on.
Power points may be in the following
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
locations:
accessory plug.
• On the instrument panel.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or • Inside the cargo area.
a fuse may blow.
AC Power Point (If Equipped)
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an WARNING: Do not keep electrical
accessory plug into the power point. This devices plugged in the power point
will damage the power point and blow the whenever the device is not in use. Do not
fuse. use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point, since it will defeat the safety
power point. protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when

the ignition is switched off or the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
122
Use the power point for powering electric • Measuring devices, which process
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is precise data, such as medical
under the parking brake lever. equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
CIGAR LIGHTER
WARNING: Do not plug optional

electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
E143941
can cause damage not covered by the
When the indicator light on the power point vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
is: serious injury.
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
E103382
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and Press the element in to use the cigar
make sure the indicator light remains on. lighter. It pops out after a short period of
Do not use the power point for certain time.
electric devices, including: Do not hold the cigar lighter element
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. pressed in.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, Note: If the power supply does not work
electric saws and other electric power after you switch the ignition off, switch the
tools or compressor-driven ignition on.
refrigerators.
Note: If you use the socket when the engine
is not running, the battery may run out of
charge.
123
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you

can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
124
Storage Compartments
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING: Do not place hot drinks

in the cup holders when your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Make sure that cups

placed in the holders do not obstruct your
vision while driving.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)

Overhead Storage Compartments E171160
Overhead Console
FRONT DOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not place heavy
objects in the overhead console. Heavy
objects may become projectiles in a crash
or sudden stop and may increase the risk
of serious injury.
E169150
Turn the retaining clips counterclockwise

to open the storage compartment.
E189357
BOTTLE HOLDER
WARNING: Do not place glass

objects in the bottle holder.
125
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION When you start the engine, avoid pressing

the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine.
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other IGNITION SWITCH
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive

your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine

E180794
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always A (off) - The ignition is off.
open the garage door before you start the
engine. Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal battery to lose charge.
fumes into the passenger compartment. Note: To switch the engine off when your
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle is moving, move the transmission
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected selector lever to position N. Use the brakes
immediately. Do not drive if you smell to bring the vehicle to a safe stop. After your
exhaust fumes. vehicle has stopped, switch the engine off
and move the transmission selector lever to
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle position P. Turn the key to position A or B.
may exhibit some unusual driving
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
accessories such as the radio to operate
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
while the engine is not running.
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
can disregard any unusual driving position for too long. This could cause your
characteristics during this period. vehicle battery to lose charge.
The powertrain control system meets all C (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Canadian interference-causing equipment Warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
standard requirements regulating the D (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
impulse electrical field or radio noise. key as soon as the engine starts.
126
STARTING A GASOLINE The idle speed will vary depending on

certain factors. These include vehicle
ENGINE component and ambient temperatures as
well as electrical and climate system
Before starting the engine check the demands.
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened Cold or Hot Engine
their seatbelts.
If the engine does not start within 10
• Make sure the headlamps and seconds, wait for a short period and try
electrical accessories are off. again.
• Make sure the parking brake is on. If the engine does not start after three
• Make sure the transmission is in park attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the
(P). flooded engine procedure.
When you start the engine, the idle speed If you have difficulty starting the engine
increases, this helps to warm up the when the temperature is below -13°F
engine. If the engine idle speed does not (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to the
slow down automatically, have your mid-way point of its travel and try again.
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Flooded Engine
1. Shift into park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
2. Turn the key to the on position to hold it there.
switch the ignition on.
3. Start the engine.
3. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle. Release the key Note: If the engine does not start, repeat
when the engine starts. the cold or hot engine procedure.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time, for example 10 STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
seconds. The number of start attempts is
limited to approximately six. If you exceed
this limit, the system will not allow you to
try again until a period of time has elapsed, WARNING: Do not use starting fluid,
for example 30 minutes. for example ether, in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate
Engine Idle Speed after Starting explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting will adjust WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
automatically to minimize vehicle gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
emissions and maximize cabin comfort cause an explosion.
and fuel economy.
127
Note: Avoid shutting the engine down after Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
an extensive idling period. Drive your vehicle the engine to its normal operating
for several miles with the engine at normal temperature. Long periods of idling,
operating temperatures under a moderate especially in cold weather, can cause a
load. buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.
Engine Glow Plugs
Starting a Cold or Hot Engine
The powertrain control and glow
plug control modules operate 1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
the glow plug system. 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
The glow plug control module using the Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
engine coolant temperature, barometric 3. Turn the key to the on position and wait
pressure sensor and the environmental until the glow plug indicator lamp turns
temperature sensor will determine how off.
long the glow plugs stay energized. The
required time for the glow plugs to remain 4. Turn the key to the start position to
energized will decrease as the engine start your vehicle.
coolant temperature, barometric pressure 5. Release the key.
and the environmental temperature Note: You may need to crank the engine for
increases. up to 10 seconds when the outside air
When you switch the ignition on, the glow temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below.
plug indicator lamp will illuminate if glow Note: Engine power may be reduced for 15
plug heat is necessary as a starting aid. seconds when the engine oil temperature
Wait until the glow plug indicator lamp is -9°F (-23°C) or below. This is to allow
turns off before starting the engine. The the turbocharger to be lubricated.
lamp should always momentarily
illuminate when the engine is cold and you Note: If the engine fails to start after a
switch the ignition on. number of attempts, the system will not
allow you to operate the starter for a short
Cold Weather Operation period of time, for example 30 minutes.
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the Failure to Start
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if left idling in park (P). As the engine If the engine does not crank with the key
warms-up, the engine sound level turned to the start position while the brake
decreases due to the activation of pedal is fully depressed, do the following:
powertrain control module controlled 1. Switch the ignition off.
sound reduction features.
Note: Make sure the parking brake is fully
It is recommended that the engine block applied.
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See 2. Release the brake pedal.
Engine Block Heater (page 129). 3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
128
4. Turn the key to the on position and wait Note: The heater is most effective when
until the glow plug indicator lamp turns outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
off. (-18°C).
5. Turn the key to the start position to The heater acts as a starting aid by
start your vehicle. warming the engine coolant. This allows
6. Release the key. the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
Vehicles With a Turbocharger electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
WARNING: Do not switch the engine
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
off when it is running at high speed. If you
that is product certified by
do, the turbocharger will continue running
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
Canadian Standards Association
to zero. This will lead to premature
(CSA). This extension cord must be
turbocharger bearing wear.
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until Suitable for Use with Outdoor
the engine has reached idle speed and then Appliances. Do not use an indoor
switch it off. extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If fire hazard.
Equipped)
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
WARNING: Failure to follow engine extension cord plug and heater cord
block heater instructions could result in plug connections are free and clear of
property damage or serious personal injury. water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
with ungrounded electrical systems or
clean area, clear of combustibles.
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock. • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
WARNING: Do not fully close the • Check for heat anywhere in the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own electrical hookup once the system has
weight when using the engine block heater. been operating for approximately 30
This could damage the power cable and minutes.
may cause an electrical short resulting in
fire, injury and property damage.
129
• Make sure the system is unplugged and

properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
130
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may permanent injury.
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
fire. splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
WARNING: The fuel system may be with water for 15 minutes and seek
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound medical attention. Failure to seek
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until proper medical attention could lead to
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray permanent injury.
out, which could cause serious personal
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
injury.
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious remove contaminated clothing and
injury or death if misused or mishandled. thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
WARNING: Fuel may contain contact causes skin irritation.
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
WARNING: When refueling always for the treatment of alcoholism.
shut the engine off and never allow sparks Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
or open flames near the fuel tank filler adverse reaction, serious personal
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone injury or sickness. Immediately call a
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely physician if you experience any adverse
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid reactions.
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:

• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
131
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Fuel Requirements - Choosing The

Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Fuel Requirements - Choosing the Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Is Not Required
Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Use only a diesel engine configured for use
is Required (United with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
Virgin Islands and Other Locales) than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
WARNING: Only use Ultra-Low designed to use only ultra-low sulfur diesel
Sulfur Diesel fuel (ULSD) containing a fuel may result in damage to engine
maximum of 15 ppm sulfur and up to 20% emission control devices and the
biodiesel (B20). These fuels should meet after-treatment system, potentially
the diesel specifications defined by rendering your vehicle inoperable.
American Society for Testing and Materials
For the engine to operate reliably on low
(ASTM) D975 for diesel and by ASTM
sulfur or high sulfur diesel fuel, the engine
D7467 for B6-B20 blends, or an equivalent
must be a factory built high sulfur engine
local market specification.
(available as a dealer order option for
select markets) or an ultra-low sulfur
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with diesel fuel configured engine that has been
oil, kerosene, paraffin, gasoline or other retrofitted for high sulfur diesel fuel using
liquids to diesel. This can cause damage Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
to the fuel system. Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
WARNING: Do not use home heating authorized dealer will result in coolant
oil, agricultural fuel, raw fats, oils, waste system damage, engine overheating,
cooking greases, biodiesel fuels greater selective catalyst reduction system or
than 20% or any diesel fuel not intended diesel particulate filter damage and
for highway use. possible base engine damage.
Vehicles with engines configured for use
WARNING: The vehicle warranty will with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
not cover damage caused by using an available for sale in countries where
improper type of fuel or fuel additive. ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with Vehicles originally sold in a ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel under any circumstances. diesel fuel market that are subsequently
Blending used oil with the fuel will exported to non ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust markets will need to be retrofitted (at the
emissions and reduce engine life due to customer’s expense using Ford authorized
increased internal wear. dealer service parts) in order to be reliably
operated on non ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel.
132
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel restrictions that may result in a lack of

power or damage to fuel system
You may operate your vehicle on diesel components, including fuel pump and fuel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also injector failures. See Special Operating
known as B20. Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted (page 464).
product from renewable fuel sources, such Look for a label on the fuel pump to
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
cooking greases. in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel fuel blends with
To help achieve acceptable engine greater than 5% must be labeled.
performance and durability when using Biodiesel content is often indicated with
biodiesel in your vehicle: the letter B followed by the percent of
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the biodiesel in the fuel. For example, B20
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less indicates a fuel containing 20% biodiesel.
by checking the label on the fuel pump. Ask the service station attendant to
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality confirm the biodiesel content of a diesel
that complies with applicable industry fuel if you do not see a label on the fuel
standards ASTM D975 for diesel and pump.
ASTM D7467 for B6-B20 blends. Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
• Follow the recommended service diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
maintenance intervals. See Normal should not be stored in the fuel tank for
Scheduled Maintenance (page 462). more than one month. If you plan to park
or store your vehicle for more than one
• Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel month, then you should empty your vehicle
tank for more than one month. fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill
• Do not use raw oils, fats or waste the tank with a pure petroleum-based
cooking greases. diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a
minimum of 30 minutes.
System Messages
If you intend to store your vehicle for more
Message Action and Description than two months, we recommend that you
seek advice from an authorized dealer.
Fuel Pres- Consider changing brands
sure Low or reducing biodiesel Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
content if you have cold damage fuel system seals and plastics and
temperature fuel gelling corrode steel parts.
issues or this message Fuel companies adjust diesel fuel
frequently appears. formulations for cold temperatures. Diesel
fuel which has not been correctly
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater formulated for cold ambient temperatures
than 20% may cause damage to your may gel and block the fuel filters. An
vehicle, including engine or exhaust indication that the fuel filters are blocked
after-treatment hardware (exhaust is the engine starts, stalls after a short time
catalyst and particulate filter) failures. and then does not restart. If you have been
Using biodiesel in concentrations greater using biodiesel, you may need to use a fuel
than 20% can also cause fuel filter with lower biodiesel content or discontinue
using biodiesel.
133
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use alcohol based fuel additives to FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE

correct fuel gelling. This may damage the
fuel injectors or fuel system. This may also Choosing the Right Fuel
degrade vehicle performance and could
lead to fuel system damage that may not
be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Only
use an anti-gel and performance
improvement product. We recommend
Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance
Improver.
Diesel Fuel Additives

E161513
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you Your vehicle is designed to operate on
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
to ASTM industry specifications. pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine. Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
Use Motorcraft Cetane Booster or an regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
equivalent cetane booster additive if you rating below 87. The use of these fuels
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use could result in engine damage that will not
Motorcraft Anti-Gel & Performance be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling during cold weather. For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
Do not use alcohol-based additives to rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel performance gained by using premium fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol is most noticeable in hot weather as well
additives may result in damage to the fuel as other conditions, for example when
injectors and system. towing a trailer. See Towing (page 180).
The vehicle Warranty may not cover repairs Do not be concerned if the engine
needed to correct the effects of using any sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
aftermarket product that does not meet engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
Ford specifications. the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
134
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle

was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel. E161513
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
or E85 fuel. pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
• Fuels containing methanol. regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
• Fuels containing metallic-based maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
additives, including manganese-based Some fuel stations, particularly those in
compounds. high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
• Fuels containing the octane booster regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl rating below 87. The use of these fuels
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). could result in engine damage that will not
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is be covered by the vehicle warranty.
prohibited by law. For best overall vehicle and engine
The use of fuels with metallic compounds performance, premium fuel with an octane
such as methylcyclopentadienyl rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known performance gained by using premium fuel
as MMT), which is a manganese-based is most noticeable in hot weather as well
fuel additive, will impair engine as other conditions, for example when
performance and affect the emission towing a trailer. See Towing (page 180).
control system. Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
FUEL QUALITY - E85 the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel damage.
Vehicles
We recommend Top Tier detergent
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following gasolines, where available to help minimize
identifiers: engine deposits and maintain optimal
• Yellow fuel filler cap. vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. www.toptiergas.com.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler was not designed can impair the emission
door. control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
135
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use: RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel. If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Fuels containing methanol. • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based • You may need to switch the ignition
compounds. from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
• Fuels containing the octane booster pump the fuel from the tank to the
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl engine. When restarting, cranking time
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). takes a few seconds longer than
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is normal.
prohibited by law.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
The use of fuels with metallic compounds more fuel may be required.
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known Filling a Portable Fuel Container
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
control system. fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
Switching Between E85 and filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly Use the following guidelines to avoid
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If electrostatic charge build-up, which can
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or produce a spark, when filling an
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as ungrounded fuel container:
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your • Only use an approved fuel container to
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change container on the ground when filling it.
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
area).
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL • Do not use a device that holds the fuel
LOCATION pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
The fuel filler funnel is in the glove

compartment or in the front right-hand
side stepwell storage compartment.
136
Fuel and Refueling
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle

of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or

push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others. E157452
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
in the household refuse or the public container.
sewage system. Use an authorized waste 4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
disposal facility.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler of it.
Funnel Location (page 136). Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as an authorized dealer if you choose to
they may not work with the capless fuel dispose of the funnel.
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from REFUELING
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
fuel filler inlet. tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or

push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel

pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
137
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: When refueling always

shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler A
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Wait at least 10 seconds

before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the

fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and E139202
could lead to fuel overflowing.
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
Note: The fuel filler nozzle inhibitor only
opens when you insert the correct fuel pump
nozzle.
E162791
B
1. Open the left-hand front door. E139203
2. Fully open the fuel filler door. 4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler B when refueling. Holding the fuel
cap. pump nozzle in position A could affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
138
Fuel and Refueling
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe

to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Open the left-hand front door.
5. Fully open the fuel filler door.
6. Check the fuel filler inlet and the area
around it for any items or debris that
may be obstructing its movement.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler inlet. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
136). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
filler inlet from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
E162792
filler funnel from the fuel filler inlet.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown. Note: If this action corrects the problem
the message may not immediately reset. If
the message remains and the service engine
soon warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
E119081
The advertised capacity is the maximum
6. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
then slowly remove it. tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications
7. Fully close the fuel filler door. (page 313).
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
reserve. The empty reserve is an
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
your vehicle immediately checked.
indicates empty.
System Warnings (If Equipped) Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
If the fuel filler nozzle inhibitor does not to increase driving range.
fully close a warning message appears in
the information display.
139
Fuel and Refueling
Filling the Fuel Tank Conditions

For consistent results when refueling: • Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an fuel economy.
inaccurate reading results if the engine • Carrying unnecessary weight in your
is left running. vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Use the same fill rate • Adding certain accessories to your
(low-medium-high) each time the tank vehicle such as bug defectors, rollbars
is filled. or light bars, running boards and ski
• Allow no more than one automatic racks may reduce fuel economy.
shut-off when refueling. • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Calculating Fuel Economy • Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more • You will get better fuel economy when
accurate measurement is obtained after driving on flat terrain than when driving
2,000 mi (3,000 km). on hilly terrain.
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading. See
Refueling (page 137).
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
140
Engine Emission Control
EMISSION LAW Tampering With a Noise Control

System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
WARNING: Do not remove or alter • Removal or rendering inoperative by
the original equipment floor covering or any person other than for purposes of
insulation between it and the metal floor maintenance.
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
• Repair or replacement of any device or
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
element of the design incorporated into
from the engine and exhaust system heat
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
and noise. On vehicles with no original
control prior to its sale or delivery to
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
carry passengers in a manner that permits
use.
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions • The use of the vehicle after any person
may result in fire or personal injury. removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative may presume to constitute tampering as
emission control system components. follows:
Similar federal or provincial laws may
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
vehicle modification without first
underbody noise shields or acoustically
determining applicable laws.
absorptive material.
Tampering with emissions • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
control systems including engine speed governor, to allow engine
related sensors or the Diesel speed to exceed manufacturer
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced specifications.
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light. If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
141
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.

• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for WARNING: The normal operating
climactic conditions. temperature of the exhaust system is very
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel high. Never work around or attempt to
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. repair any part of the exhaust system until
Regular maintenance or replacement is not it has cooled. Use special care when
needed. working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
Note: If these checks do not help you high temperature after only a short period
correct the concern, have your vehicle of engine operation and stays hot after the
checked as soon as possible. engine is switched off.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and Your vehicle has various emission control
Maintenance components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation exhaust emission standards.
became effective governing the noise To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating • Do not crank the engine for more than
(GVWR). The preceding statements 10 seconds at a time.
concerning prohibited tampering acts and • Do not run the engine with a spark plug
maintenance, and the noise warranty lead disconnected.
found in the Warranty Guide, are • Do not push-start or tow-start your
applicable to complete chassis cabs over vehicle. Use booster cables. See
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. Catalytic Converter (page 142).
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
CATALYTIC CONVERTER - vehicle is moving.
3.5L/3.7L • Do not use leaded fuel.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry On-Board Diagnostics System
ground cover. The emission system heats Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
up the engine compartment and exhaust system that monitors the emission control
system, creating the risk of fire. system. If any of the following warning
lamps illuminate, this may indicate that
the on-board diagnostics system has
detected an emission control system
malfunction.
warning lamp.
Battery charging condition

warning lamp.
142
Malfunction indicator lamp. Warning Lamps and Messages

Service engine soon warning If the system detects a fault, a
lamp. warning lamp illuminates in the
instrument cluster
Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
reduced power or the engine to stop. The warning lamp illuminates under the
Failure to respond to a warning lamp may following possible conditions:
cause component damage not covered by
the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle • Low fluid level.
checked as soon as possible. • Selective catalytic reductant system
malfunction or contamination.
See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 95). Note: If the warning lamp illuminates, the
information display messages give you an
indication whether the concern is fluid
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC related or if there is a selective catalytic
REDUCTANT SYSTEM - 3.2L reductant system malfunction. See
DIESEL Information Messages (page 103). If the
warning lamp illuminates when your vehicle
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic is moving, and the fluid is at a sufficient
reductant system to help reduce exhaust level, this indicates a system malfunction.
emission levels by injecting diesel exhaust Have your vehicle checked as soon as
fluid (AdBlue®) into the exhaust system. possible.
The engine may not start if you tamper Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue)
with or disable the selective catalytic Level
reductant system.
For the system to correctly operate, you
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue) must maintain the fluid level. The
Guidelines minimum fluid refill quantity required to
• Do not put in the vehicle fuel tank. This restart the engine is 1.5 gal (5.7 L). See
can cause engine damage not covered Information Messages (page 103).
by the vehicle Warranty. Note: If your vehicle is on a gradient, the
• Do not overfill the tank. minimum fluid refill quantity required to
restart the engine may be greater than
• Do not dilute with water or any other 1.5 gal (5.7 L).
liquid.
• Do not re-use an empty fluid container.
• Do not store in direct sunlight.
• Store at temperatures between 23°F
(-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
• Do not store fluid containers in your
vehicle.
• The fluid is non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless and water-soluble.
143
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid

(AdBlue) Tank
WARNING: Refill the diesel exhaust

fluid (AdBlue) tank in a well-ventilated
area. When removing the tank cap or a
container cap, ammonia vapor may
escape. Ammonia vapor is an irritant to the
eyes, skin and mucous membranes.
Inhaling ammonia vapor can cause burning
to the eyes, throat and nose resulting in
watering eyes or severe coughing.
WARNING: Do not allow diesel

exhaust fluid (AdBlue) to come into
contact with eyes, skin or clothing. Should
the fluid come into contact with eyes, flush
E204215
them with plenty of water and seek
medical attention. Clean affected skin with The diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue) tank filler
soap and water. If swallowed, drink plenty neck is next to the fuel filler neck and has
of water and seek medical attention a blue cap. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
immediately. at a diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue) filling
station or a diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue)
container. The capacity of the diesel
exhaust fluid (AdBlue) tank is 5.8 gal
(22 L).
Note: Wash off any fluid that may have
spilled on to a painted surface with soapy
water.
Filling at a Fuel Station
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue)
tank using a fuel station pump is similar to
refueling your vehicle. The pump nozzle
shuts off when the tank is full.
E144358
144
4. Return the container to the vertical

position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back
into the container.
5. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap.
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is any fluid left in the
container, retain it for later use.
Note: The spout is re-useable. Wash the
spout with clean water prior to storage. Do
not use the spout with any other fluid.
E228352 Filling in Cold Climates
Operate the diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue) Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze when the
pump nozzle within the area shown. temperature is below 12°F (-11°C). Your
Note: Difficulty in filling using a diesel vehicle has a preheating system which
exhaust fluid (AdBlue) pump may be due allows the fluid to operate below 12°F
to the filling equipment being contaminated. (-11°C). If you overfill the diesel exhaust
To overcome this issue, use an alternative fluid (AdBlue) tank and the fluid freezes,
filling station or a refill container. it may cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Filling Using a Container
Always follow the manufacturer's DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
instructions. - 3.2L DIESEL
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
feel a strong resistance.
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank combustible materials. The regeneration
filler cap. process creates very high exhaust gas
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until temperatures and the exhaust will radiate
the seal on the spout seats on to the a considerable amount of heat during and
filler neck. Pour the fluid into the tank. after regeneration and after you have
The fluid stops flowing when the tank switched the engine off. This is a potential
is full. fire hazard.
145

warning lamp.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to Ignition warning lamp.
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation Malfunction indicator lamp.
catalytic converter or the diesel particulate
filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic
converter and the diesel particulate filter Powertrain warning Lamp.
heat up to very high temperatures after
only a short period of engine operation and
remain hot after you switch the engine off. Water in fuel warning lamp.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a diesel particulate filter
that enables it to comply with applicable If you continue to drive your vehicle when
exhaust emission standards. It filters the warning lamp is illuminated, the engine
harmful diesel particulates, for example could stop without warning. This could
soot from the exhaust gas. result in damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. Have your vehicle checked as
To avoid damaging the diesel particulate soon as possible.
filter:
See Warning Lamps and Indicators
• Do not crank the engine for more than (page 95).
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your Diesel Particulate Filter Automatic
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Regeneration
Starting the Vehicle (page 196).
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving. WARNING: Do not park or idle your
• Do not ignore warning lamps or vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
information messages regarding combustible materials. The regeneration
exhaust system cleaning and process creates very high exhaust gas
regeneration. temperatures and the exhaust will radiate
a considerable amount of heat during and
Note: This could result in damage not after regeneration and after you have
covered by the vehicle Warranty. switched the engine off. This is a potential
fire hazard.
On-Board Diagnostics System
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics WARNING: The normal operating
system that monitors the emission control temperature of the exhaust system is very
system. If any of the following warning high. Never work around or attempt to
lamps illuminate, this indicates that the repair any part of the exhaust system until
on-board diagnostics system has detected it has cooled. Use special care when
an emission control system malfunction. working around the diesel oxidation
146
catalytic converter or the diesel particulate Where vehicle use meets any of the
filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic following conditions:
converter and the diesel particulate filter • Driving short distances.
heat up to very high temperatures after • Prolonged engine idling.
only a short period of engine operation and
• Frequently switching the engine on and
remain hot after you switch the engine off.
off.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle • High levels of acceleration and
requires periodic regeneration to maintain deceleration.
correct operation. The emission control We recommend you assist the
system automatically carries out this regeneration process by:
process. As soot gathers in the system it
begins to restrict the filter. The soot that • Avoiding prolonged engine idling.
gathers inside the filter is cleaned in two • Drive your vehicle in a manner to allow
different ways, passive regeneration and effective cleaning. Drive at a steady
active regeneration. Both methods occur vehicle speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or
automatically and require no actions from above for approximately 20 minutes.
the driver. During automatic regeneration, If the warning lamp illuminates
the system cleans the diesel particulate the diesel particulate filter could
filter by oxidizing the soot. Cleaning have become overloaded. Have
happens during normal engine operating your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
conditions at varying levels depending on
driving conditions. Automatic regeneration raises the exhaust
Diesel particulate filter warning temperature to eliminate the soot
lamp. particles. During cleaning soot particles are
E95449 converted to harmless gasses. Once
cleaned the diesel particulate filter
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at continues to trap harmful diesel particles.
saturation, a warning lamp or information
message appears in the information If you are driving your vehicle in a manner
display. Drive your vehicle in a manner to that allows effective cleaning, a message
allow effective diesel particulate filter may appear in the information display to
cleaning. indicate automatic regeneration is in
progress.
The warning lamp continues to illuminate
until the automatic regeneration process If you are not driving your vehicle in a
completes. Continue to drive your vehicle manner that allows effective cleaning, a
in a manner to allow effective diesel message may appear in the information
particulate filter cleaning until the warning display to instruct you to drive in a manner
lamp turns off. that allows automatic regeneration.
Failure to carry out regeneration when
required could result in a clogged diesel
particulate filter. If the diesel particulate
filter fills beyond the regeneration
threshold, the system disables the ability
to carry out regeneration. This could result
in damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
147
The automatic regeneration process is catalytic converter or the diesel particulate

most effective when you drive at a steady filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic
vehicle speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or converter and the diesel particulate filter
above for approximately 20 minutes. The heat up to very high temperatures after
frequency and duration of the regeneration only a short period of engine operation and
process varies by how you drive your remain hot after you switch the engine off.
vehicle, the outside air temperature and
altitude. Frequency varies between 100 mi
Diesel particulate filter warning
(160 km) and 310 mi (500 km) and each
lamp.
regeneration process lasts between 10 and E95449
20 minutes. If the diesel particulate filter is
near or at saturation, the warning lamp
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
appears advising you to initiate diesel
sound may be heard during the regeneration
particulate filter manual regeneration.
process.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or Before you start manual regeneration, do
engine idle, you could smell a hot metallic the following:
odor and could notice a clicking metallic • Park your vehicle outside of any
sound. This is due to the high temperatures enclosed structure.
reached during the regeneration process.
This is normal. • Make sure the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual • Make sure the parking brake is on.
Regeneration (If Equipped) • Park your vehicle a minimum of 10 ft
(3 m) from any obstructions and
materials that can easily combust or
WARNING: Do not park or idle your melt, for example, paper, leaves, fuels,
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other plastics and other dry organic material.
combustible materials. The regeneration • Make sure there is a minimum of 3.2 gal
process creates very high exhaust gas (12 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
temperatures and the exhaust will radiate
• Check the engine oil level.
a considerable amount of heat during and
after regeneration and after you have • Check the engine coolant level.
switched the engine off. This is a potential
fire hazard. Manual Regeneration
Where vehicle use has significant engine
WARNING: The normal operating idle operation, frequent vehicle speed less
temperature of the exhaust system is very than 25 mph (40 km/h), or driving short
high. Never work around or attempt to distances where the engine does not fully
repair any part of the exhaust system until warm up, manual regeneration allows you
it has cooled. Use special care when to start diesel particulate filter cleaning
working around the diesel oxidation when the engine is idling.
148
Use the manual regeneration feature Starting Manual Regeneration

when:
You can only start manual regeneration
• You are not able to drive in a manner with the engine running at normal
that allows effective automatic operating temperature using the
cleaning. See Diesel Particulate information display. See Information
Filter Automatic Regeneration. Messages (page 103).
• You choose to manually start the Note: During the use of manual
regeneration process when the engine regeneration, you may observe a light
is idling. amount of white smoke. This is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust Note: If you press any pedal during manual
sound may be heard during the regeneration regeneration the engine may turn off. To
process. protect the exhaust system you may not be
Note: During regeneration at low speed or able to restart the engine for 10 minutes.
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic If a warning illuminates you may
odor and could notice a clicking metallic not be able to start manual
sound. This is due to the high temperatures regeneration.
reached during the regeneration process.
This is normal.
To start manual regeneration, from the main menu scroll to:

Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

Exhaust Filter Full Clean Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Soon
Exhaust Filter at Limit Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Clean Now Follow the prompts regarding exhaust position as required
to start manual regeneration. Make sure you understand each
prompt. The information display confirms that regeneration
has started and when it is completed.
Exhaust Filter Over- Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
loaded Clean Now Follow the prompts regarding exhaust position as required
to start manual regeneration. Make sure you understand each
prompt. The information display confirms that regeneration
has started and when it is completed.
Note: You cannot use the manual regeneration until the diesel particulate filter load
percentage has reached 100 percent. The diesel particulate filter load percentage fluctuates
when driving due to automatic regeneration.
149
When you start manual regeneration the Note: To protect the exhaust system you
engine speed rises to approximately may not be able to restart the engine for 10
2000–2500 rpm and the cooling fan minutes.
speed increases. A change in engine noise
Depending on the amount of time allowed
due to the cooling fan and engine speed
for manual regeneration to operate, soot
increase may be heard during the
may not have had sufficient time to be
regeneration process.
eliminated. The exhaust system may still
Depending on the amount of soot be very hot for several minutes after
collected by the diesel particulate filter, regeneration.
the regeneration process varies depending
If you switch the engine off during manual
on the outside air temperature and
regeneration, turbo charger flutter occurs.
altitude. Manual regeneration may last up
This is a consequence of switching a diesel
to 40 minutes.
engine off during turbo charger boost
When manual regeneration is complete operation, which is normal.
the cooling fan and engine speed return to
normal idling. The exhaust system remains Manual Regeneration with Automatic
very hot for several minutes after Regeneration Control
regeneration is complete. Do not reposition
Where vehicle use has significant engine
the vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or
idle operation, frequent vehicle speed less
other combustible materials until the
than 25 mph (40 km/h), or driving short
exhaust system has had sufficient time to distances where the engine does not fully
cool. warm up, automatic regeneration could
Interrupt or Cancel Manual Regeneration not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter. You can switch automatic
You can interrupt or cancel manual regeneration off until you can drive your
regeneration by switching the engine off. vehicle in a manner to allow effective
It may be possible to interrupt or cancel cleaning, for example at a steady vehicle
manual regeneration by pressing any speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or above for
pedal. approximately 20 minutes. You can then
switch automatic regeneration back on to
clean the diesel particulate filter.
To switch the automatic regeneration control on and off, from the main menu
scroll to:
Information Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

Driver Assist Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Auto Exhaust Cleaning Check the box to switch automatic regeneration off.
Off Uncheck the box to switch automatic regeneration on.
150
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the

parking brake. Make sure you shift into park
(P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance, E175317
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious Park (P)
injury.
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission Reverse (R)
Putting your vehicle in gear: With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
1. Fully press down the brake pedal. a complete stop before shifting into and
2. Move the gearshift lever into the out of reverse (R).
desired gear.
Neutral (N)
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
latch it in park (P). vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), you
can change gears up or down as desired
by using buttons on the shift lever. See
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
later in this section.
151
Transmission
To return to normal drive (D) position, • Press the (+) button to upshift.
move the shift lever back from manual (M) • Press the (-) button to downshift.
to drive (D).
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
E175317
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the The system determines when temporary
SelectShift determines that damage will manual control is no longer in use and
not be caused to the engine from returns to automatic control. The
over-revving. instrument cluster displays your currently
Note: Engine damage may occur if you selected gear.
maintain excessive engine revving without Note: The system stays in manual control
shifting. until you make another shift selection (for
SelectShift does not automatically upshift, example, drive [D]).
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by Recommended Shift Speeds
pressing the + button. We recommend you shift gears according
to the following guide to help achieve the
best fuel economy for your vehicle.
Gear Shift speeds
1–2 15 mph (24 km/h)

2–3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3–4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4–5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5–6 50 mph (80 km/h)
152
Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle

until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
WARNING: When doing this

procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if E182198
appropriate.
2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
WARNING: If the parking brake is screwdriver, to carefully remove the
fully released, but the brake warning lamp housing cover.
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon

as possible if this procedure is used.
This prevents you from shifting the
gearshift lever from the park (P) position,
unless the brake pedal is pressed.
In the event of an electrical malfunction,
or if the vehicle battery has run out of
charge, use the following procedure to shift
the gearshift lever from the park (P) 3
position.
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
E182199
3. Locate the white lever, situated on the

left hand side of the gearshift lever.
153
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
TOW/HAUL
E174827
4. Move the white lever toward the rear

of your vehicle. WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
5. Shift into neutral (N). when the road surface is slippery. Failure
6. Replace the gearshift lever housing to follow this instruction could result in the
cover. loss of control of your vehicle.
7. Apply the brake pedal and switch the
WARNING: Do not use diesel engine
ignition on.
exhaust braking when the road surface is
8. Release the parking brake. slippery. Failure to follow this instruction
Note: Alternatively, we recommend that could result in the loss of control of your
you seek advice from your dealer. vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive To activate tow/haul, press the

Learning button near the gearshift lever
E161509 once. The TOW HAUL indicator
This feature may increase durability and light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
154
Transmission
The tow/haul feature:

• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button near the gearshift lever twice. The
TOW HAUL light will deactivate. Tow/haul
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
155
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
control during emergency stops by keeping
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
the brakes from locking.
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the This lamp momentarily
system checked by an authorized dealer. If illuminates when you turn the
your vehicle has continuous vibration or ignition on. If the light does not
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, illuminate during start up, remains on or
have it checked by an authorized dealer. flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
dealer.
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the If the system is disabled, normal
brakes wear and does not contribute to braking is still effective. If the
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels E138644
brake warning lamp illuminates
(page 266). when you release the parking brake, have
See Warning Lamps and the system checked by an authorized
Indicators (page 95). dealer.
E138644
Wet brakes result in reduced braking

efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
few times when driving from a car wash or ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
standing water to dry the brakes.
The anti-lock braking system does not
Brake Over Accelerator eliminate the risks when:
In the event the accelerator pedal • You drive too closely to the vehicle in
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady front of you.
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to • Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. • You take corners too fast.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe • The road surface is poor.
stop. Move the gearshift lever to park (P), Note: If the system activates, the brake
switch the engine off and apply the parking pedal may pulse and may travel further.
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
any interference. If none are found and the may also hear a noise from the system. This
condition persists, have your vehicle towed is normal.
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
156
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE - VEHICLES Note: If you park your vehicle facing

downhill turn the steering wheel toward the
WITH: MECHANICAL PARKING curb.
BRAKE Note: Do not press the release button while
pulling the parking brake lever up.
Center Parking Brake
PARKING BRAKE - VEHICLES
WITH: PUSH DOWN PARKING
BRAKE
E172225
To apply the parking brake:

1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
E172225
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake: To apply the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly. 1. Firmly press the brake pedal.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever upward to
its fullest extent.
3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever down. Note: Do not press the release button when
pulling the parking brake lever upward.
Note: If you park your vehicle facing uphill
turn the steering wheel away from the curb.
157
Brakes
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and The system makes it easier to pull away
facing uphill, shift into park (P) and turn the when your vehicle is on a slope without the
steering wheel away from the curb. need to use the parking brake.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and When the system is active, your vehicle will
facing downhill, shift into park (P) and turn remain stationary on the slope for two to
the steering wheel toward the curb. three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
Note: If required, you can lower the parking
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
brake lever to the fully down position, for
The system releases the brakes
example to swivel the seat. Push the parking
automatically once the engine has
brake lever downward without pressing the
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
release button. The parking brake remains
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
applied until you release it.
is an advantage when pulling away on a
Note: A warning lamp illuminates when you slope, for example from a car park ramp,
apply the parking brake. traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
To release the parking brake: a parking space.
1. Firmly press the brake pedal. Note: The system will not operate if the
parking brake is applied.
2. Pull the parking brake lever upward to
its fullest extent. Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever downward. Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
HILL START ASSIST vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
WARNING: The system does not is on a slope, the system will activate
replace the parking brake. When you leave automatically.
your vehicle, always apply the parking 3. When you remove your foot from the
brake. brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
WARNING: You must remain in your approximately two to three seconds.
vehicle when the system turns on. At all This hold time will automatically be
times, you are responsible for controlling extended if you are in the process of
your vehicle, supervising the system and driving off.
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
may result in the loss of control of your
system will release the brakes
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
automatically.
WARNING: The system will turn off Note: When you remove your foot from the
if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the engine excessively. Failure to take care the system is active, you will experience
may result in the loss of control of your significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
vehicle, serious personal injury or death. is normal.
158
Brakes
Switching the System On and Off

Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission

You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
159
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Using the Information Display

Controls
The traction control system helps avoid
You can switch this feature off or on in the
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
information display. See General
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system Information (page 99).
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power Using a Switch (If Equipped)
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, Use the traction control switch on the
the system reduces engine power in order instrument panel to switch the system off
to increase traction. or on.
System Indicator Lights and

USING TRACTION CONTROL Messages
The stability and traction control
light:
WARNING: The stability and traction E138639
control light illuminates steadily if the • Temporarily illuminates on engine

system detects a failure. Make sure you start-up.
did not manually disable the traction • Flashes when a driving condition
control system using the information activates either of the systems.
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light • Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
is still illuminating steadily, have the of the systems.
system serviced by an authorized dealer The stability and traction control
immediately. Operating your vehicle with off light temporarily illuminates
the traction control disabled could lead to E130458 on engine start-up and stays on
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, when you switch the traction control
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. system off.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
160
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If the stability control or traction control

system detects a fault, the following may
occur:
• The stability and traction control light
WARNING: Vehicle modifications illuminates steadily.
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire • The stability control and traction
construction and wheel and tire size may control systems do not enhance your
change the handling characteristics of your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
vehicle and may adversely affect the the wheels.
performance of the electronic stability If the stability control or traction control
control system. In addition, installing any system activates, the following may occur:
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
• The stability and traction control light
and adversely affect the electronic stability
flashes.
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from • Your vehicle slows down.
the front center console, the tunnel, and • Reduced engine power.
the front seats in order to minimize the risk • A vibration in the brake pedal.
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
effectiveness of the electronic stability • If the driving condition is severe and
control system could lead to an increased your foot is not on the brake pedal, the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle pedal may move as the system applies
rollover, personal injury and death. higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
WARNING: Remember that even features built into it to help you maintain
advanced technology cannot defy the laws control of your vehicle.
of physics. It's always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate Electronic Stability Control
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause The system helps to prevent your vehicle
you to lose control of your vehicle skidding or laterally sliding by individually
increasing the risk of personal injury or applying the brakes to one or more wheels
property damage. Activation of the and, if necessary, reducing engine power.
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires Roll Stability Control
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; The system helps to prevent rollovers by
this could reduce the operator's ability to detecting your vehicle's roll motion, and
control the vehicle potentially resulting in individually applying the brakes to one or
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, more wheels.
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.

161
Stability Control
Side-Wind Stabilization USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system applies the brakes on one side
of your vehicle to reduce the effect of a
sudden side-wind gust on your vehicle's
path. When the system turns on, the You cannot switch the stability control and
stability and traction control light flashes, roll stability control systems off, but when
and a message may appear in the you shift into reverse (R), the systems
information display. You may notice a deactivate.
slight deceleration and may still need to You can switch the traction control system
make a steering correction to maintain the off or on. See Using Traction Control
intended vehicle path. The system does (page 160).
not turn on for a continuous side-wind or
during turns.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle's ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 160).
B
A
A B A
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
162
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to

the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
WARNING: To help avoid personal obstacles or false alarms.
injury, please read and understand the
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
limitations of the system as contained in
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
this section. Sensing is only an aid for some
of Operation (page 64).
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's system may detect that add-on device and
parking aid systems, traffic control therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement that you disable the rear sensing system
weather, air brakes, and external motors when you attach an add-on device to your
and fans may also affect the function of vehicle to prevent these warnings.
the sensing system; this may include The sensing system warns the driver of
reduced performance or a false activation. obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
WARNING: To help avoid personal whenever you switch the ignition on.
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system. You can turn the system on or
off by pressing the parking aid
E139213 button. If your vehicle does not
WARNING: This system is not have a parking aid button, the system can
designed to prevent contact with small or be switched off through the information
moving objects. The system is designed to display menu or from the pop-up message
provide a warning to assist the driver in that appears once you shift the
detecting large stationary objects to avoid transmission into reverse (R). See
damaging your vehicle. The system may Information Messages (page 103).
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
WARNING: Certain add-on devices display. See General Information (page
such as large trailer hitches, bike or 99).
surfboard racks and any device that may
block the normal detection zone of the
system, may create false beeps. PARKING AID
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the

bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and WARNING: The parking aid system
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors can only assist you to detect objects when
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be your vehicle is moving at parking speeds.
affected. Do not clean the sensors with To help avoid personal injury you must take
sharp objects. care when using the parking aid system.
163
A tone will sound in the following manner

when objects are near the front or rear
WARNING: Traffic control systems, bumpers:
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct • Objects detected by the rear sensors
operation of the sensing system.This may produce a low-pitched tone.
cause reduced performance or false alerts. • An alert will only sound for three
seconds if an object is further than 12 in
WARNING: The system may not (30 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
detect small or moving objects, particularly The system detects objects when you shift
those close to the ground. into reverse (R) and:
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
The system warns you of objects that are stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
within the detection zone of the bumper (5 km/h) or less.
areas. When you switch the ignition on,
the system automatically turns on. The • Your vehicle is stationary but an object
system becomes active when you shift into is approaching your vehicle at a speed
reverse (R) and the speed of your vehicle of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
is 7 mph (12 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less, and an object
is approaching your vehicle at a speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: The rate of the tone increases as your
vehicle moves closer to an object.
When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume. When the warning ends, the audio
system returns to the previously set
volume.
Note: Volume reduction is not a standard
feature of all audio systems.
Switching the Parking Aid System

E130178
Off
A Rear detection zone: Up to 72 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
Note: Accessories that block the detection
zone of the system may create false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this will E177143
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
164
Press the button to switch the system off.

The system remains off until you switch
the ignition off.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera

system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close

to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
E254267
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death. The rear view camera is below the central
high mounted stop lamp or on the rear
The rear view camera provides an image cargo door.
of the area behind your vehicle. During
Using the Rear View Camera
operation, lines appear in the display that
represents the path of your vehicle and
System
proximity to objects behind it.
Rear View Camera Locations WARNING: The operation of the

camera may vary depending on the
ambient temperature, vehicle and road
WARNING: Use caution when the conditions.
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position WARNING: Objects above the
and the video image may be incorrect. All camera may not be visible. Check the area
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo behind your vehicle when necessary.
door is ajar. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury always use caution when in reverse
Note: Where the rear view camera is below (R) and when using the rear view camera.
the central high mounted stop lamp, it does
not move out of position when the rear The rear view camera system displays
cargo door is ajar. what is behind your vehicle when your
place the transmission in reverse (R).
165
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)

and the rear cargo door is open, no rear view
camera features display. A B C D E
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and you might not see
some objects. In some vehicles, the
guidelines may disappear when you connect
the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
F
E142436
Distance markers are only a guide and are
calculated for unloaded vehicles on an
even road surface. A Active guidelines.
Note: Guidelines are only available when B Centerline.
the transmission is in reverse (R). C Fixed guideline: Green zone.
Note: Guidelines do not display when the D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.
rear cargo door is ajar.
E Fixed guideline: Red zone.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle: F Rear bumper.
• Active guidelines: Show the intended Active guidelines are only available with
path of your vehicle when reversing. fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines,
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path turn the steering wheel to point the
your vehicle is moving in when you guidelines toward an intended path. If you
reverse in a straight line. This can be change the steering wheel position when
helpful when backing into a parking driving in reverse (R), your vehicle might
space or aligning your vehicle with deviate from the original intended path.
another object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
166
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and You can switch this feature on or off using
out depending on the steering wheel the vehicle settings menu in the
position. When the steering wheel position information display. The default setting is
is straight the active guidelines are not off.
visible. Objects in the red zone are closest When shifting the transmission out of
to your vehicle and objects in the green reverse (R) and into any gear other than
zone are further from your vehicle. park (P), the camera image remains in the
Objects are getting closer to your vehicle display until:
as they move from the green zone to the • Your vehicle speed sufficiently
yellow or red zones. Use the side view increases.
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the • You shift your vehicle into park (P).
vehicle.
Vehicles with Parking Aid
Manual Zoom The system uses red, yellow and green
colored distance bars that indicate the
approximate distance of an object from
WARNING: When manual zoom is the rear bumper. The distance bars appear
on, the full area behind your vehicle may on the camera guidelines when the sensing
not show. Be aware of your surroundings system detects an object.
when using the manual zoom feature.
Manual zoom is only available when you

shift the transmission into reverse (R).
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
switch on manual zoom.
Rear View Camera Delay
WARNING: Use caution when

turning camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
167
Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On

Press ON.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the The indicator displays in the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise instrument cluster.
control when your vehicle speed is greater E71340
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Setting the Cruise Speed
USING CRUISE CONTROL 1. Drive to desired speed.

2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
WARNING: Do not use cruise control pedal.
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could Changing the Set Speed
result in loss of vehicle control, serious • Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
injury or death. speed in small increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
WARNING: When you are going until you reach the desired speed. Press
downhill, your vehicle speed could increase SET+ or SET-.
above the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes. • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
Note: Cruise control disengages if the speed.
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
uphill. change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed

Pull CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

PullRES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Press OFF when the system is in stand by
E142437 mode, or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
The cruise controls are on the steering
switch the system off.
wheel.
168
Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER
WARNING: The system will not
Engine Speed Limiter operate if the sensor cannot track the road
Engine speed is limited to protect the lane markings.
engine.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
The system prevents you from driving possible.
faster than a programmed speed.
WARNING: The system may not
DRIVER ALERT correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Principle of Operation
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions for example bird droppings,
WARNING: The system is designed insects and snow or ice.
to aid the driver. It is not intended to Note: The system assists you when driving
replace your attention and judgment. You on fast main roads and freeways.
are still responsible to drive with due care
Note: The system calculates an alertness
and attention.
level at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h).
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle, The system automatically monitors your
supervising the system and intervening, if driving behavior.
required. Failure to take care may result in The system is designed to alert you if it
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious detects that you are becoming drowsy or
personal injury or death. if your driving deteriorates.
WARNING: The system may not Using Driver Alert

function if the sensor is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks Switch the system on using the information
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system display. See Information Displays (page
to warn you. 99).
Note: The system remains on or off
WARNING: Certain driving styles depending on how it was last set.
may result in the system warning you even
if you are not feeling tired. The system calculates your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings and other factors.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
169
Driving Aids
System Warnings Alertness level is critical, indicating that

you should take a rest as soon as it is safe
Note: The system does not warn you if the to do so.
vehicle speed falls below approximately
40 mph (65 km/h). The status bar travels from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases.
The warning system has two stages: As the rest icon is approached, the color
1. A temporary warning is issued to advise turns from green to yellow and then finally
you to take a rest. This message only red when a rest break must be taken.
appears for a short time.
• Green: No rest required.
2. If you do not rest and the system
• Yellow: First (temporary) warning.
continues to detect that your driving
deteriorates, it issues a further warning. • Red: Second warning.
This remains in the information display Your alertness level will be shown in gray
until you cancel it. See Information if:
Messages (page 103).
• The sensor cannot track the road lane
Press OK on the steering wheel control to markings.
remove the warning.
• The vehicle speed falls below
System Display approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
When active the system runs automatically Resetting the System

in the background and only issue warnings
You can reset the system by:
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See • Switching the ignition off and on.
General Information (page 99). • Stopping your vehicle and then opening
The alertness level is shown by six steps and closing the driver door.
as a colored bar.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
Lane Keeping Alert
Principle of Operation
E131358 WARNING: Always drive with due

care and attention when using and
Alertness level is fine, no rest required. operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING: At all times, you are

responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
E131359 personal injury or death.
170
Driving Aids
Note: The system only operates above

vehicle speeds of approximately 40 mph
WARNING: The system may not (65 km/h).
function if the sensor is blocked.
The sensor is behind the interior mirror. It
WARNING: The sensor may continuously monitors conditions to alert
incorrectly track lane markings as other you of unintentional lane drifting at high
structures or objects. This can result in a speeds.
false or missed warning. The system automatically detects and
tracks the lane markings on the road. If the
WARNING: In cold and severe system detects that your vehicle is
weather conditions the system may not unintentionally drifting toward the lane
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit markings, a warning is shown in the
sensor performance. information display. There is also a warning
given in the form of a vibration felt through
the steering wheel.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road Note: The vibration intensity from the
lane markings. steering wheel may decrease depending on
the quality of the road surface.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor, Using Lane Keeping Alert
have your vehicle checked as soon as Switching the System On and Off
possible.
WARNING: The system may not

correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from

obstructions for example bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
E132099
Note: The system may assist you when
driving on fast main roads and freeways. Switch the system on and off using the
Note: The system may not operate on roads button on the direction indicator stalk.
with sharp bends, narrow lanes, areas under Press the button once to turn the system
construction, during hard braking or on. Press the button again to turn the
acceleration and when you are intentionally system off.
steering your vehicle.
Note: When you switch the system off, a
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs warning indicator may remain illuminated
in the immediate area surrounding the in the information display. See Warning
sensor. Lamps and Indicators (page 95).
Note: The system operates with a minimum
of one tracked lane marking.
171
Driving Aids
Setting the Steering Wheel Vibration The lane markings are color coded as
Level follows:
The system has three intensity levels which • Green: The system is ready to warn you
you can set using the information display. of any unintentional lane departure.
See General Information (page 99). • Red: Your vehicle is approaching or is
too close to the detected lane
Setting the System Sensitivity boundary. Take immediate safe action
Some vehicles can adjust how quickly the to reposition your vehicle.
system warns you. The system has two • Gray: The system will suppress the
sensitivity levels which you can set using relevant lane boundary.
the information display. See General
Information (page 99). Instances where a lane boundary may be
suppressed:
System Warnings • The sensor may not detect the lane
markings on the road.
• You turn the direction indicator for that
side of your vehicle on.
• If you apply direct steering, accelerate
fast or brake hard.
• Your vehicle speed is outside the
operating limits.
• If there is an anti-lock brake or stability
control intervention.
• Narrow lane width.
If the lane markings in the display turn red
or you feel a vibration through the steering
wheel you must take immediate and safe
action to align your vehicle. Correct any
unintended lane drift immediately.
STEERING
E152382 To help prevent damage to the power
When you switch the system on, an image steering system:
of a vehicle showing lane markings • Never hold the steering wheel at its
appears in the information display. When furthest turning points (until it stops)
you switch the system off, the image does for more than three to five seconds
not display. when the engine is running.
When the system is on, the color of the • Do not operate the vehicle with a low
lane markings will change to indicate the power steering pump fluid level (below
system status. the MIN mark on the reservoir).
172
Driving Aids
• Some noise is normal during operation.

If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused
by low power steering fluid. Check for
low power steering pump fluid level
before seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks
from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down
(or if the engine is turned off), you can
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
If any steering components are serviced or
replaced, install new fasteners (many are
coated with thread adhesive or have
prevailing torque features which may not
be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
173
Load Carrying
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES vehicle provides maximum return

of vehicle design performance.
Securing Cargo Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E175810
Variant Maximum Load

Value
All Van 1,125 lb (5,000 N)
Note: The number of load retaining fixtures

may vary depending on your vehicle model.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and

without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design E198719
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
174
Load Carrying
Payload
PAYLOAD
E143816
Payload is the combined weight

of cargo and passengers that your WARNING: The appropriate
vehicle is carrying. The maximum loading capacity of your vehicle
payload for your vehicle appears can be limited either by volume
on the Tire and Loading label. The capacity (how much space is
label is either on the B-pillar or the available) or by payload capacity
edge of the driver door. Vehicles (how much weight the vehicle
exported outside the US and should carry). Once you have
Canada may not have a tire and reached the maximum payload of
loading label. Look for “The your vehicle, do not add more
combined weight of occupants cargo, even if there is space
and cargo should never exceed available. Overloading or
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum improperly loading your vehicle
payload. The payload listed on the can contribute to loss of vehicle
Tire and Loading Information label control and vehicle rollover.
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
plant. If you install any additional Rating)
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload. GAWR is the maximum allowable
Subtract the weight of the weight that a single axle (front or
equipment from the payload listed rear) can carry. These numbers
on the Tire and Loading label. are on the Safety Compliance
When towing, trailer tongue Certification label. The label is
weight or king pin weight is also located on the door hinge pillar,
part of payload. door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
175
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must

never exceed its Gross Axle WARNING: Exceeding the
Weight Rating. Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight could result in substandard
Rating) vehicle handling or performance,
GVWR is the maximum allowable engine, transmission and/or
weight of the fully loaded vehicle. structural damage, serious
This includes all options, damage to the vehicle, loss of
equipment, passengers and cargo. control and personal injury.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. Maximum Loaded Trailer
The label is located on the door Weight
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the Maximum loaded trailer weight is
door-latch post, next to the driver the highest possible weight of a
seating position. fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
The gross vehicle weight must (or the RV and Trailer Towing
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Guide available at an authorized
Weight Rating. dealer) for more detailed
Safety Compliance Certification Label information.
Example:
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
E198828
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
176
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed Steps for determining the

vehicles and for trailers where the correct load limit:
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer 1. Locate the statement "The
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight combined weight of occupants
Rating of the towing vehicle. and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
The gross combined weight must vehicle’s placard.
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating. 2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
Note: For trailer towing passengers that will be riding
information refer to the RV and in your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Guide available at 3. Subtract the combined weight
an authorized dealer. of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
WARNING: Do not exceed 4. The resulting figure equals the
the GVWR or the GAWR specified available amount of cargo and
on the Safety Compliance luggage load capacity. For
Certification label. example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
WARNING: Do not use be five 150 lb. passengers in
replacement tires with lower load your vehicle, the amount of
carrying capacities than the available cargo and luggage
original tires because they may load capacity is 650 lb.
lower your vehicle’s GVWR and (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the 5. Determine the combined
original tires do not increase the weight of luggage and cargo
GVWR and GAWR limitations. being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
WARNING: Exceeding any exceed the available cargo and
vehicle weight rating limitation luggage load capacity
could result in serious damage to calculated in Step 4.
your vehicle, personal injury or 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
both. trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
177
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do

the available amount of cargo not have enough cargo capacity
and luggage load capacity to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
Suppose your vehicle has a be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
and luggage capacity. You decide 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
to go golfing. Is there enough load You will need to reduce the load
capacity to carry you, four of your weight by at least 240 pounds
friends and all the golf bags? You (104 kilograms). If you remove
and four friends average 220 three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
pounds (99 kilograms) each and cement bags, then the load
the golf bags weigh approximately calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
The calculation would be: 1400 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 the load capacity to transport the
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have cement and your friend home. In
enough load capacity in your metric units, the calculation would
vehicle to transport four friends be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
and your golf bags. In metric units, kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
the calculation would be: 635 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - The above calculations also
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
Suppose your vehicle has a manner that does not overload
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo the front or the rear gross axle
and luggage capacity. You and weight rating specified for your
one of your friends decide to pick vehicle on the Safety Compliance
up cement from the local home Certification label.
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
178
Load Carrying
Special Loading Instructions

for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles

may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
179
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
WARNING: Towing trailers when driving:
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight • Load the heaviest items closest
exceeds the limit of your vehicle to the trailer floor.
and could result in engine • Load the heaviest items
damage, transmission damage, centered between the left and
structural damage, loss of vehicle right side trailer tires.
control, vehicle rollover and • Load the heaviest items above
personal injury. the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
WARNING: Do not exceed tongue. Do not allow the final
the GVWR or the GAWR specified trailer tongue weight to go
on the certification label. above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
Note: See Recommended
Towing Weights (page 181). • Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
Your vehicle may have electrical capacity. When both the
items, such as fuses or relays, loaded vehicle and trailer are
related to towing. See Fuses connected, the trailer frame
(page 208). should be level, or slightly
Your vehicle's load capacity angled down toward your
designation is by weight, not by vehicle, when viewed from the
volume, so you cannot necessarily side.
use all available space when When driving with a trailer or
loading a vehicle or trailer. payload, a slight takeoff vibration
Towing a trailer places an extra or shudder may be present due to
load on your vehicle's engine, the increased payload weight.
transmission, axle, brakes, tires Additional information regarding
and suspension. Inspect these proper trailer loading and setting
components periodically during, your vehicle up for towing is
and after, any towing operation. located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
174).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
180
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
Note: Exceeding this limitation

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
sway, but reduces it once it begins. low aerodynamic drag and rounded
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers front design helps optimize
from swaying. performance and fuel economy.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed Note: For high altitude operation,
is too high, the system may turn on multiple reduce the gross combined weight
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed. by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
individual wheels and if necessary, reduces elevation point.
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the traction control warning lamp flashes Note: Certain states require
and a message will appear in the electric trailer brakes for trailers
information display. Slow your vehicle over a specified weight. Be sure to
down, pull safely to the side of the road check state regulations for this
and check for correct load distribution. specified weight. The maximum
See Load Carrying (page 174).
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
RECOMMENDED TOWING vehicle's electrical system may not
WEIGHTS include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
Note: Make sure to take into brakes.
consideration trailer frontal area.
Vehicles equipped with the Trailer Your vehicle may tow a trailer
Tow Package or the Heavy Duty provided the maximum trailer
Payload Package should not weight is less than or equal to the
exceed 55 ft² (5.1 m²) trailer frontal maximum trailer weight listed for
area. your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.
181
Towing
Van and Chassis Cab

Powertrain Axle Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded
Ratio Trailer Weight
*
3.2L Power 3.31 10600 lb (4808 kg) 4750 lb (2155 kg)

Stroke Diesel
3.2L Power 3.73 13500 lb (6123 kg) 7500 lb (3402 kg)
Stroke Diesel
3.5L V6 GTDI 3.31 11200 lb (5080 kg) 5700 lb (2585 kg)
3.5L V6 GTDI 3.73 12600 lb (5715 kg) 7150 lb (3243 kg)
3.7L V6 TiVCT 3.73 10800 lb (4899 kg) 5350 lb (2427 kg)
*
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
Wagon
Powertrain Axle Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded
Ratio Trailer Weight
*
3.2L Power 3.31 10600 lb (4808 kg) 4200 lb (1905 kg)

Stroke Diesel
3.2L Power 3.73 11200 lb (5080 kg) 4650 lb (2109 kg)
Stroke Diesel
3.5L V6 GTDI 3.31 11200 lb (5080 kg) 5150 lb (2336 kg)
*
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
182
Towing
Calculating the Maximum ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS

Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined has covered at least 1,000 mi
weight rating for your vehicle (1,600 km). See Breaking-In (page
model and axle ratio. See the 191).
previous charts. • Consult your local motor vehicle laws
2. Subtract all of the following for towing a trailer.
that apply to your vehicle: • See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the correct
• Vehicle curb weight installation and adjustment
• Hitch hardware weight, such as specifications.
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight • Service your vehicle more frequently if
distributing hardware you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 459).
• Driver weight
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
• Passenger(s) weight instructions the rental agency gives
• Payload, cargo and luggage you.
weight Refer to Load Carrying for load
• Aftermarket equipment weight. specification terms found on the tire label,
Safety Compliance label and instructions
This equals the maximum loaded on calculating your vehicle's maximum
trailer weight for this combination. load. See Load Limit (page 174).
Remember to account for the trailer
Note: The trailer tongue load is tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
considered part of the payload for when calculating the total vehicle weight.
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
E163167
Your vehicle is fitted with both a 7 pin and

4 pin trailer wiring connector.
183
Towing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector Weight Distributing Hitches

to your vehicle, only use a correctly fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and A weight distribution hitch is not
trailer functions. Some seven-position recommended for use with your vehicle.
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the correct wiring
Safety Chains
connector and works correctly with your Always connect the safety chains to the
vehicle. frame or hook retainers of your vehicle's
tow hitch.
Color Function To connect the safety chains, cross the
Yellow Left turn signal and brake chains under the trailer tongue and allow
lamp. enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
White Ground (-). Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
Blue Electric brakes. bumper.
Green Right turn signal and brake Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
lamp.
Orange Battery (+).
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
Brown Running lamps. hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
Grey Reverse lamps. not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
Tow Hitch increase.
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type

WARNING: Do not exceed the trailer brakes are safe if you install them
lowest rating capacity for your vehicle or correctly and adjust them to the
trailer hitch. Overloading your vehicle or manufacturer's specifications. Trailer
trailer hitch can impair your vehicle stability brakes must meet local and federal
and handling. Failure to follow this regulations.
instruction could result in the loss of The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
control of your vehicle, personal injury or system operation is at the gross vehicle
death. weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld or Separate functioning brake systems are
modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the required for safe control of towed vehicles
trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating. and trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
Do not use a tow hitch that either clamps
on to the bumper or attaches to the axle.
You must distribute the load in your trailer
so that between 10% and 15% of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
184
Towing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller Slide the manual control lever to the left
to turn on the trailer's electric brakes. They
work independently of the tow vehicle's
WARNING: Use the integrated trailer braking system. See Procedure for
brake controller to properly adjust the Adjusting the Gain Setting for
trailer brakes and check all connections instructions on correct use of this feature.
before towing a trailer. Failure to follow If you use the manual control while the
this instruction could result in the loss of brake is also applied, the greater of the two
control of your vehicle, personal injury or inputs determines the power sent to the
death. trailer brakes.
1. Press the + and - buttons to adjust the
brake controller's power output to the
trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
A can increase the gain setting to 10
(maximum trailer braking) or decrease
it to zero (no trailer braking). Pressing
and holding a button raises or lowers
the setting continuously.
B The gain setting displays in the
information display as:
Message
E163166
Trailer Brake
A Gain adjustment buttons. Gain:
B Manual control lever.
Note: Using the manual control lever
When used correctly, the trailer brake illuminates the trailer's brake lamps and
controller assists in smooth and effective your vehicle's brake lamps, except the
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s center high-mounted brake lamp, if you
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes make the correct electrical connection to
with a proportional output based on the the trailer.
towing vehicle’s brake pressure
185
Towing
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph and the trailer connectivity
status in the information display as follows:
Trailer Brake Displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain setting. This also displays if you
Gain: use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with
No Trailer no trailer connected.
Trailer Brake Displays when you press your vehicle's brake pedal, or upon
use of the manual control lever. Bar indicators illuminate in
Gain: the information display to indicate the amount of power going
Output: to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual
control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
Trailer Connected Displays when the system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection during a given ignition cycle. For example a trailer
with electric trailer brakes.
Trailer Disconnected Displays when the system senses a trailer connection and
then a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle, this is accompanied by a single
audible tone. It also displays if a vehicle or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This
message can also display if you use the manual control lever
without a trailer connected.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good

Procedure for Adjusting the Gain Setting working condition, functioning normally
The gain setting sets the trailer brake and correctly adjusted. See a trailer
controller for the specific towing condition. dealer if necessary.
You should change the setting as towing 2. Hook up the trailer and make the
conditions change. Changes to towing electrical connections according to the
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, trailer manufacturer's instructions.
road conditions and weather. 3. Use the gain adjustment + and -
The gain should be set to provide the buttons to increase or decrease the
maximum trailer braking assistance while gain setting to the desired starting
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock point. A gain setting of six is a good
when using the brakes. Locked trailer starting point for heavier loads.
wheels may lead to trailer instability. 4. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
Note: Only carry out this procedure in a trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
traffic-free environment at speeds of of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and slide
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h). the manual control lever completely.
186
Towing
5. If the trailer wheels lock, indicated by just below trailer wheel lock. If towing
squealing tires, reduce the gain setting. a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock may
If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase not be attainable even with the
the gain setting. Repeat steps four and maximum gain setting of 10.
five until the gain setting is at a point
System Warning Messages

Trailer Brake Module Displays in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake
Fault controller, accompanied by a single tone. If this message
appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
Wiring Fault on Trailer Displays when there is a short circuit on the electric brake
output wire. If the message displays, accompanied by a single
tone, with no trailer connected, the problem is with your
vehicle wiring between the trailer brake controller and the 7-
pin connector. If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer wiring. Consult a
trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to ground,
for example a chaffed wire, short to voltage, for example a
pulled pin on trailer emergency breakaway battery or the
trailer brakes may be drawing too much current.
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly
which trailer fault has occurred. However, the Ford Warranty does not cover this diagnosis
if the fault is with the trailer.
Points to Remember • Only use the manual control lever for

correct adjustment of the gain during
• Do not attempt removal of the trailer trailer setup. Misuse, such as
brake controller without consulting the application during trailer sway, could
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit cause instability of trailer or tow
may result. vehicle.
• Adjust gain setting before using the • Avoid towing in adverse weather
trailer brake controller for the first time. conditions. The trailer brake controller
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure does not provide anti-lock control of
above, whenever road, weather and the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
trailer or vehicle loading conditions lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
change from when the gain was initially in instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
set.
187
Towing
• The trailer brake controller is fitted with Trailer lamps are required on most towed
a feature that reduces output at vehicle vehicles. Make sure all running lamps,
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so brake lamps, turn signals and hazard
trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky warning lamps are working.
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your Before Towing a Trailer
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller. Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
• The controller interacts with the brake combination before starting on a trip.
control system and powertrain control When turning, make wider turns so the
system of your vehicle to provide the trailer wheels clear curbs and other
best performance on different road obstacles.
conditions.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the When Towing a Trailer
trailer brake system work
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
independently of each other. Changing
(113 km/h) until you drive your vehicle
the gain setting on the controller does
at least 495 mi (800 km). See
not affect the operation of your
Breaking-In (page 191).
vehicle's brake system whether you
attach a trailer or not. • Do not make full-throttle starts.
• When you switch the engine off, the • Check the tow hitch, electrical
controller output is disabled and the connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
display and module shut down. The thoroughly after you have traveled
controller module and display turn on 50 mi (80 km).
when you switch the ignition on. • When stopped in congested or heavy
• The trailer brake controller is only a traffic during hot weather, place the
factory-installed or dealer-installed gearshift in position park (P) to aid
item. Ford is not responsible for engine and transmission cooling and
warranty or performance of the to help A/C performance.
controller due to misuse or customer • Turn off the speed control with heavy
installation. loads or on hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
Trailer Lamps when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
WARNING: Never connect any trailer a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp brakes continuously, as they may
wiring; this may damage the electrical overheat and become less effective.
system resulting in fire. Contact your
• If the transmission is fitted with a
authorized dealer as soon as possible for
Grade Assist, Tow/Haul feature, use
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring
this feature when towing. This provides
installation. Additional electrical
engine braking and helps eliminate
equipment may be required.
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
188
Towing
• If your vehicle is fitted with Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
AdvanceTrac with roll stability control after the trailer is removed from the water.
(RSC), this system may turn on during Exceeding these limits may allow water to
typical cornering maneuvers with a enter vehicle components:
heavily loaded trailer. This is normal.
Turning the corner at a slower speed • Causing internal damage to the
while towing may reduce this tendency. components.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in • Affecting driveability, emissions, and
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the reliability.
gross combined weight rating (or any Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
combination of these factors), consider the rear axle has been submerged in water.
refilling your vehicle's rear axle with Water may have contaminated the rear
synthetic gear lubricant (if the axle is axle lubricant, which is not normally
not already filled with it). See checked or changed unless a leak is
Capacities and Specifications (page suspected or other axle repair is required.
305).
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
brake gradually. FOUR WHEELS
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade: Emergency Towing
• Turn the steering wheel to point
your vehicle tires away from traffic
flow. WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
• Set your vehicle parking brake. is in the accessory or on position when
• Place the automatic transmission being towed.
in position park (P).
• Place wheel chocks in front of and You can flat-tow (all wheels on the
at the back of the trailer wheels. ground, regardless of the powertrain or
(Trailer wheel chocks are not transmission configuration) your disabled
included with your vehicle.) vehicle (without access to wheel dollies
or vehicle transport trailer) under the
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or following conditions:
Personal Water Craft (PWC) • Your vehicle is facing forward so you
tow it in a forward direction.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval: • You shift into Neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into Neutral (N), you may need to
• Do not allow the static water level to
override the transmission. See
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
Transmission (page 151).
bumper.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
edge of the rear bumper.
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
189
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 109).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage the transmission during towing.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. It is recommended to
tow your vehicle with all four wheels off
the ground, for example when using a
vehicle transport trailer. Otherwise, you
cannot tow your vehicle.
190
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN 4. Check the coolant level. See Engine

Coolant Check (page 236).
You need to break in new tires for 5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During possible.
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics. The engine
also needs to break in. Avoid hard ECONOMICAL DRIVING
accelerations and driving too fast for the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). If possible, avoid The following helps to improve fuel
carrying heavy loads up steep grades consumption:
during the break-in period. • Regularly check your tire pressures and
make sure that they are inflated to the
correct pressure.
REDUCED ENGINE
• Follow the recommended maintenance
PERFORMANCE schedule and carry out the
recommended checks.
• Plan your journey and check the traffic
WARNING: If you continue to drive before you set off.
your vehicle when the engine is • Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
overheating, the engine could stop without or for extended periods. Start the
warning. Failure to follow this instruction engine only when you are ready to set
could result in the loss of control of your off.
vehicle.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
If the engine coolant temperature gauge vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
needle moves to the upper limit position, • Do not add unnecessary accessories
the engine is overheating. See Gauges to the exterior of your vehicle, for
(page 93). example running boards. If you use a
roof rack, remember to fold it down or
You must only drive your vehicle for a short remove it when not in use.
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on • Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
ambient temperature, vehicle load and anticipate the road ahead to avoid
terrain. The engine continues to operate heavy braking.
with limited power for a short period of • Switch off all electric systems when
time. not in use, for example air conditioning.
If the engine temperature continues to rise, Make sure that you unplug any
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The accessories from the auxiliary power
air conditioning switches off and the engine points when not in use.
cooling fan operates continually.
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop COLD WEATHER
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do PRECAUTIONS
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to The functional operation of some
prevent severe engine damage. components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
191
Driving Hints
DRIVING THROUGH WATER FLOOR MATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not drive through WARNING: Use a floor mat designed

flowing or deep water as you may lose to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
control of your vehicle. not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
Note: Driving through standing water can loss of control of your vehicle, personal
cause vehicle damage. injury or death.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter. WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
Before driving through standing water, control and increase the risk of serious
check the depth. Never drive through water personal injury.
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional

floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
E176913
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
When driving through standing water, drive death.
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may WARNING: Always make sure that
be limited. After driving through water and objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
as soon as it is safe to do so: while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the are loose can become trapped under the
brakes and to check that they work. pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
192
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor

mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
193
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
To fully assist you should you have a disablement location or to the nearest
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company authorized dealer. If a member
offers a complimentary roadside requests a tow to an authorized dealer
assistance program. This program is that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
separate from the New Vehicle Limited the disablement location, the member
Warranty. shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
The service is available:
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
• For the coverage period listed on the eligible vehicle requires service at the
Roadside Assistance Card included in nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
your Owner's Manual portfolio. vehicle is operational but the trailer is
Roadside Assistance covers: not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire Vehicles Sold in the United States:
inflation kit). Using Roadside Assistance
• Battery jump start.
Complete the roadside assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement identification card and place it in your
cost is the customer's responsibility). wallet for quick reference. This card is in
• Fuel delivery — independent service the owner's information portfolio in the
contractors, if not prohibited by state, glove compartment.
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
United States vehicle customers who
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
require Roadside Assistance, call
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
1-800-241-3673.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences If you need to arrange roadside assistance
within a 12-month period. for yourself, Ford Motor Company
• Winch out — available within 100 ft reimburses a reasonable amount for
(30 m) of a paved or county towing to the nearest dealership within
maintained road, no recoveries. 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
194
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Press the button to switch the hazard
Roadside Assistance warning flashers on. The front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Press the button again to switch the
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary hazard warning flashers off.
roadside assistance program. This Note: Prolonged use of the hazard warning
program is eligible within Canada or the flashers will cause the battery to run out of
continental United States. charge. There may be insufficient power to
This program is separate from the New restart the engine.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage EMERGENCY EXIT
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
WARNING: Make sure that the roof
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using rack and its load do not obstruct the
Roadside Assistance emergency exit. Ask your dealer for advice
on roof racks suitable for your vehicle.
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your Break the glass with the hammer in an
wallet for quick reference. emergency.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment FUEL SHUTOFF
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside

Assistance Program Coverage WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
The service is available 24 hours a day, checked. Failure to follow this instruction
seven days a week. could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. In the event of a moderate to severe crash,
your vehicle is fitted with a fuel pump
If you require more information, please
shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel
refer to the coverage section of your
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
a shut-off.
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca. Should the engine turn off after a crash,
you may restart the engine by carrying out
the following.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Ignition Switch
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel. 1. Switch the ignition off.
E71943
Switch the hazard warning 2. Switch the ignition to position III.
flashers on when your vehicle is creating a
safety hazard. 3. Switch the ignition off.
195
4. Switch the ignition on again to Your vehicle has a positive (+) access
re-enable the fuel pump. terminal and a negative (-) grounding
Note: Various system checks are connection point that you can access
automatically carried out before the vehicle under the hood, even though the actual
will restart. if your vehicle fails to restart battery is under the driver seat. You can
after the third attempt, the system has jump your vehicle using these points.
detected a fault that requires service. We The positive (+) access terminal is next to
recommend you contact an authorized the fuse box, under a red cap. To access
dealer. the positive (+) terminal, lift the red cap
up.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the

battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric

acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing,
if contacted.
WARNING: Use only an

adequate-sized cable with insulated
clamps. E145290
The negative (-) terminal is a post, located

Preparing Your Vehicle on the driver side, near the hood hinge. It
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your is a grounding connection point, so you will
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic need to remove the rubber covering first.
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission may
cause transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the E183998
two vehicles do not touch, and switch off
all accessories.
196
Connecting the Jumper Cables 2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery.
WARNING: Do not attach the cables 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the negative (-) terminal of the assisting
intake manifold or electrical components battery.
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving 4. Make the final connection of the
parts. To avoid reverse polarity negative (-) cable to the grounding
connections, make sure that you correctly connection point of the vehicle with
identify the positive (+) and negative (-) the discharged battery.
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle of the second cable to the negative (-)
represents the booster vehicle. terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
1 the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
3 4 both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
2
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) access terminal of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
197
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
4 and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
1 • Your vehicle runs out of power.
2
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the

grounding connection point of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
positive (+) access terminal of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
After you start the disabled vehicle and
remove the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.
E143886
198
If you need to have your vehicle towed,

contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside WARNING: You must switch the
assistance program, your roadside ignition on when your vehicle is being
assistance service provider. towed.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing E146426
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain 1. Carefully remove the cover.
on the ground.
2. Install the towing eye.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when Note: It has a left-hand thread. Turn it
towing your vehicle from the rear using counterclockwise to install it.
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission. Rear Towing Point
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Front Towing Point
WARNING: Make sure that the

towing eye is fully tightened. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
E142319
personal injury.
199
Towing Eye Location
E265227
The towing eye may be found:

• Secured to the floor under the
passenger seat.
• Secured to the rear of the seat base
under the passenger seat.
• Secured under the second row
passenger seat.
• Inside the driver door storage
compartment.
• Inside the toolkit within the front step
storage compartment.
Note: You must carry the towing eye in your
vehicle at all times.
200
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED Website
www.owner.ford.com
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle These are some of the items that can be
line will provide warranty service, we found online:
recommend you return to your selling • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
authorized dealer who wants to ensure City/State or Zip Code.
your continued satisfaction. • Owner Manuals.
Please note that certain warranty repairs • Maintenance Schedules.
require special training and equipment, so
• Recalls.
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means • Ford Extended Service Plans.
that, depending on the warranty repair • Ford Genuine Accessories.
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Service specials and promotions.
to another authorized dealer.
In Canada:
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle Mailing address
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be Customer Relationship Centre
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
remanufactured or other parts that are P.O. Box 2000
authorized by Ford. Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Away From Home Telephone
If you are away from home when your 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the Website
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer. www.ford.ca
In the United States:
Twitter
Mailing address
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
Ford Motor Company @FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248 Additional Assistance
Dearborn, MI 48126
If you have questions or concerns, or are
Telephone unsatisfied with the service you are
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) receiving, follow these steps:
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or
1-800-232-5952) Service Advisor at your selling or
Additional information and resources are servicing authorized dealer.
available online:
201
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
Manager. requires that, if a manufacturer or its
3. If you require assistance or clarification representative is unable to repair a motor
on Ford Motor Company policies, vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
please contact the Ford Customer applicable express warranty after a
Relationship Center. reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
In order to help us serve you better, please
replace the vehicle with one substantially
have the following information available
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
when contacting a Customer Relationship
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
Center:
the actual price paid or payable by the
• Vehicle Identification Number. consumer (less a reasonable allowance
• Your telephone number (home and for consumer use). The consumer has the
business). right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
In some states within the United States, conform the vehicle to its applicable
you must directly notify Ford in writing express warranties if, within the first 18
before pursuing remedies under your months of ownership of a new vehicle or
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
allowed a final repair attempt. occurs first:
Additionally, in some states within the 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
United States, a consumer has the option on the same non-conformity likely to
of submitting a warranty dispute to the cause death or serious bodily injury OR
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
on the same nonconformity (a defect
the extent allowed by state law, before
or condition that substantially impairs
pursuing replacement or repurchase
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
remedies provided by certain state laws.
OR
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
rights or other rights which are independent of nonconformities for a total of more
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
state replacement or repurchase laws. all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
202
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within forty
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes.
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a will need to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the review the claim for eligibility under the
Services you need section, you may be Program Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program. You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Company to explore options for settlement Arlington, Virginia 22201
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
during mediation or you do not want to requested by calling the Ford Motor
participate in mediation, and if your claim Company Customer Relationship Center
is eligible, you may participate in the at 1-800-392-3673.
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
will be scheduled so that you can present
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
your case in an informal setting before an
procedures, or to discontinue this process
impartial person. The arbitrator will
at any time without notice and without
consider the testimony provided and make
obligation.
a decision after the hearing.
203
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
Canada participates in an impartial third sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
party mediation/arbitration program
If you cannot find the proper fuel
administered by the Canadian Motor
recommended for your vehicle, contact
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to
the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This
system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings.
responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
appropriate, render awards to resolve
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
CAMVAP services are available in all contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Canadian territories and provinces. For Assistance Center:
more information, without charge or
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 Customer Relationship Centers in:
or visit www.camvap.ca.
204
Customer Assistance
Customer Relation-
Phone Fax E-mail
ship Center
Asia Pacific N/A N/A [email protected]

Caribbean and
+1 313 594 4857 - [email protected]
Central America
Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
Middle East 80004441066 971 4 3327 266 [email protected]
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
North Africa N/A N/A [email protected]
Puerto Rico and U.S.
+1-800-841-3673 N/A [email protected]
Virgin Islands
Sub-Saharan Africa +1-313-594-4857 N/A [email protected]
[email protected] or
South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A
[email protected]
If you buy your vehicle in North America If you are in another foreign country,
and then relocate to any of the above contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
locations, register your vehicle the event your inquiry is unresolved,
identification number (VIN) and new communicate your concern with the
address with Ford Global Trade Services dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
by emailing, [email protected]. Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
205
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL If NHTSA receives similar

OWNER'S LITERATURE complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
To order the publications in this portfolio, safety defect exists in a group of
contact Helm, Incorporated at: vehicles, it may order a recall and
HELM, INCORPORATED remedy campaign. However,
47911 Halyard Drive NHTSA cannot become involved
Plymouth, Michigan 48170 in individual problems between
Attention: Customer Service you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Or to order a free publication catalog, call Company.
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
To contact NHTSA, you may call
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
by their website: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.helminc.com http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.) Administrator
Obtaining a French Owner’s 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Manual Southeast
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained Washington, D.C. 20590
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the You can also obtain other
contact information listed previously in this information about motor vehicle
section. safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY) REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
E142557 crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
If you believe that your vehicle has inform Transport Canada and
a defect which could cause a Ford of Canada.
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
206
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information

Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-
defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)
Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-
defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)
Phone 1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information

Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1–800–565-3673
207
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS This is located behind the removable trim

panel.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Pre-fuse Box
This is located under the driver seat.
Body Control Module
E146726
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
E152512
This is located behind the removable trim

panel.
E152513
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
208
Fuses
E148826
Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
F1 10 A Selective catalytic reduction system.

209
Fuses
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.

F5 3A
Glow plug monitor.
F6 - Not used.
F7 7.5 A Automatic transmission module.
F8 - Not used.
F9 - Not used.
Power step.
F10 30 A
Heated seats.
F11 10 A Air conditioning clutch.
F12 20 A Diesel particulate filter vaporizer glow plug.
F13 - Not used.
F14 3A Selective catalytic reduction system.
F15 - Not used.
F16 10 A Fuel pump relay.
F17 15 A Automatic transmission module.
Fuel pump relay.
F18 30 A
Automatic transmission module.
F19 30 A Starter motor solenoid.
F20 60 A Glow plugs.
F21 60 A Ignition relay 3.
40 A Selective catalytic reduction system.
F22
- Not used.
F23 10 A Spare.
F24 - Not used.
F25 10 A Spare.
F26 20 A Spare.
F27 - Not used.
F28 7.5 A Crankcase pressure sensor.
210
Fuses
- Not used.
F29
7.5 A Positive crankcase ventilation valve heater element.
60 A Cooling fan.
F30
- Not used.
F31 - Not used.
F32 30 A Windshield wiper motor.
F33 - Not used.
F34 - Not used.
F35 15 A Powertrain control module.
Particulate matter sensor.
Nitrogen oxides sensor.
F37 7.5 A Fuel volume control valve.
- Not used.
F38
7.5 A Air conditioning clutch.
Exhaust gas temperature sensor.
Fuel vaporizer system fuel pump.
F39 15 A Coolant bypass solenoid valve.
Low-speed cooling fan.
High-speed cooling fan.
Relay Number Protected Component
R1 Ignition relay 3.
R2 Not used.
R3 Not used.
R4 Not used.
R5 Not used.
R6 Windshield wiper on/off relay.
R7 Windshield wiper high/low speed relay.
211
Fuses
R8 Not used.
R9 Starter motor.
R10 Air conditioning clutch.
R11 Fuel vaporizer system glow plug.
R12 Fuel injection pump.
R13 Not used.
R14 Not used.
R15 Low-speed and high-speed cooling fan relay.
R16 Selective catalytic reduction system.
R17 Powertrain control module.
R18 High-speed cooling fan.
E148827
212
Fuses
F1 10 A Restraints control module.

Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability
F2 4A control.
Parking brake.
Interior lighting.
F3 7.5 A
Power point relay control.
F4 10 A Trailer tow reversing lamp relay.
F5 20 A Modified vehicle connections.
F6 - Not used.
F7 10 A Battery saver relay.
F8 40 A Direct current/alternating current inverter.
F9 30 A Trailer brake control module.
F10 30 A Driver power seat.
F11 30 A Passenger power seat.
F12 30 A Trailer lamps.
F13 25 A
control.
F14 5A Powertrain control module.
F15 40 A Powertrain control module relay.
F16 40 A Body control module.
F17 40 A Anti-lock brake system.
F19 5A Trailer module.
Heated exterior mirror relay.
F20 5A Heated rear window.
Direct current/alternating current inverter.
F22 - Not used.
F23 7.5 A Air conditioning control module.
213
Fuses

F26 10 A Heated exterior mirrors.
F27 20 A Heated rear window.
Rear parking aid camera.
F29 10 A Lane keeping system.
Interior rear view mirror.
F30 - Not used.
F31 10 A Trailer brake ignition feed.
F32 10 A Interior lighting.
F33 10 A Driver heated seat.
F34 10 A Passenger heated seat.
Exterior mirrors.
F35 5A
Driver door window control switch.
F36 20 A Horn.
SYNC module.
F37 7.5 A
Global positioning system module.
Blower motor relay.
F38 5A Horn relay.
Windshield wiper relay.
Remote keyless entry.
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
F39 7.5 A
Trailer tow backup relay coil.
Parking lamp.
F40 40 A Front blower motor.
F41 40 A Rear blower motor.
Trailer socket.
F43 30 A
Trailer tow module.
F44 60 A Auxiliary power points.
214
Fuses
F45 40 A Trailer tow module.

F46 30 A Power windows.
F47 20 A Cigar lighter socket.
F48 20 A Rear auxiliary power points.
F49 20 A Front auxiliary power points.
Power step.
F51 60 A
Heated seats.
R1 Spare.
R2 Auxiliary power points.
R3 Trailer lamps.
R4 Not used.
R5 Power windows.
R7 Horn.
R8 Trailer tow reversing lamp.
R9 Front blower motor.
R10 Rear blower motor.
Heated rear window.
R11
Heated exterior mirrors.
R12 Heated seats.
R13 Modified vehicle connections.
215
Fuses
Body Control Module
E148830
F1 15 A Central locking system.

F3 15 A Ignition switch.
Parking assist control module.
F4 5A
Brake shift interlock.
F5 5A Rain sensor module.
F6 15 A Windshield washer pump.
216
Fuses
F7 7.5 A Exterior mirrors.

F8 - Not used.
F9 10 A Right-hand high beam.
F10 10 A Left-hand high beam.
Right-hand exterior lamps.
F11 25 A
Left-hand headlamp.
F12 - Not used.
Secondary On-Board Diagnostic Control Module A.
F13 15 A
Battery saver.
Direction indicators.
Heated windshield element.
Left-hand exterior lamps.
F15 25 A Right-hand headlamp.
Central high mounted stoplamp.
Audio unit.
F16 20 A
Navigation unit.
Instrument panel cluster.
F17 7.5 A
Auxiliary heater control module.
Headlamp switch.
F18 10 A Steering wheel module.
Stoplamp switch.
F19 5A Front control/display interface module.
F20 5A Ignition passive anti-theft system.
F21 3A Spare.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - 3.5L ECOBOOST™/3.7L
217
Fuses
E148826
F1 - Not used.
F2 - Not used.
F3 - Not used.
F4 - Not used.
218
Fuses
F5 - Not used.
F6 - Not used.
F7 7.5 A Automatic transmission module.
F8 30 A Cooling fan.
F9 - Not used.
Power step.
F10 30 A
Heated seats.
F12 - Not used.
F13 - Not used.
F14 - Not used.
F15 - Not used.
F16 20 A Fuel pump relay.
F17 - Not used.
Anti-lock brake system.
F18 30 A
Fuel pump relay.
F19 30 A Starter motor solenoid.
F20 - Not used.
Selective catalytic reduction system catalyst.
F22 40 A
Brake vacuum pump relay.
F23 10 A Spare.
F24 - Not used.
F25 10 A Spare.
F26 20 A Spare.
F27 - Not used.
F28 - Not used.
F29 3A Audio unit.
219
Fuses

F32 30 A Windshield wiper motor.
F33 - Not used.
F34 - Not used.
F35 20 A Powertrain control module.
F36 20 A Mass air flow sensor.
F37 - Not used.
Exhaust gas temperature sensor -3.7L.
Fuel vaporizer system fuel pump -3.7L.
7.5 A Coolant bypass solenoid valve -3.7L.
Low-speed cooling fan -3.7L.
High-speed cooling fan -3.7L.
F39
Exhaust gas temperature sensor - 3.5L Ecoboost.
Fuel vaporizer system fuel pump - 3.5L Ecoboost.
10 A Coolant bypass solenoid valve - 3.5L Ecoboost.
Low-speed cooling fan - 3.5L Ecoboost.
High-speed cooling fan - 3.5L Ecoboost.
R2 Not used.
R3 Not used.
R4 Not used.
R5 Cooling fan.
R6 Windshield wiper on/off relay.
R7 Windshield wiper high/low speed relay.
R8 Brake vacuum pump.
R9 Starter motor.
220
Fuses
R10 Air conditioning clutch.

R11 Not used.
R12 Fuel injection pump.
R13 Not used.
R14 Not used.
R15 Low-speed and high-speed cooling fan relay.
R16 Not used.
R17 Powertrain control module.
R18 High-speed cooling fan.
E148827
221
Fuses
F1 10 A Restraints control module.

F2 4A
control.
Interior lighting.
F3 7.5 A
Power point relay control.
F4 10 A Trailer tow reversing lamp relay.
F6 - Not used.
F7 10 A Battery saver.
F8 40 A Direct current/alternating current inverter.
F9 30 A Trailer brake control module.
F10 30 A Driver power seat.
F11 30 A Passenger power seat.
F12 30 A Trailer lamps.
F13 25 A
control.
F14 5A Powertrain control module.
F15 40 A Powertrain control module relay.
F17 40 A Anti-lock brake system.
F19 5A Trailer module.
Heated exterior mirror relay.
F20 5A Heated rear window.
Direct current/alternating current inverter.
F22 - Not used.
F23 7.5 A Air conditioning control module.
222
Fuses

F26 10 A Heated exterior mirrors.
Rear parking aid camera.
F29 10 A Lane keeping system.
Interior rear view mirror.
F30 - Not used.
F31 10 A Trailer brake ignition feed.
F32 10 A Interior lighting.
F33 10 A Driver heated seat.
F34 10 A Passenger heated seat.
Exterior mirrors.
F35 5A
Driver door window control switch.
F36 20 A Horn.
SYNC module.
F37 7.5 A
Global positioning system module.
Blower motor relay.
F38 5A Horn relay.
Windshield wiper relay.
Remote keyless entry.
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
F39 7.5 A
Trailer tow backup relay coil.
Parking lamp.
F40 40 A Front blower motor.
F41 40 A Rear blower motor.
Trailer socket.
F43 30 A
Trailer tow module.
F44 60 A Auxiliary power points.
223
Fuses
F45 40 A Trailer tow module.

F47 20 A Cigar lighter socket.
F48 20 A Rear auxiliary power points.
F49 20 A Front auxiliary power points.
Power step.
F51 60 A
Heated seats.
R1 Spare.
R2 Auxiliary power points.
R3 Trailer lamps.
R4 Not used.
R5 Power windows.
R7 Horn.
R8 Trailer tow reversing lamp.
R9 Front blower motor.
R10 Rear blower motor.
Heated rear window.
R11
Heated exterior mirrors.
R12 Heated seats.
R13 Modified vehicle connections.
224
Fuses
Body Control Module
E148830
Fuse
Fuse Number Protected Component
Rating

F3 15 A Ignition switch.
Parking assist control module.
F4 5A
Brake shift interlock.
F5 5A Rain sensor module.
225
Fuses
Fuse
Fuse Number Protected Component
Rating
F6 15 A Windshield washer pump.

F7 7.5 A Exterior mirrors.
F8 - Not used.
F9 10 A Right-hand high beam.
F10 10 A Left-hand high beam.
Right-hand exterior lamps.
F11 25 A
Left-hand headlamp.
F12 - Not used.
Secondary On-Board Diagnostic Control Module A.
F13 15 A
Battery saver.
Direction indicators.
Heated windshield element.
Left-hand exterior lamps.
F15 25 A Right-hand headlamp.
Central high mounted stoplamp.
Audio unit.
F16 20 A
Navigation unit.
Instrument panel cluster.
F17 7.5 A
Auxiliary heater control module.
Headlamp switch.
F18 10 A Steering wheel module.
Stoplamp switch.
F19 5A Front control/display interface module.
F20 5A Ignition passive anti-theft system.
F21 3A Spare.
226
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
E217331
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire. If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
227
Fuses
Callout Fuse Type
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
228
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help

maintain its roadworthiness and resale WARNING: To reduce the risk of
value. There is a large network of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
authorized dealers that are there to help do not start your engine with the air cleaner
you with their professional servicing removed and do not remove it while the
expertise. We believe that their specially engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the
They are supported by a wide range of transmission to park (P).
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle. 2. Block the wheels.
If your vehicle requires professional service,

an authorized dealer can provide the OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. Opening the Hood
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
E175221
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away 1. Pull the hood release lever.
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off

1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
229
Maintenance
E87786
3 4. Open the hood. Support the hood with

the strut.
Closing the Hood

1. Remove the strut from the catch and
secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
E217707 under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
2. Slightly lift the hood. Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
3. Move the catch to the left. closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
230
Maintenance
A B C D E
F
H G
E174603
*
A Air cleaner. See Changing the E Engine coolant reservoir . See
Engine Air Filter (page 255). Engine Coolant Check (page
* 236).
B Engine oil dipstick . See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 233). F Engine compartment fuse box.
*
See Fuses (page 208).
C Engine oil filler cap . See Engine *
G Power steering fluid reservoir .
Oil Check (page 234).
*
See Power Steering Fluid
D Brake and clutch fluid reservoir . Check (page 241).
See Brake Fluid Check (page *
H Washer fluid reservoir . See
241).
Washer Fluid Check (page 242).
*
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
are colored for easy identification.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
231
Maintenance
A B C D
H G F E
E174601
*
A Air cleaner. See Changing the F Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
Engine Air Filter (page 256). Oil Check (page 234).
*
*
Oil Dipstick (page 234). See Power Steering Fluid
* Check (page 241).
C Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake *
Fluid Check (page 241). H Washer fluid reservoir . See
* Washer Fluid Check (page 242).
D Engine coolant reservoir . See *
Engine Coolant Check (page The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
236). are colored for easy identification.
E Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 208).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
232
Maintenance
A B C D
H G F E
E174602
A Air cleaner. See Changing the ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.2L

Engine Air Filter (page 257).
*
POWER STROKE DIESEL
Oil Dipstick (page 234).
C Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake
* A B
Fluid Check (page 241).
*
D Engine coolant reservoir . See
Engine Coolant Check (page
236).
E Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 208). E71362
*
F Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
Oil Check (page 234). A Minimum

* B Maximum
See Power Steering Fluid
Check (page 241).
*
H Washer fluid reservoir . See
Washer Fluid Check (page 242).
*
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
are colored for easy identification.
233
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L 2. Switch off the engine and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
ECOBOOST™ pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
A B a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 305).
Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
E174604
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
A Minimum Note: Do not use oil additives or other
B Maximum engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they could damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
A B Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Only add oil when the

engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10
minutes for the engine to cool down.
WARNING: Do not remove the filler

cap when the engine is running.
E174604 1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.

2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
A Minimum specifications. See Capacities and
B Maximum Specifications (page 305).
3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it until you feel a strong resistance.
ENGINE OIL CHECK Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
ground.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
234
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL Engine Lubrication for Severe

Service Operation
AND OIL FILTER
The following conditions define severe
service operation. The Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor will determine engine oil and oil
WARNING: Prolonged and repeated filter change intervals.
skin contact with mineral oil will result in
the removal of natural fats from the skin, • Frequent or extended idling.
leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. • Frequent low-speed operation at
In addition, used engine oil contains 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
potentially harmful contaminants, which • Frequent severe dust condition
may cause skin cancer. If skin contact operation.
occurs, wash the area thoroughly with
soap or skin cleanser and water • Frequent off-road operation.
immediately. • Sustained ambient temperatures of
-9°F (-23°C) or below.
WARNING: Do not dispose of engine • Sustained ambient temperatures of
oils or oil filters in the household refuse or 100°F (38°C) or above.
the public sewage system. Use an
• Sustained towing operation above
authorized waste disposal facility.
1,000 mi (1,600 km).
WARNING: Do not remove the oil • Sustained high-speed driving at Gross
pan drain plug when the engine is running. Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
WARNING: Do not remove the oil • Sustained use of diesel fuel other than
filter when the engine is running. ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
1. Remove the oil pan drain plug and wait OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
for the oil to drain into a suitable
container.
RESET
2. Renew the oil filter. Only reset the system after changing the
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug. engine oil and oil filter.
4. Refill the engine with new oil that Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
meets Ford specifications. See System
Capacities and Specifications (page
305). 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
Note: Do not add oil further than the engine.
maximum mark. Oil levels above the 2. Fully press the accelerator and brake
maximum mark may cause engine damage. pedals at the same time.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an 3. Keep the accelerator and brake pedals
absorbent cloth immediately. fully pressed.
5. Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor. 4. After three seconds, a message
See Oil Change Indicator Reset appears confirming that the reset is in
(page 235). progress.
235
Maintenance
5. After 25 seconds, a message appears ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

confirming that the reset is complete.
6. Release the accelerator and brake
pedals.
WARNING: Do not remove the
7. Switch the ignition off. coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
ENGINE COOLING FAN - cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
DIESEL prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
WARNING: Keep your hands and injury.
clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
Under certain conditions, the engine windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
cooling fan may continue to run for several the windshield, coolant could make it
minutes after you switch your vehicle off. difficult to see through the windshield.
This could happen in low ambient
temperatures and independent of the WARNING: To reduce the risk of
engine coolant temperature, for example personal injury, make sure the engine is
short journeys or low coolant temperature. cool before unscrewing the coolant
See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 145). pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
ENGINE COOLING FAN - E85/ cap slightly.
GASOLINE
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
WARNING: Keep your hands and
clothing clear of the engine cooling fan. When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
Under certain conditions, the engine the intervals listed in the scheduled
cooling fan may continue to run for several maintenance information. See Scheduled
minutes after you switch your vehicle off. Maintenance (page 459).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
236
Maintenance
Maintain coolant concentration within It is very important to use prediluted

48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze coolant approved to the correct
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F specification in order to avoid plugging the
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be small passageways in the engine cooling
checked using a refractometer. We do not system. See Capacities and
recommend the use of hydrometers or Specifications (page 305). Do not mix
coolant test strips for measuring coolant different colors or types of coolant in your
concentration. vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
Adding Coolant or cooling system components and may
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
WARNING: Do not add engine use the approved concentrated coolant
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
follow this instruction could result in Capacities and Specifications (page 305).
personal injury. Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
WARNING: Do not remove the corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system passageways.
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
cooling system to cool down. Cover the models may not be approved to our
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to specifications and may cause damage to
prevent the possibility of scalding and the cooling system. Resulting component
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow damage may not be covered by the vehicle
this instruction could result in personal Warranty.
injury.
If the coolant level is at or below the
Note: Automotive fluids are not minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
interchangeable. Take care not to put immediately.
engine coolant in the windshield washer To top up the coolant level do the
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in following:
the engine coolant reservoir.
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling escapes as you unscrew the cap.
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine 2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
cooling or heating systems. Resulting the correct specification. See
component damage may not be covered by Capacities and Specifications (page
the vehicle Warranty. 305).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
237
Maintenance
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
reservoir the next few times you drive the coolant. These can be harmful and
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough compromise the corrosion protection of
prediluted engine coolant to bring the the coolant.
coolant level to the correct level.
Recycled Coolant
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your We do not recommend the use of recycled
vehicle checked as soon as possible. coolant as an approved recycling process
Operating an engine with a low level of is not yet available.
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage. Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the community's regulations and standards
coolant may change color from orange to for recycling and disposing of automotive
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is fluids.
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded Severe Climates
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to If you drive in extremely cold climates:
be replaced. • It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant • A coolant concentration of 60%
in order to reach a vehicle service location. provides improved freeze point
In this instance, qualified personnel: protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
1. Must drain the cooling system. protection characteristics of the
2. Chemically clean the coolant system. coolant and may cause engine
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as damage.
possible. If you drive in extremely hot climates:
Water alone, without engine coolant, can • You can decrease the coolant
cause engine damage from corrosion, concentration to 40%.
overheating or freezing. • Coolant concentrations below 40%
Do not use the following as a coolant decrease the freeze and corrosion
substitute: protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
• Alcohol.
damage.
• Methanol.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
• Brine. climates should use prediluted coolant for
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or optimum cooling system and engine
methanol antifreeze. protection.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
238
Maintenance
Coolant Change When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
prediluted coolant approved to the correct during emergencies only. Operate your
specification. See Capacities and vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
Specifications (page 305). necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
Fail-Safe Cooling When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily maintain high-speed operation, and may
drive your vehicle before any incremental completely shut down without warning,
component damage occurs. The fail-safe potentially losing engine power, power
distance depends on ambient steering assist, and power brake assist,
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, WARNING: Do not remove the
the coolant temperature gauge coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
moves toward the red zone: system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
A warning lamp illuminates and coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
a message may appear in the prevent the possibility of scalding and
information display. slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
If the engine reaches a preset injury.
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating Your vehicle has limited engine power
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
acts as an air pump and cools the engine. vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
When this occurs, your vehicle still maintain high-speed operation and the
operates, however: engine may operate poorly.
• Engine power is limited. Remember that the engine is capable of
• The air conditioning system turns off. automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
completely shut down. Your steering and possible and switch the engine off.
braking effort increases in this situation. 2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
When the engine temperature cools, you
that you contact your roadside
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
assistance service provider.
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
239
Maintenance
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant The air conditioning may automatically
level is at or below the minimum mark, turn on and off during severe operating
add prediluted coolant immediately. conditions to protect the engine from
5. When the engine temperature cools, overheating. When the coolant
you can re-start the engine. Have your temperature decreases to the normal
vehicle checked as soon as possible to operating temperature, the air conditioning
minimize engine damage. turns on.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair If the coolant temperature gauge moves
increases the chance of engine damage. fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
Engine Coolant Temperature soon messages appear in your information
Management (If Equipped) display, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
WARNING: To reduce the risk of shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
crash and injury, be prepared that the 2. Leave the engine running until the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle coolant temperature gauge needle
may not be able to accelerate with full returns to the normal position. After
power until the coolant temperature several minutes, if the temperature
reduces. does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
engine may temporarily reach a higher
cool. Check the coolant level.
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long 4. If the coolant level is at or below the
or steep grade in high ambient minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
temperatures. immediately.
At this time, you may notice the coolant 5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
temperature gauge moves toward the red the engine and continue.
zone and a message may appear in the
information display. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You may notice a reduction in vehicle FLUID CHECK
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant The automatic transmission does not have
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this a transmission fluid dipstick.
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The Have an authorized dealer check and
amount of speed reduction depends on change the transmission fluid at the
vehicle loading, grade and ambient correct service interval. See Scheduled
temperature. If this occurs, there is no Maintenance (page 459). Your
need to stop your vehicle. You can transmission does not consume fluid.
continue to drive. However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
240
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental transmission

fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid

other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from E170684

a sealed container. Contamination with
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
dirt, water, petroleum products or other
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
materials may result in brake system
unless you are adding fluid.
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle Only use fluid that meets Ford
control, serious personal injury or death. specifications. See Capacities and
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, POWER STEERING FLUID
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician. CHECK
WARNING: A fluid level between the

MAX and MIN lines is within the normal WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
operating range and there is no need to touch your skin or eyes. This could cause
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal serious personal injury. Rinse the affected
operating range could compromise the areas immediately with plenty of water
performance of the system. Have your and consult a physician.
vehicle checked immediately.
If the power steering fluid level is not
between the MAX and MIN marks, add
power steering fluid that meets the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Adding Power Steering Fluid

1. Remove the filler cap.
241
Maintenance
2. Add power steering fluid to the MAX

mark. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
WASHER FLUID CHECK

When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
capability. For information on fluid dilution,
refer to the product instructions. We
recommend that you only use high quality
washer fluid.
Note: The reservoir supplies the front and
rear washer systems. 2
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER

WATER TRAP - 3.2L POWER
1
STROKE DIESEL E177378
1. Attach a tube to the drain plug and

place the end of the tube into a
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel suitable container.
in the household refuse or the public 2. Loosen the drain plug by turning
sewage system. Use an authorized waste counterclockwise one to two turns and
disposal facility. allow the water to drain.
Note: The drain plug will rise when opening.
Your vehicle is fitted with a diesel fuel
conditioner module located behind the fuel 3. Tighten the drain plug by turning
tank. clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
A warning lamp will illuminate
and a message will be displayed Note: The drain plug will lower when
when approximately 3.38 fl oz closing.
(100 ml) of water accumulates in the When you start the engine the water in fuel
module. If you allow the water level to indicator lamp turns off after a short period
exceed this level, the water may pass of time.
through to the engine and may cause fuel
injection equipment damage. Changing the Fuel Filter
Note: To drain the fuel filter water trap,
Note: To drain the fuel filter, access the
access the underside of your vehicle.
underside of your vehicle.
1. Drain the fuel from the filter housing.
242
Maintenance
3
7
E184430
2 E184789
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Rotate the housing clockwise aligning

3. Rotate the housing counterclockwise the arrows in the lock position.
to the unlock position. 8. Purge air from the system.
4. Remove the housing and filter. Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
5. Replace the housing seal and lubricate. specification. See Fuel and Refueling
(page 131).
6. Insert the new filter into housing and
refit aligning the arrows in the unlock Purging Air From the Fuel System
position.
1. Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
2. Repeat this process six times.
3. Start the engine and maintain engine
speed at 1500 RPM.
4. Wait 20 seconds.
5. If the engine is running smoothly,
reduce the engine speed to idle.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Switch the ignition off.
243
Maintenance
If the Engine Does Not Start or Runs CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
Rough
The battery is under the driver seat.
Note: If you have power seats and the
1 battery has no charge, jump-start your
vehicle to move the seat. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 196).
Removing the Battery
E177379
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap.

2. Attach suitable tool with a tube to the
Schrader valve and place the end of
the tube into a suitable container.
3. Open the Schrader valve. 1
4. Switch the ignition on until a steady E152526
stream of fuel can be seen coming out
of the tube. 1.Fully raise the driver seat and move it
fully forward. Pull the tabs upward and
5. Switch the ignition off.
remove the cover.
6. Remove the tool from the Schrader
Note: Your vehicle may not have this cover.
valve.
7. Refit the Schrader valve cap.
8. Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
9. Repeat this process three times.
10. Start the engine.
FUEL FILTER - GASOLINE 2

Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
E152529
244
Maintenance
2. Unhook the cover and tuck it under the

seat.
E162774
3
7. Remove the battery terminal cover and
remove the negative (-) terminal.
Note: Single batteries could be mounted
E146781 the opposite way around in the battery tray.
The negative terminal is toward the rear of
3. Remove both seat track end caps. your vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle may not have these end
caps.
4. Remove both seat adjustment end
stop bolts at the front of the seat.
6
E162775
E146773
8. Release the retaining clips and remove
5. Remove the battery clamp and cover the cover.
bolts. 9. Remove the cable securing clips from
6. Remove the battery clamp and cover. the cover.
245
Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

the blade to check for roughness.
E162776
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
10. Remove the positive (+) terminal and
cloth.
remove the battery.
Note: Batteries are heavy.
CHANGING THE FRONT WIPER
11. Move the second battery toward the
rear of your vehicle and remove the BLADES
negative (-) terminal.
12. Remove the positive (+) terminal and 2
remove the battery.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Make sure that you 1

securely fasten the seat runner bolts
E72899
before installing the covers.
1. Lift the wiper arm. Press the wiper
You must replace the battery with one of blade locking button.
exactly the same specification.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
To install, reverse the removal procedure. lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that you correctly install 2. Remove the wiper blade.
the battery terminal covers, battery cover
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
and battery cable clips.
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
246
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E199411
Note: There may be an identifying mark on

the lens to help you locate the center of the
bulb.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
E142592 adjusting one headlamp, you may want to
block the light from the other headlamp.
A 8 ft (2.4 m) 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps
B Ground to the center of the and open the hood.
headlamp low beam bulb
C 25 ft (7.6 m)
D Horizontal reference line
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall
or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp low
beam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) E142465
long horizontal reference line on the 4. On the wall or screen you will observe
wall or screen at this height. a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
headlamp beam.
247
Maintenance
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
WARNING: Switch all of the lamps

and the ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
1. Open the hood. See Opening and

Closing the Hood (page 229).
E164485
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each E169198
headlamp. Use a suitable tool, for 2. Remove the screws.

example a screwdriver or hexagonal
socket, to turn the adjuster clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. The
horizontal edge of the brighter light
should touch the horizontal reference
line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

The horizontal aim of the headlamp beam
E169199
on your vehicle is not adjustable.
3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of
your vehicle to disengage it from its
locating points and then lift the
headlamp up.
248
Maintenance
Headlamp
C D
B
A
E169200
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors. E175739
Note: When you install the headlamp, make

sure that you correctly attach the electrical A Parking lamp and direction
connector. indicator lamp.
Note: When you install the headlamp, make B Headlamp high beam.
sure that you correctly engage its locating C Headlamp low beam and
points. daytime running lamp.
D Side marker lamp.
CHANGING A BULB Note: You may have to remove a cover to
gain access to the bulb.
WARNING: Switch all of the lamps Side Marker Lamp

and the ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal 2
injury.
WARNING: Bulbs become hot when

in use. Let them cool down before you
remove them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See

Bulb Specification Chart (page 253). 3
The following instructions describe how to
remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse E175740
order unless otherwise stated.
1. Remove the headlamp. See
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See Removing a Headlamp (page 248).
an authorized dealer.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
249
Maintenance
Parking Lamp and Direction Indicator Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
Lamp the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam
3
3
2
E175741
1. Remove the headlamp. See E175743

4 2
Removing a Headlamp (page 248).
and remove it.
2. Remove the cover.
out. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
Headlamp Low Beam and Daytime 4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Running Lamp
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
E175742
4 3
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
250
Maintenance
Front Clearance Lamp (If Equipped) Side Direction Indicator (If Equipped)
4
1
2
1
E169209
3 5
1. Remove the large mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully up, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the bottom.
2. Remove the small mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully down, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the top.
3. Remove the screws.
2 4. Remove the lamp lens.
5. Remove the bulb.
E181397
Rear Lamps
1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise 2
and remove it.
out.
E175758
1. Remove the screws.

2. Remove the lamp.
251
Maintenance
License Plate Lamp

3
3 1
E175745
E72789
and remove it. 1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
4 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. Pull the bulb straight
A out.
Interior Lamp
B Vehicles with Interior Sensors
2
C
E175746
A Tail and brake lamp.

B Reversing lamp.
C Rear clearance lamp.
1
out.
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp

This is not a serviceable item, see an E154370
authorized dealer if it fails.
1. Carefully remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb.
252
Maintenance
Reading Lamps Vehicles without Interior Sensors
Vehicles with Interior Sensors

2
3
1
2 2 1
E99453

E72786 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
and remove it. Sun Visor Mirror Lamp
E72785
3
E73939 1. Carefully remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb. 2. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
253
Maintenance
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Front side marker lamp. 168 5

Front I.D. lamp. W5W 5
Headlamp low beam and Daytime
H11 55
running lamp.
Headlamp high beam. 9005 60
Front direction indicator. 3457NAK 21
Side direction indicator. W5W 5
Front clearance lamp (Exterior mirror). W5W 5
Brake, rear and direction indicator
3057K 26/6
lamp.
Rear clearance lamp. 168 5
Reversing lamp. 3057K 26
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (watt)
Front interior lamp. W6W 6

Front interior lamp. Vehicles with
Festoon 6
category 1 alarm.
Map lamp. W6W 6
Side door entrance lamp. 211 Festoon 10
Luggage compartment lamp. 211 Festoon 10
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.
254
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER - 3.2L POWER STROKE 1
2
DIESEL

vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

3
element may result in severe engine
E174609
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
air filter element is not used. electrical connector and cable from
Note: After operating the vehicle up to the air filter cover.
200 mi (320 km) in heavy snowfall, we 2. Clean the area around the air tube to
recommend that you open the hood at the air filter cover connection to prevent
earliest opportunity and clear the snow and debris from entering the system and
ice from air filter housing. Do not remove the then loosen the bolt on the air tube
foam filter. clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
The foam filter must be in place to the air tube. It is not necessary to
at all times. completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
E177563
3. Release the clamps that secures the
air filter cover to the air filter housing.
Only use the specified air filter. See
305).
Change the air filter element and foam
3
filler at the proper interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 459).
E177562
255
Maintenance
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.

Remove the air filter element from the 1
air filter housing. 2
5. Install a new air filter element. Make
sure that the groove seal on the
pleated paper filter traps both sides of
the vertical partition of the air box.
6. Replace the air filter housing. Engage
the clamps that secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Make sure that the
3
tabs on the edge are correctly aligned
E174607
into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover 1. Disconnect the intake air temperature
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air sensor electrical connector and cable
tube clamp, but do not overtighten. from the air filter cover.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor 2. Clean the area around the air tube to
electrical connector to the outlet tube. air filter cover connection to prevent
Make sure the locking tab on the debris from entering the system and
connector is in the locked position. then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR completely remove the clamp. Pull the
FILTER - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the air filter housing.
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

damage. The vehicle Warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See E174669
305). 4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
Change the air filter element at the proper air filter housing.
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
5. Install a new air filter element.
(page 459).
256
Maintenance
6. Replace the air filter housing cover.

Engage the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing. Be careful not to crimp the 1
filter element edges between the air
filter housing and cover. Make sure
that the tabs on the edge are correctly
aligned into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the intake air temperature
sensor electrical connector to the 2
outlet tube. Make sure the locking tab
on the connector is in the locked E174608
position.
1. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR debris from entering the system and
FILTER - 3.7L then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
WARNING: To reduce the risk of air tube off from the air filter cover.
do not start your engine with the air cleaner 2. Release the clamps that secure the air
removed and do not remove it while the filter cover to the air filter housing.
engine is running.

damage. The vehicle Warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See
305).
Change the air filter element at the proper
E174669
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 459). 3. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Install a new air filter element.
257
Maintenance
5. Replace the air filter housing cover. that the tabs on the edge are correctly
Engage the clamps that secure the air aligned into the slots.
filter housing cover to the air filter 6. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
housing. Be careful not to crimp the and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
filter element edges between the air tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
filter housing and cover. Make sure
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
E251183
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L ECOBOOST™/3.7L
258
Maintenance
E251184
A Drives the air conditioning

compressor and has one idler
pulley.
B Drives the water pump and the
alternator and has one idler
pulley.
259
Vehicle Care
CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results, use the following products

or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (U.S.) -

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover / Dissolvant de
goudron et éliminateur d’insectes Motorcraft®
(Canada)
ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner /
Nettoyant pour métal brillant Motorcraft® (Canada)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (U.S.) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Detail Wash / Shampooing superfin
Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
(Canada)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
(U.S.) -
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo / Shampooing pour
moteur Motorcraft® (Canada)
CXC-66-A (Canada)
(U.S.) -
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner / Nettoyant
multi-usage Motorcraft® (Canada)
CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A
trate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & -
Upholstery Cleaner (U.S.)
260
Vehicle Care
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet &

Upholstery Cleaner / Nettoyant professionnel pour
sellerie et moquette Motorcraft® (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.) -
(Canada)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner / Nettoie-vitres
de qualité supérieure Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (U.S.) -
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner / Nettoyant
pour roues et pneus Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
Cleaning the Headlamps

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
We recommend that you wash your vehicle
chemical solvents to clean them.
with a sponge and lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo. Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing
cycle, make sure that you remove the wax Cleaning the Rear Window
from the windshield and the wiper blades.
Note: Before using a car wash, check that Note: Do not scrape the inside of the rear
it is suitable for your vehicle. window or use abrasives or chemical
solvents to clean it.
Note: Some car washes use water at high
pressure. Due to this, water droplets may Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp
enter inside your vehicle and could also chamois leather to clean the inside of the
damage certain parts of your vehicle. rear window.
Note: Remove the aerial before using an Cleaning the Chrome Trim
automatic car wash.
Note: Do not use abrasives or chemical
Note: Switch the blower motor off to solvents to clean the chrome trim. Use
prevent contamination of the cabin air filter. soapy water.
Use a soft clean cloth to dry the chrome
trim.
261
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hot When washing and waxing, park your
surfaces and do not leave cleaning product vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
on chrome surfaces for a period of time sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
exceeding that which is recommended. applying wax.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) • Use a quality wax that does not contain
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause abrasives.
damage over a period of time. • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Body Paintwork Preservation
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
We recommend that you wax the back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
paintwork once or twice a year. • Do not allow wax to come in contact
Note: Do not apply polish in strong sunlight with any non-body (low-gloss black)
as this dries the polish too quickly. colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
Note: Do not allow polish to come in
contact with plastic surfaces as it can be • Roof racks.
difficult to remove. • Bumpers.
Note: Do not apply polish to the windshield • Grained door handles.
or rear window. A contaminated windshield • Side moldings.
or contaminated wiper blades may lead to
increased wiper noise, reduced wipe quality • Mirror housings.
or reduced rain sensor performance. • Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
Sliding Door Tracks (If Equipped)
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
WARNING: Do not open or close the
sliding doors when your hands are near the
tracks or rollers. CLEANING THE ENGINE
To clean the sliding door tracks, wipe the Engines are more efficient when they are
surface using a clean, cotton cloth with a clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
mild soap and water solution. the engine warmer than normal.
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure When washing:
washer. • Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
WAXING and cause damage.
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your • Do not spray a hot engine with cold
car's paint from the elements. We water to avoid cracking the engine
recommend that you wash and wax the block or other engine components.
painted surface once or twice a year.
262
Vehicle Care
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Note: Do not use razor blades or other
Degreaser on all parts that require sharp objects to clean or remove decals
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In from the inside of the heated rear window.
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine The vehicle warranty does not cover
Shampoo. damage caused to the heated rear window
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it grid lines.
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage. CLEANING THE INTERIOR
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
the area in and around these locations. sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
• Cover the battery, power distribution spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
box, and air filter assembly to prevent may not be covered by your warranty.
water damage when cleaning the Note: Do not use household cleaning
engine. products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES Note: We recommend distilled water when
cleaning.
Car wash chemicals and environmental Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats,
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
Headliners and Floor Mats
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper Note: Avoid soaking any surface. Do not
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper use excessive amounts of water to clean
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper the vehicle interior.
performance.
Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: the entire surface.
• Clean the windshield with a To clean:
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield, • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the vacuum cleaner or brush.
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
any glass cleaner off these surfaces cloth and a mild soap and water
immediately. solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
• For windshields contaminated with cloth.
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
the entire windshield using steel wool cleaning, clean the entire area
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a immediately, but do not soak or the
circular motion and rinse with water. ring will set.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
263
Vehicle Care
Seatbelts To clean:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's cloth and a mild soap and water
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
the belt webbing. cloth.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
WARNING: On vehicles equipped cleaning, clean the entire area
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use immediately, but do not soak or the
chemical solvents or strong detergents. ring will set.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD
the side airbag in a crash. Screens and Radio Screens
Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents to clean them. solvents or chemical solvents to clean the
instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or
Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate radio screens. These cleaning products can
the seatbelt retractor mechanism. damage the screens.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using Clean the instrument panel and cluster
mild soap and water. Let them dry lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
naturally, away from artificial heat. then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
Leather Interior (If Equipped)
Do not spray any liquid directly onto the
Follow the same procedure as cleaning screens.
leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean the
surfaces. bezel around the display screens as it could
damage the surface.
Suede Micro Fiber Fabric (If Equipped)
Rear Windows
Note: Do not steam clean.
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to
Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean clean the interior of the rear windows.
the entire surface.
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
Do not use the following products: interior of the rear windows.
• Leather care products.
Storage Compartments, Cup
• Household cleaners. Holders and Ashtrays
• Alcoholic solutions.
To clean:
• Spot removers.
• Take out any removable inserts.
• Shoe polish.
• Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
264
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

soft cloth as quickly as possible.
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
CLUSTER LENS Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
WARNING: Do not use chemical or stain remover on an inconspicuous
solvents or strong detergents when area.
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
system. water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
Note: Follow the same procedure as 4. If necessary, apply more soap and
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather water solution or cleaning product to
instrument panels and leather interior trim a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
surfaces. soiled area. Allow this to set at room
Clean the instrument panel and cluster temperature for 30 minutes.
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, 5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
these areas. motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase area.
the gloss of the upper portion of the 6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
• Do not use any household cleaning DAMAGE
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
instrument panel, interior trim and match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
cluster lens. color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
color code to your authorized dealer to
have been in contact with certain
make sure you get the correct color.
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage Before repairing minor paint damage, use
to the interior painted surfaces. a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand Remover to remove particles such as bird
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Your warranty may not cover these Always read the instructions before using
damages. cleaning products.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
265
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE WHEELS General

• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
place.
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if • Protect from sunlight, if possible.
available. • If vehicles are stored outside, they
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a require regular maintenance to protect
sponge. against rust and damage.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and Body
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
if available. remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
after cleaning. and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an stored in exposed locations.
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
a few minutes before doing so. This prevent rust.
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
discs, brake pads and linings. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Note: Some car washes could damage
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
wheel rims and covers.
compartment hinges and latches with
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, a light grade oil.
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers. • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
VEHICLE STORAGE Engine
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 • Change the engine oil and filter prior to
days or more, read the following storage because used engine oil
maintenance recommendations to make contains contaminates which may
sure your vehicle stays in good operating cause engine damage.
condition. • Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
with the climate controls set to defrost
and their components for reliable, regular
until the engine reaches normal
driving. Under various conditions,
operating temperature.
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
266
Vehicle Care
• With your foot on the brake, shift Miscellaneous

through all the gears while the engine
is running. • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
• We recommend that you change the with grease to prevent rust.
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again. • Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
Fuel system and prevent corrosion.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel Removing Vehicle From Storage
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle. When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
Cooling system • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
surfaces.
• When removing your vehicle from
• Check windshield wipers for any
storage, check coolant fluid level.
deterioration.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the • Check under the hood for any foreign
recommended level. material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
Battery nests.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep • Check the exhaust for any foreign
connections clean. material that may have collected
during storage.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, • Check tire pressures and set tire
we recommend that you disconnect inflation per the Tire Label.
the battery cables to maintain battery • Check brake pedal operation. Drive
charge for quick starting. your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected. • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
Brakes leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully. • If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
Tires damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
• Maintain recommended air pressure. any concerns or issues.
267
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION How Your Vehicle Differs from

Other Vehicles
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can
Truck Owners differ from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a

significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires properly inflated,
never overload or improperly load your
vehicle, and make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an

unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
E145299
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle

differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
268
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying TIRE CARE

capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grades
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires.
The tire Quality Grades can be
found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
E166373
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
As a result of the above dimensional in Title 49 Code of Federal
differences, sport-utility vehicles, vans and Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center Tire Quality Grades are
of gravity between the loaded and determined by standards that the
unloaded condition. United States Department of
These differences that make your vehicle Transportation has set.
so versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
269
Wheels and Tires
United States Department of The traction grades, from highest

Transportation Tire Quality to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
Grades grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
The United States of America measured under controlled
Department of Transportation conditions on specified
requires Ford Motor Company to government test surfaces of
give you the following information asphalt and concrete. A tire
about tire grades exactly as the marked C may have poor traction
government has written it. performance.
Treadwear Temperature A B C
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested WARNING: The temperature
under controlled conditions on a grade for this tire is established for
specified government test course. a tire that is properly inflated and
For example, a tire graded 150 not overloaded. Excessive speed,
would wear 1½ times as well on underinflation, or excessive
the government course as a tire loading, either separately or in
graded 100. The relative combination, can cause heat
performance of tires depends buildup and possible tire failure.
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart The temperature grades are A
significantly from the norm due to (the highest), B and C,
variations in driving habits, service representing the tire’s resistance
practices, and differences in road to the generation of heat and its
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
Traction AA A B C on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
WARNING: The traction material of the tire to degenerate
grade assigned to this tire is based and reduce tire life, and excessive
on straight-ahead braking traction temperature can lead to sudden
tests, and does not include tire failure. The grade C
acceleration, cornering, corresponds to a level of
hydroplaning or peak traction performance which all passenger
characteristics. car tires must meet under the
270
Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety • bar Metric unit of atmospheric

Standard No. 139. Grades B and A pressure.
represent higher levels of • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit
performance on the laboratory of air pressure.
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
Glossary of Tire Terminology • Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
• Tire label: A label showing the been stationary and out of
OE (Original Equipment) tire direct sunlight for an hour or
sizes, recommended inflation more and prior to the vehicle
pressure and the maximum being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
weight the vehicle can carry.
• Recommended inflation
• Tire Identification Number pressure: The cold inflation
(TIN): A number on the pressure found on the Safety
sidewall of each tire providing Compliance Certification Label
information about the tire (affixed to either the door hinge
brand and manufacturing pillar, door-latch post, or the
plant, tire size and date of door edge that meets the
manufacture. Also referred to door-latch post, next to the
as DOT code. driver seating position) or Tire
• Inflation pressure: A measure Label located on the B-Pillar or
of the amount of air in a tire. the edge of the driver door.
• Standard load: A class of • B-pillar: The structural
P-metric or Metric tires member at the side of the
designed to carry a maximum vehicle behind the front door.
load at set pressure. For • Bead area of the tire: Area of
example: for P-metric tires the tire next to the rim.
35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric
tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing • Sidewall of the tire: Area
the inflation pressure beyond between the bead area and the
this pressure will not increase tread.
the tire capability. • Tread area of the tire: Area of
• Extra load: A class of P-metric the perimeter of the tire that
or Metric tires designed to carry contacts the road when
a heavier maximum load at mounted on the vehicle.
42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the • Rim: The metal support
inflation pressure beyond this (wheel) for a tire or a tire and
pressure will not increase the tube assembly upon which the
tire’s load carrying capability. tire beads are seated.
271
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the

E
Tire Sidewall C D F
United States of America, and G
B
Canada Federal regulations H
require tire manufacturers to place A
standardized information on the I
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a United States of M J
America DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
L
P Type Tires K
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed A P: Indicates a tire,
rating. The definitions of these designated by the Tire
items are listed below. and Rim Association, that
Note: Tire size, load index and may be used for service on
speed rating for your vehicle may cars, sport utility vehicles,
be different from the following minivans and light trucks.
example. B 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in
millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C 65: Indicates the aspect
ratio which gives the tire's
ratio of height to width.
D R: Indicates a radial type
tire.
272
Wheels and Tires
E 15: Indicates the wheel or H United States of

rim diameter in inches. If America DOT Tire
you change the wheel Identification Number
size, you will have to (TIN): This begins with
purchase new tires to the letters DOT and
match the new wheel indicates that the tire
diameter. meets all federal
F 95: Indicates the tire's standards. The next two
load index. It is an index numbers or letters are the
that relates to how much plant code designating
weight a tire can carry. where it was
You may find this manufactured, the next
information in the Owner’s two are the tire size code
Guide. If not, contact a and the last four numbers
local tire dealer. represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
G H: Indicates the tire's example, the numbers 317
speed rating. The speed mean the 31st week of
rating denotes the speed 1997. After 2000 the
at which a tire is designed numbers go to four digits.
to be driven for extended For example, 2501 means
periods of time under a the 25th week of 2001.
standard condition of load The numbers in between
and inflation pressure. are identification codes
The tires on your vehicle used for traceability. This
may operate at different information is used to
conditions for load and contact customers if a tire
inflation pressure. These defect requires a recall.
speed ratings may need
to be adjusted for the I M+S or M/S: Mud and
difference in conditions. Snow, AT: All Terrain, AS:
The ratings range from 81 All Season.
mph (130 kph) to 186 mph J Tire Ply Composition
(299 kph). These ratings and Material Used:
are listed in the following Indicates the number of
chart. plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire
273
Wheels and Tires
manufacturers also must as measured under

indicate the ply materials controlled conditions on
in the tire and the specified government test
sidewall, which include surfaces of asphalt and
steel, nylon, polyester, concrete. A tire marked C
and others. may have poor traction
K Maximum Load: performance.
Indicates the maximum Temperature: The
load in kilograms and temperature grades are A
pounds that can be (the highest), B and C,
carried by the tire. Refer to representing the tire's
the Safety Compliance resistance to the
Certification Label generation of heat and its
(affixed to either the door ability to dissipate heat
hinge pillar, door-latch when tested under
post, or the door edge controlled conditions on
that meets the door-latch a specified indoor
post, next to the driver laboratory test wheel.
seating position), for the M Maximum Inflation
correct tire pressure for Pressure: Indicates the
your vehicle. tire manufacturer's
L Treadwear, Traction maximum permissible
and Temperature pressure or the pressure
Grades:Treadwear The at which the maximum
treadwear grade is a load can be carried by the
comparative rating based tire. This pressure is
on the wear rate of the tire normally higher than the
when tested under manufacturer's
controlled conditions on recommended cold
a specified government inflation pressure, which
test course. For example, can be found on the
a tire graded 150 would Safety Compliance
wear one and one-half Certification Label
times as well on the (affixed to either the door
government course as a hinge pillar, door-latch
tire graded 100. Traction: post, or the door edge
The traction grades, from that meets the door-latch
highest to lowest are AA, post, next to the driver
A, B, and C. The grades seating position), or Tire
represent the tire's ability Label which is located on
to stop on wet pavement the B-Pillar or the edge of
274
Wheels and Tires
the driver door. The cold Note: If the tire size does not begin
inflation pressure should with a letter, this may mean it is
never be set lower than designated by either ETRTO
the recommended (European Tire and Rim Technical
pressure on the vehicle Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
label. Manufacturing Association). You
may not find this information on all
tires because it is not required by
Tire speed ratings federal law.
Letter mph ( km/h) Note: The tire suppliers may have
rating additional markings, notes or
warnings, for example standard
M 81 mph (130 km/h) load, radial tubeless, etc.
N 87 mph (140 km/h) T Type Tires
Q 99 mph (159 km/h) T145/80D16 is an example of a
R 106 mph (171 km/h) tire size. T type tires have some
additional information beyond
S 112 mph (180 km/h) those of P type tires. The
T 118 mph (190 km/h) definitions of these items are
listed below.
U 124 mph (200 km/h) Note: The temporary tire size for
H 130 mph (210 km/h) your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
V 149 mph (240 km/h) do not apply to this type of tire.
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
275
Wheels and Tires
C 80: Indicates the aspect

ratio which gives the tire's
C ratio of height to width.
B D Numbers of 70 or lower
A E indicate a short sidewall.
D D: Indicates a diagonal
type tire. R: Indicates a
radial type tire.
E 16: Indicates the wheel or
rim diameter in inches. If
you change the wheel
size, you will have to
purchase new tires to
match the new wheel
diameter.
Additional Information for LT

Type Tires
LT235/85 R16 is an example of a
tire size. LT type tires have some
E142545 additional information beyond
those of P type tires. The
A T: Indicates a type of tire, definitions of these items are
designated by the Tire listed below.
and Rim Association, that Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
is intended for temporary apply to this type of tire.
service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks.
B 145: Indicates the
nominal width of the tire
in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the
tire.
276
Wheels and Tires
B C Maximum Load Dual lb

C (kg) at psi (kPa) cold:
Indicates the maximum
A load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a
dual, defined as four tires
on the rear axle (a total of
six or more tires on the
vehicle).
D Maximum Load Single
lb (kg) at psi (kPa)
cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is
used as a single, defined
D as two tires (total) on the
E142544
B rear axle.
A LT: Indicates a tire, Additional Information for
designated by the Tire ETRTO Euro-Metric
and Rim Association Commercial Vehicle Tires
(T&RA), that is intended
for service on light trucks. Euro-metric commercial vehicle
B Load Range and Load tires end in the letter "C" (for
Inflation Limits: example, 235/65R16C). The "C"
Indicates the tire's does not signify the tire's Load
load-carrying capabilities Range like the T&RA LT tire
and its inflation limits. dimension (for example,
LT245/75R17E).
Tire Load Capacities are identified
by the Single/Dual Load indexes
that follow the tire size on the
tire's sidewall (for example,
235/65R16C 121/119).
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
277
Wheels and Tires
United States of America DOT Location of the Tire Label

Tire Identification Number
(TIN) You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
United States of America, and by tire size and other important
Canada Federal regulations information located on the B-Pillar
require tire manufacturers to place or the edge of the driver's door.
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This Inflating the Tires
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also WARNING: Under-inflation
provides a United States of is the most common cause of tire
America DOT Tire Identification failures and may result in severe
Number for safety standard tire cracking, tread separation or
certification and in case of a recall. blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
This begins with the letters DOT of injury. Under-inflation increases
and indicates that the tire meets sidewall flexing and rolling
all federal standards. The next resistance, resulting in heat
two numbers or letters are the buildup and internal damage to
plant code designating where it the tire. It also may result in
was manufactured, the next two unnecessary tire stress, irregular
are the tire size code and the last wear, loss of vehicle control and
four numbers represent the week accidents. A tire can lose up to
and year the tire was built. For half of its air pressure and not
example, the numbers 317 mean appear to be flat!
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For Safe operation of your vehicle
example, 2501 means the 25th requires that the tires are correctly
week of 2001. The numbers in inflated.
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This Every day before you drive, check
information is used to contact the tires. If one looks lower than
customers if a tire defect requires the others, use a tire gauge to
a recall. check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips inspect each tire
including the spare tire. Check the
tire pressure with a tire pressure
gauge. Inflate all tires to the
correct inflation pressure.
278
Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
reliable tire pressure gauge, as to change the ride characteristics
automatic service station gauges of your vehicle. If you do not
may be inaccurate. We maintain the tire pressures as
recommend the use of a digital or specified by Ford, your vehicle may
dial-type tire pressure gauge experience a condition known as
rather than a stick-type tire shimmy. This will cause severe
pressure gauge. vibration and oscillations in the
steering wheel when your vehicle
Use the recommended cold travels over a bump or dip in the
inflation pressure for optimum tire road and is unable to dampen out
performance and wear. by itself. Significantly
Under-inflation or over-inflation under-inflated tires, incorrect tire
may cause uneven treadwear usage or any vehicle modifications
patterns. such as lift-kits can cause your
Always inflate the tires to the vehicle to shimmy. If your vehicle
recommended inflation pressure begins to shimmy, slowly reduce
even if it is less than the maximum the speed of your vehicle by
inflation pressure information pressing the brake pedal or
found on the tire. The releasing the accelerator pedal. As
recommended tire inflation your vehicle speed reduces the
pressure is found on the Safety shimmy will cease.
Compliance Certification Label The maximum inflation pressure
(affixed to either the door hinge is the tire manufacturer's
pillar, door-latch post, or the door maximum permissible pressure or
edge that meets the door-latch the pressure at which the
post, next to the driver seating maximum load can be carried by
position), or Tire Label which is the tire. This pressure is normally
located on the B-Pillar or the edge higher than the manufacturer’s
of the driver door. Failure to follow recommended cold inflation
the tire pressure pressure, which can be found on
recommendations can cause the Safety Compliance
uneven treadwear patterns and Certification Label (affixed to
adversely affect the way your either the door hinge pillar,
vehicle handles door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
279
Wheels and Tires
of the driver door. The cold Note: If you are checking tire
inflation pressure should never be pressure when the tire is hot, for
set lower than the recommended example you have driven more than
pressure on the Safety 1.0 mi (1.6 km), never bleed or
Compliance Certification Label or reduce tire pressure. The tires are
Tire Label. hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
When weather temperature recommended cold pressures. A
changes occur, tire inflation hot tire at or below recommended
pressures also change. A 10°F cold inflation pressure could be
(6°C) temperature drop can significantly under-inflated.
cause a corresponding drop of
1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Note: If you have to drive a
Check the tire pressures frequently distance to get air for the tires,
and adjust them to the correct check and record the tire pressure
pressure which can be found on first and add the appropriate air
the Safety Compliance pressure when you get to the
Certification Label or Tire Label. pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the tire pressure to increase
To check the tire pressures: as you drive.
1. Make sure the tires are cool, Note: If you over inflate the tire,
meaning they are not hot from release air by pressing on the metal
driving even a mile. stem in the center of the valve.
2. Remove the cap from the valve Then recheck the pressure with
on one tire, then firmly press your tire gauge.
the tire gauge onto the valve
and measure the tire pressure. Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
3. Add enough air to reach the other tires. For T-type mini-spare
recommended tire pressure. tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
4. Replace the valve cap. wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
5. Repeat this procedure for each and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
tire, including the spare. For full-size and dissimilar spare
6. Visually inspect the tires to tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
make sure there are no nails or wheel and tire assembly
other objects embedded that information for a description. Store
could poke a hole in the tire and maintain at the higher of the
and cause an air leak. front and rear inflation pressure as
7. Check the sidewalls to make shown on the Tire Label.
sure there are no gouges, cuts
or bulges.
280
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel Tire Wear

Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects, for example
stones, nails or glass that may be
wedged in the tread grooves.
Check the tire and valve stems for
holes, cracks, or cuts that may
permit air leakage and repair or
replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire E142546
sidewalls for cracking, cuts,
bruises and other signs of damage When the tread is worn down to
or excessive wear. If internal 0.08 in (2 mm), tires must be
damage to the tire is suspected, replaced to help prevent your
have the tire removed and vehicle from skidding and
inspected in case it needs to be hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
repaired or replaced. For your indicators, or wear bars, which
safety, tires that are damaged or look like narrow strips of smooth
show signs of excessive wear rubber across the tread will
should not be used because they appear on the tire when the tread
are more likely to blow out or fail. is worn down to 0.08 in (2 mm).
Incorrect or inadequate vehicle When the tire tread wears down
maintenance can cause tires to to the same height as these wear
wear abnormally. Inspect all the bars, the tire is worn out and must
tires, including the spare, be replaced.
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following Tire Damage
conditions exist: Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage, for
example bulges in the tread or
sidewalls, cracks in the tread
groove or separation in the tread
or sidewall. If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
281
Wheels and Tires
Tire Age hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the

door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
WARNING: Tires degrade driver's seating position), or the
over time depending on many Tire Label which is located on the
factors such as weather, storage B-Pillar or edge of the driver's
conditions, and conditions of use door. If this information is not
(load, speed, inflation pressure) found on these labels, then you
the tires experience throughout should contact your authorized
their lives. dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not
WARNING: In general, tires recommended by Ford can affect
should be replaced after six years the safety and performance of
regardless of tread wear. your vehicle, which could result in
However, heat caused by hot an increased risk of loss of vehicle
climates or frequent high loading control, vehicle rollover, personal
conditions can accelerate the injury and death.
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more WARNING: Always inflate
frequently. steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
WARNING: You should standing at a minimum of 12 ft
replace your spare tire when you (3.66 m) away from the wheel
replace the road tires or after six and tire assembly.
years due to aging even if it has
not been used. Your vehicle is fitted with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
Tire Replacement and handling capability.
Requirements
We recommend that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
WARNING: Only use replaced as a pair.
replacement tires and wheels that Note: The wheel valve stems must
are the same size, load index, also be replaced when the road
speed rating and type (such as tires are replaced on your vehicle.
P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
282
Wheels and Tires
Fitting Replacement Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the The use of wheels or tires not

risk of serious injury, when recommended by Ford Motor
mounting replacement tires and Company may affect the
wheels, you should not exceed the operation of the tire pressure
maximum pressure indicated on monitoring system. If the tire
the sidewall of the tire to set the pressure monitoring system
beads without additional indicator is flashing, the tire
precautions listed below. If the pressure monitoring system is
beads do not seat at the malfunctioning. The replacement
maximum pressure indicated, tire might be incompatible with
re-lubricate and try again. the tire pressure monitoring
system, or a component of the tire
WARNING: When inflating pressure monitoring system may
the tire for mounting pressures up be damaged. See Tire Pressure
to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than Monitoring System (page 287).
the maximum pressure on the tire The tire pressure sensors mounted
sidewall, the following in the wheels (originally installed
precautions must be taken to on your vehicle) are not designed
protect the person mounting the to be used in aftermarket wheels.
tire:
Tire Safety Practices
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and WARNING: If your vehicle is
wheel bead seat area again. stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
(3.66 m) away from the wheel tires can tear the tire and cause
and tire assembly. an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
283
Wheels and Tires
replace it with the spare tire and

WARNING: Do not spin the wheel. If you cannot detect a
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). cause, have the vehicle towed to
The tires may fail and injure a the nearest repair facility or tire
passenger or bystander. dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Driving habits have a great deal to Tire and Wheel Alignment
do with your tire mileage and
safety: A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
• Observe posted speed limits. pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
• Avoid fast starts, stops and misaligned or cause damage to
turns. the tires. If your vehicle seems to
• Avoid potholes and objects on pull to one side when you are
the road. driving, the wheels may be out of
• Do not run over curbs or hit the alignment. Have an authorized
tire against a curb when dealer check the wheel alignment
parking. periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
Highway Hazards or the rear can cause uneven and
No matter how carefully you drive rapid treadwear of the tires and
there is always the possibility that should be corrected by an
you may eventually have a flat tire authorized dealer. Front-wheel
on the highway. Drive slowly to the drive vehicles and those with an
closest safe area out of traffic. independent rear suspension may
This may further damage the flat require alignment of all four
tire, but your safety is more wheels.
important. The tires should also be balanced
If you feel a sudden vibration or periodically. An unbalanced tire
ride disturbance while driving, or and wheel assembly may result in
you suspect a tire or your vehicle irregular tire wear.
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
284
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation Note: Your vehicle may have a

dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
WARNING: If the tire label and tire assembly is defined as a
shows different tire pressures for spare wheel and tire assembly that
the front and rear tires and the is different in brand, size or
vehicle has a tire pressure appearance from the road tires and
monitoring system, then you need wheels. If you have a dissimilar
to update the settings for the spare wheel and tire assembly it is
system sensors. Always perform intended for temporary use only
the system reset procedure after and should not be used in a tire
tire rotation. If you do not reset the rotation.
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when Rear-wheel drive and
necessary. See Tire Pressure four-wheel drive vehicles with
Monitoring System (page 287). single rear wheels (front tires
at left of diagram).
Rotating the tires at the
recommended interval detailed in
the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter will help the tires wear
more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: After rotating the tires the
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle E142548
requirements.
Note: If the tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
285
Wheels and Tires
Rear-wheel drive and Your vehicle has all-season tires that are
four-wheel drive vehicles with optimized for use in all weather conditions.
dual rear wheels. As the seasons change you may choose to
use winter tires or snow tires. Winter tires
and snow tires are available to purchase
from an authorized dealer.
We recommend that you use winter tires
when the temperature is 45°F (7°C) or
lower, or in snow and ice conditions.
If you use winter tires or snow tires, inflate
them to the recommended tire pressures
listed on the tire information label. The
label is on the driver side B-pillar.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the

same size, load index and speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels can cause steering,
E166988 suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
USING WINTER TIRES on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
WARNING: If you choose to install latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
the same size, construction, and load range driver door. Failure to follow the tire
as the original tires listed on the tire pressure recommendations can cause
placard, and they must be installed on all uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
four wheels. Mixing tires of different size affect the way your vehicle handles.
or construction on your vehicle can
adversely affect your vehicle's handling
and braking, and may lead to loss of
vehicle control.
286
Wheels and Tires
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or

the maximum speed recommended by
WARNING: If you choose to install the snow chains or cables
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be manufacturer, whichever is less.
the same size, construction, and load range
as the original tires listed on the tire • Purchase snow chains or cables from
placard, and they must be installed on all a manufacturer that clearly labels the
four wheels. Mixing tires of different size body to tire dimension restrictions.
or construction on your vehicle can • Remove the snow chains or cables
adversely affect your vehicle's handling when they are no longer needed.
and braking, and may lead to loss of • Do not use snow chains or cables on
vehicle control. dry roads.
• If you have any questions regarding
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to snow chains or cables, see an
specified tires. authorized dealer.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
However, in some climates, you may need SYSTEM (If Equipped)
to use snow tires, snow chains or cables.
If you use snow chains or cables, we
recommended that steel wheels of the
same size and specifications are used, WARNING: The tire pressure
snow chains or cables may damage alloy monitoring system is not a substitute for
wheels. manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
Follow these guidelines when using snow using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
chains or cables: maintain tire pressures could increase the
• Avoid fully loading your vehicle. risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
• Only certain snow chains or cables rollover and personal injury.
have been approved by Ford as safe
for use on vehicles with either 235/65 WARNING: Do not use tire sealants
R16C or 195/75 R16C tires. as they may damage the tire pressure
monitoring system.
• Snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.
WARNING: If the tire pressure
• Do not use snow chains or cables on monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
dual rear alloy wheels. not function.
• Install snow chains or cables securely,
make sure they do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Use only SAE Class S snow chains,
snow cables or equivalent that
measure 0.4 in (10 mm) or less in
dimension as measured on the sidewall
of the tire.
287
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if When the malfunction indicator is
provided), should be checked illuminated, the system may not be able
monthly when cold and inflated to detect or signal low tire pressure as
to the inflation pressure recommended by intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle for a variety of reasons, including the
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If installation of replacement or alternate
your vehicle has tires of a different size tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS from functioning properly.
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Always check the TPMS malfunction
should determine the proper tire inflation telltale after replacing one or more tires or
pressure for those tires). wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
As an added safety feature, your vehicle allow the TPMS to continue to function
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure properly.
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale This device complies with Part 15 of the
when one or more of your tires is FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
when the low tire pressure telltale is subject to the following two conditions:
illuminates, you should stop and check • This device may not cause harmful
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate interference.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a • This device must accept any
significantly under-inflated tire causes the interference received, including
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. interference that may cause undesired
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency operation.
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a WARNING: Changes or
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and modifications not expressively approved
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain by the party responsible for compliance
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation could void the user's authority to operate
has not reached the level to trigger the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure radio certification number only signifies
telltale. that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
288
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire The tire pressure monitoring system

Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 268). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer's recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
E142549
When the Temporary Spare Tire is
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire Installed
pressure sensor located inside the wheel If one of the road wheels and tire needs to
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure be replaced with the temporary spare
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The wheel and tire, the system will continue to
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is identify a defect. This is to remind you that
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take the damaged road wheel and tire must be
care when changing the tire to avoid repaired and refitted to your vehicle.
damaging the sensor.
To restore the correct operation of the
You should always have your tires serviced system, you must have the repaired road
by an authorized dealer. wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
Check the tire pressure periodically (at vehicle. For additional information, see
least monthly) using an accurate tire Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
gauge. See When Inflating the Tires in Monitoring System in this section.
this chapter.
When You Believe the System is Not
Understanding the Tire Pressure Operating Correctly
Monitoring System
The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
concerning the system:
E250820
289
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure

Possible cause Customer action required
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-

sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
Tire(s) under-inflated as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
Flashing warning see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
light is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating the tires (for example; at a

When Inflating the Tires gas station), the system may not respond
immediately to the air added to the tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
WARNING: Do not use the tire over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
pressure displayed in the information off after you have filled your tires to the
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to recommended inflation pressure.
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
290
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects the Tire Overview

Pressures
While driving in a normal manner, tire
pressures may increase up to 4 psi WARNING: To determine the
(30 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
vehicle is stationary overnight and the the Safety Compliance Certification Label
temperature significantly lower than the (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post
daytime temperature, tire pressures may or the door edge that meets the door-latch
decrease up to 3 psi (20 kPa) for a drop of post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
lower pressure value will be detected by driver door.
the system as being significantly lower
than the correct inflation pressure and the To maintain your vehicle’s load carrying
warning light will illuminate. capability, this vehicle requires different
tire pressures in the front tires compared
If the warning light is on: to the rear tires. The system on your vehicle
• Check each tire to verify that none are is designed to illuminate the warning light
flat. at different pressures for the front and rear
• If one or more tires are flat, repair as tires.
necessary. The tires need to be periodically rotated
• Check the tire pressures and Inflate all to provide consistent performance and
the tires to the correct pressure. maximum tire life, the system needs to
know when the tires have been rotated to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System determine which set of tires are on the
Reset Procedure front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn
Carry out the tire pressure monitoring of low tire pressures.
system reset procedure after:
System Reset Tips:
• Every tire rotation.
• To reduce the chance of interference
• Each tire replacement, only when the from another vehicle, the system reset
sensor stays the same and does not procedure should be carried out at
change. least three feet (one meter) away from
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system another Ford vehicle undergoing the
reset procedure will not work with a new system reset procedure.
sensor until an authorized dealer programs • Do not wait more than two minutes
the new sensor. between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels. A double horn chirp
indicates the need to repeat the
procedure.
Carrying Out the System Reset

Procedure
Read the entire procedure before carrying
out a system reset.
291
Wheels and Tires
1. Drive your vehicle above 20 mph 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes and stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
then park in a safe location where you air pressure until the horn chirps.
can easily get to all four tires and have Training is complete when the horn
access to a tire inflation pump. chirps after the last system sensor (left
2. Switch the ignition off. rear) has been trained and the system
indicator stops flashing.
3. Switch the ignition on with the engine
off. 10. Switch the ignition off. If two short
horn chirps are heard, the reset
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off procedure was unsuccessful and
three times, this must be completed must be repeated.
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn Note: If after repeating the procedure two
will chirp once and the system indicator short horn chirps are heard again, have your
will flash. If this does not occur, repeat vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as
the procedure from step 2. If after soon as possible.
repeated attempts to enter the reset 11. Set all four tires to the correct
mode, the horn does not chirp and the pressure See Maintenance (page
system indicator does not flash, have 229). or the tire inflation pressure label
your vehicle checked by an authorized (located on the edge of driver door or
dealer as soon as possible. the B-Pillar).
5. Train the system sensors in the tires
using the following reset sequence CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
starting with the left front tire and
following a clockwise order: Left front,
right front, right rear, left rear.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve WARNING: Do not use tire sealants
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the as they may damage the tire pressure
air pressure until the horn chirps. monitoring system.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
WARNING: If the tire pressure
the sensor identification code has been
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
learned by your vehicle for this position. If a
not function.
double horn chirp is heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be
repeated. Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve tire is in use. To restore the full function of
stem on the right front tire. Decrease the monitoring system, all road wheels
the air pressure until the horn chirps. equipped with tire pressure monitoring
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
air pressure until the horn chirps. apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
292
Wheels and Tires
Have a flat serviced by an authorized • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

dealer in order to prevent damage to the • Load the vehicle beyond maximum
system sensors See Tire Pressure vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Monitoring System (page 287). Replace Compliance Label.
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of • Tow a trailer.
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer • Use snow chains on the end of the
inspect the system sensor for damage. vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire at a time.
Assembly Information
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
WARNING: Failure to follow these • Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
guidelines could result in an increased risk Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and • Handling, stability and braking
tire, then it is intended for temporary use performance.
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible • Comfort and noise.
with a road wheel and tire assembly that • Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
is the same size and type as the road tires • Winter weather driving capability.
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel • Wet weather driving capability.
is damaged, it should be replaced rather • All-wheel driving capability.
than repaired. 3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly label on wheel
is defined as a spare wheel and tire When driving with the full-size dissimilar
assembly that is different in brand, size or spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire • Use more than one dissimilar spare
begins with the letter T for tire size and wheel and tire assembly at a time.
may have Temporary Use Only molded in • Use commercial car washing
the sidewall. equipment.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label • Use snow chains on the end of the
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND and tire assembly.
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
ONLY. wheel and tire assembly can lead to
When driving with one of the dissimilar impairment of the following:
spare tires listed above, do not: • Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
293
Wheels and Tires
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire
• Winter weather driving capability. pressure monitoring system, the warning
indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel
• Wet weather driving capability. to your vehicle. To restore the correct
• All-wheel driving capability. operation of the tire pressure monitoring
When driving with the full-size dissimilar system, you must have the repaired road
spare wheel and tire assembly additional wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
caution should be given to: vehicle. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 287). To prevent damage
• Towing a trailer. occurring to the tire pressure monitoring
• Driving vehicles equipped with a system sensors, make sure you have a
camper body. damage tire repaired or replaced by a tire
• Driving vehicles with a load on the professional.
cargo rack. Van, Bus or Wagon
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Locking Lug Nuts

You can obtain replacement locking lug
nuts or a locking lug nut key using the
reference number certificate.
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel

The spare wheel is under the rear of your
vehicle.
If the spare wheel is the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner. E145138
If the spare wheel is not the same type and 1. Open the rear doors. Remove the
size as your vehicle road wheel, it has a grommet and insert the flat end of the
label showing the maximum driving speed lug wrench into the socket. Turn
limit. counterclockwise until the spare wheel
rests on the ground and the cable is
loose.
294
Wheels and Tires
E146813
4. Remove the retaining nut to release

E146811
the spare wheel bracket.
2. Raise the cable end cover. Chassis Cab and Cutaway
1 2
E184880
1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench

into the socket. Turn counterclockwise
until the spare wheel rests on the
ground and the cable is loose.
E146812
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees.

Slide the cable through the slot to
release the spare wheel bracket from
the winch.
295
Wheels and Tires
E146813
4. Remove the retaining nut to release

E146811
the spare wheel bracket.
2. Raise the cable end cover. Vehicle Jack
WARNING: When one of the front

wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
1 moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
2 transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent your

vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to secure
the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed. For example, when
changing the front left wheel, place an
appropriate block or wheel chock on the
right rear wheel.
E146812
WARNING: Do not work on your
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees. vehicle when the jack is the only support.
Slide the cable through the slot to If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
release the spare wheel bracket from someone else could be seriously injured.
the winch.
296
Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Jack Storage

change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack

provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
WARNING: Switch off the running

boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the

vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
E218058
Note: Vehicles with a Temporary Mobility
Kit do not have a vehicle jack or a lug
wrench.
297
Wheels and Tires
E70959
1. Assemble the jack handle.

2. Insert the jack handle onto the release
valve and rotate clockwise until you
3. Insert the jack handle into the pump
and use a pumping action to raise your
E218059 vehicle.
The vehicle jack is under the passenger 4. Insert the jack handle into the release
seat. The jack handle and lug wrench are valve and rotate counterclockwise to
in the storage compartment in the front lower your vehicle.
right-hand side stepwell.
Front Jacking Points
Note: The vehicle jack is in the load space
area on vehicles with rear climate control.
WARNING: You must use the
specified jacking points.
Note: If your vehicle has rear air

conditioning make sure the vehicle jack does
not come in contact with the air conditioning
lines.
298
Wheels and Tires
E171405 E171406
Position the head of the vehicle jack under Position the head of the vehicle jack under
the protrusions at the rear of front the rear axle.
sub-frame.
Removing a Wheel Trim (If Equipped)
Rear Jacking Points
Vehicles With Steel Wheels
1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
WARNING: You must use the between the wheel rim and the wheel
specified jacking points. trim.
2. Carefully remove the wheel trim.
299
Wheels and Tires
Vehicles With Dual Rear Alloy Wheels
E252527
The wheel trim removal tool is in the

storage compartment in the front
right-hand side stepwell.
Front Wheel Trim
E218059
E256347
E252525
1. Locate the notch in the wheel trim.
300
Wheels and Tires
2 2
3 3
E252535 E252535
2. Insert the wheel trim removal tool into 2. Insert the wheel trim removal tool into
the notch in the wheel trim. the notch in the wheel trim.
3. Rotate the wheel trim removal tool and 3. Rotate the wheel trim removal tool and
remove the wheel trim. remove the wheel trim.
Rear Wheel Trim Removing a Road Wheel
WARNING: Park your vehicle so that

you do not obstruct the flow of traffic or
place yourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
WARNING: Switch the ignition off

1 and apply the parking brake.
WARNING: If your vehicle has a

manual transmission, shift into first or
reverse gear. If your vehicle has an
automatic transmission, shift into park (P).
E252526
WARNING: Make sure all passengers
1. Locate the notch in the wheel trim. are out of your vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure that your

vehicle is on firm and level ground with the
front wheels pointing straight ahead.
301
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Chock the diagonally WARNING: When you install a

opposite wheel to the punctured tire with wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt
an appropriate block or wheel chock. A or foreign materials present on the
wheel chock may be in the B-pillar or in a mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
storage compartment in the front surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
right-hand side stepwell. brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make
sure to secure any fasteners that attach
WARNING: Make sure that the the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere
arrows on directional tires point in the with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.
direction of rotation when your vehicle is Installing wheels without correct
moving forward. If you have to fit a spare metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
tire with the arrows pointing in the opposite mounting surfaces can cause the wheel
direction have the tire refitted as soon as nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
possible. while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in
loss of vehicle control, personal injury or
1. Use the locking lug nut key to loosen death.
the locking lug nut.
2. Loosen the remaining lug nuts, but do WARNING: Only use the specific lug
not remove them. nuts and wheels supplied with your vehicle.
If in doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
3. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear
of the ground. WARNING: Do not install alloy
4. Remove the lug nuts and the road wheels using lug nuts designed for use with
wheel. steel wheels.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face
down on the ground. WARNING: The lug nuts of alloy
wheels and spoked steel wheels can also
Installing a Road Wheel be used for the steel spare wheel for a
short time (maximum two weeks).
WARNING: Use only approved wheel 1. Install the wheel.

and tire sizes. Using other sizes could
damage your vehicle and will make the
National Type Approval invalid.
WARNING: Make sure there is no

grease or oil on the threads or the surface
between the wheel lugs and nuts. This can
cause the lug nuts to loosen while driving.
302
Wheels and Tires
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug

1 nuts are against the wheel.
Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for
use on a steel spare wheel.
3 4 Note: If the spare wheel is not the same

type and size as your vehicle road wheel
replace it as soon as possible.
Note: Check the lug nuts for correct
tightness and check the tire pressure as
soon as possible.
5 2 Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle
Jack
Note: Do not raise the spare wheel bracket
6 1 without a wheel attached. Damage to the
winch mechanism could occur.
1. Attach the spare wheel bracket to the
wheel using the retaining nut.
3 2. Slide the cable through the slot and
4 attach the spare wheel bracket to the
winch.
3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees
and lower the cable end cover.
2 5 4. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
E70961 into the socket. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance. Make sure
2. Install all of the lug nuts and partially the wheel is secure.
tighten them in the sequence shown. 5. Stow the vehicle jack, jack handle and
3. Lower your vehicle and remove the lug wrench in their correct locations
vehicle jack. and secure them with the straps.
4. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the
sequence shown. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5. Install the wheel trim.
303
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces
of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size *
Ib-ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5 148 lb.ft (200 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
304
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
Engine 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel
Cubic inches 195

Required fuel No. 2 Diesel
Firing order 1-2-4-5-3
Compression ratio 15.4:1
305
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine 3.5L V6 Ecoboost
Cubic inches 214

Required fuel Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap .030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm)
306
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Engine 3.7 V6
Cubic inches 226

Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap .049-.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm)
307
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

Component Part number
Diesel Foam Pre air filter. FA-1921

Air filter element. FA-1916
Automatic transmission fluid filter. FT-161
Dual battery. BAGM-48H6-760
Oil filter. FL-500S
Fuel filter. FD-4621
Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with WW-2955 - driver side
medium low roof. WW-2112 - passenger side
Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with low, WW-2901 - driver side
medium or high roof. WW-2049 - passenger side
Motorcraft replacement parts are Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be

recommended for scheduled maintenance available, use an oil filter that meets
and are available at an authorized dealer industry performance specification
or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or SAE/USCAR-36.
exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications, and are engineered for your
vehicle. Use of other parts may impact
vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your vehicle Warranty may be
void for any damage related to use of other
parts.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L V6 Ecoboost
Air filter element FA-1916

Automatic transmission fluid filter FT-161
Battery BXT-48H6-610
308
Oil filter FL-500S

Spark plugs SP-534
Windshield wiper blades - roof med-low WW-2955 - driver side
WW-2112 - passenger side
Windshield wiper blades - roof low, medium WW-2901 - driver side
& high WW-2049 - passenger side
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at

fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 462).
309
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
3.7L Duratec
Air filter element FA-1916

Automatic transmission fluid filter FT-161
Battery BXT-48H6-610
Oil filter FL-500S
Spark plugs SP-520
Windshield wiper blades - roof med-low WW-2955 - driver side
WW-2112 - passenger side
Windshield wiper blades - roof low, medium WW-2901 - driver side
& high WW-2049 - passenger side
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at

fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 462).
310
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier

B Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D Engine type
E142476 E Check digit
F Model year
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification G Assembly plant
number. H Production sequence number
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
311
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION TRANSMISSION CODE

LABEL DESIGNATION
E167469
E167814
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a The transmission code is on the Safety
Safety Compliance Certification Label be Compliance Certification Label. The
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where following table shows the transmission
the Safety Compliance Certification Label code along with the transmission
may be located. The Safety Compliance description.
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E 6
312
CAPACITIES AND refrigerant system contains refrigerant

SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
POWER STROKE DIESEL conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
WARNING: The air conditioning
Capacities
Item Quantity
Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter. 12.0 qt (11.4 L)
Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter. 11.6 qt (11 L)
Engine coolant fill capacity - vehicles with an auxil- 15.3 qt (14.5 L)
iary heater.
Engine coolant fill capacity - vehicles without an 13.9 qt (13.2 L)
auxiliary heater.
1 13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.
Rear axle fluid fill capacity - vehicles with limited 2.9 qt (2.72 L)
2
slip differential.
Rear axle fluid fill capacity - vehicles with conven- 3.0 qt (2.84 L)
tional differential.
Rear axle friction modifier. 4.0 fl oz (118 ml)
Fuel tank fill capacity. 25.1 gal (95 L)
Diesel exhaust fluid fill capacity. 5.5 gal (21 L)
Washer system fill capacity. 4.8 qt (4.5 L)
Air conditioning refrigerant fill capacity - vehicles 2.45 lb (1.11 kg)
with rear air conditioning.
without rear air conditioning.
313
Item Quantity
Air conditioning refrigerant compressor oil fill capa- 9.5 fl oz (280 ml)
city - vehicles with rear air conditioning.
city - vehicles without rear air conditioning.
1 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 459).
2 For complete refill of limited slip differential, add 4.0 fl oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A.

Note: Ford rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless
you submerge the axle in water.
Specifications
Adding Engine Oil
We recommend that you use Motorcraft
Quantity oil and fluids for your vehicle. Only use
fluid that meets Ford specifications. Only
2.6 qt (2.5 L) use oils certified for diesel engines by the
The quantity of engine oil required to raise American Petroleum Institute (API).
the indicated level on the dipstick from
minimum to maximum.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor WSS-M2C171-F1

Oil (U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué orange
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
314
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A

Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6 (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A
Hypoid Gear Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier (U.S.) EST-M2C118-A
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-3 (U.S.)
CXL-3 (Canada)
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant (U.S.) WSH-M17B19-A
R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a (Canada)
YN-19 (U.S.)
CYN-19-R (Canada)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (U.S.) WSH-M1C231-B
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motorcraft®
(Canada)
YN-12-D (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease (U.S.) ESA-M1C75-B
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse
longue durée de qualité première Motorcraft®
(Canada)
XG-1-E1 (U.S. & Canada)
315
Note: Automatic transmissions that require • Reduced fuel economy.

MERCON® LV transmission fluid should • Reduced brake performance.
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
Alternative Oil Viscosity
E179966
If you are unable to find an engine oil that

meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C171-E, it is acceptable to use a
SAE 5W-40 engine oil that meets API CJ-4 E176394
requirements.
The use of correct oil viscosities is
The American Petroleum Institute (API) important for satisfactory operation.
service symbol is used to identify the Determine which oil viscosity best suits the
proper engine oil for your engine. The API temperature range you expect to
service symbol will be displayed on the oil encounter for the next service interval from
container you purchase. The API symbol the SAE viscosity grade chart.
displays the oil performance category in
Note: For the use of biodiesel fuel (B6 –
the top half of the symbol and the viscosity
B20), use SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4.
grade in the center of the symbol.
Note: Do not use more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between CAPACITIES AND
scheduled service intervals. SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Using oil and fluids that do not meet the ECOBOOST™
defined specification and viscosity grade
may lead to:
• Component damage which may not be WARNING: The air conditioning
covered by the vehicle Warranty. refrigerant system contains refrigerant
• Longer engine cranking periods. under high pressure. Only qualified
• Increased emission levels. personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
• Reduced engine performance. the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
316
Capacities
Item Quantity
Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter. 5.9 qt (5.6 L)
Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter. 5.4 qt (5.1 L)
iary heater.
auxiliary heater.
1 13.1 qt (12.4 L)
2
slip differential.

317
The quantity of engine oil required to raise

Adding Engine Oil the indicated level on the dipstick from
minimum to maximum.
Quantity
1.0 qt (0.9 L) Specifications

oil and fluids for your vehicle. Only use
fluid that meets Ford specifications.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil WSS-M2C946-B1

(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
XO-5W30-Q1SP (U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6 (Canada)
(U.S.)
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada)
Fluid (U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6 (Canada)
318
Name Specification

XL-3 (U.S.)
CXL-3 (Canada)
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
YN-19 (U.S.)
CYN-19-R (Canada)
(Canada)
(Canada)
Motor oils of the recommended viscosity

grade that display the API Certification
Mark for gasoline engines are also
acceptable. Do not use oil labeled with
API SN service category unless the label
also displays the API certification mark.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
319
Using oil and fluids that do not meet the

defined specification and viscosity grade
may lead to:
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms additives because they are unnecessary
to current engine, emission system and and could lead to engine damage that may
fuel economy performance standards of not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC). Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
the alternative engine oil between To improve engine cold start performance,
scheduled service intervals. we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil where the ambient
temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or
below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C953-B1
E240523
320
CAPACITIES AND refrigerant system contains refrigerant

SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
WARNING: The air conditioning cause personal injury.
Capacities
Item Quantity
Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter. 6 qt (5.7 L)

Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter. 5.5 qt (5.2 L)
iary heater.
auxiliary heater.
1 13.1 qt (12.4 L)
2
slip differential.
321
Item Quantity

Specifications
Adding Engine Oil
Quantity oil and fluids for your vehicle. Only use
fluid that meets Ford specifications.
1.0 qt (0.9 L)
The quantity of engine oil required to raise

the indicated level on the dipstick from
minimum to maximum.
Materials
Name Specification

(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-20 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-Q1SP (U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6 (Canada)
(U.S.)
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada)
322
Name Specification

Fluid (U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6 (Canada)
XL-3 (U.S.)
CXL-3 (Canada)
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
YN-19 (U.S.)
CYN-19-R (Canada)
(Canada)
323
Name Specification

(Canada)

Motor oils of the recommended viscosity
the alternative engine oil between
grade that display the API Certification
scheduled service intervals.
Mark for gasoline engines are also
acceptable. Do not use oil labeled with Using oil and fluids that do not meet the
API SN service category unless the label defined specification and viscosity grade
also displays the API certification mark. may lead to:
Note: Automatic transmissions that require • Component damage which may not be
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should covered by the vehicle Warranty.
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. • Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
Alternative Engine Oil for

E142732
Extremely Cold Climates
An oil that displays this symbol conforms To improve engine cold start performance,
to current engine, emission system and we recommend that you use the following
fuel economy performance standards of alternative engine oil where the ambient
the International Lubricants Specification temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or
Advisory Committee (ILSAC). below.
Materials
Name Specification

(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP (U.S.)
324
E240522
325
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequencies and Reception (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Factors Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

CD and CD Player Information heat sources for extended periods.
Note: CD units play commercially pressed MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
5 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due Structure
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs Audio systems capable of recognizing and
may not function correctly when used in playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
Ford CD players. and folder structures work as follows:
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade • There are two different modes for MP3
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
as the label may peel and cause the CD to WMA track mode (system default) and
become jammed. You should use a MP3 and WMA folder mode.
permanent felt tip marker rather than • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please disc. The player numbers each MP3
contact an authorized dealer for further and WMA track on the disc (noted by
information. the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped T001 to a maximum of T255. The
discs or discs with a scratch protection film maximum number of playable MP3 and
attached. WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
Always handle discs by their edges only. model of radio present.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
326
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc RADIO
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255. WARNING: Driving while distracted
• Creating discs with only one level of and injury. We strongly recommend that
folders helps with navigation through you use extreme caution when using any
the disc files. device that may take your focus off the
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
discs, it is important to understand how operation of your vehicle. We recommend
the system reads the structures you create. against the use of any hand-held device
While various files may be present (files while driving and encourage the use of
with extensions other than MP3 and voice-operated systems when possible.
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA Make sure you are aware of all applicable
extension are played; other files are local laws that may affect the use of
ignored by the system. This enables you to electronic devices while driving.
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer, Note: You can operate your audio system
home computer and your in-vehicle for up to one hour after you switch the
system. ignition off. Press the on and off control to
operate the system with the ignition turned
In track mode, the system displays and
off. The system automatically turns off after
plays the structure as if it were only one
one hour.
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
folder mode, the system only plays the satellite radio, may not be available in your
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. location. Check with an authorized dealer.
327
Audio System
E216052
A Eject: Press to eject a CD. E Number block: In radio mode,

you can store your favorite radio
B OK and Arrow buttons: Press stations. To store a radio station,
OK to confirm menu selections. tune to the station, then press
Press to scroll through the menu and hold a preset button until
choices. sound returns. In CD mode,
C Information: Press to access select a track. In phone mode,
any available radio or CD enter a phone number.
information. F CLOCK: If not in phone mode,
D TUNE: Press to manually search press to display the clock.
through the radio frequency G Function buttons: Select
band. different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (such as Radio
mode or CD mode).
328
Audio System
H SOUND: Press to access M MEDIA: Press to open the media

settings for Treble, Midrange, source menu. You can press this
Bass, Fade or Balance. Use the multiple times to change to CD
up and down arrow buttons to or to a SYNC-Media device or
select the various settings. When scroll through the media sources
you make your selection, press using the arrow buttons. Press
the left and right arrow buttons OK to select a source.
to change the settings. Press OK N SIRIUS: Press to listen to
to set or press MENU to exit. SIRIUS satellite radio.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source O RADIO: Press this multiple
independently. times to select a radio band.
Press and hold to select the
I Seek, Fast Forward and autostore function. Press to
Reverse: In radio mode, select return to the main screen of the
a frequency band and press active radio band.
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In media mode, press
to select the previous or next
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
track. Press and hold either PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
button to move quickly forward
or backward through the current
track.
J VOL and Power: Press to can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
switch the system on and off. and injury. We strongly recommend that
Turn to adjust the volume. you use extreme caution when using any
K MENU: Press to access different device that may take your focus off the
audio system features. See road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
Menu Structure later in this operation of your vehicle. We recommend
chapter. against the use of any hand-held device
L PHONE: Press to access the voice-operated systems when possible.
phone features of the SYNC Make sure you are aware of all applicable
system. See your SYNC local laws that may affect the use of
information. electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls

most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
329
Audio System
A B C D
G F E
E177140
A TUNE: In radio mode, press to satellite radio station. If a

manually search through the specific category is selected
radio frequency band. In SIRIUS (such as Jazz, Rock or News),
mode, press to find the previous use this button to find the next
or next available satellite radio or previous in the selected
station. category.
B Mute: Press to mute the sound. E SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
C DISP: Press to switch the Bass, Fade or Balance.
display screen on and off.
F VOL and Power: Press to
D Seek, Fast Forward and switch the system on and off.
Reverse: In radio mode, select Turn to adjust the volume.
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops G SOURCE: Press to access
at the first station it finds in that different audio modes, such as
direction. In media mode, press AM, FM, Satellite Radio and Line
to select the previous or next in.
track. Press and hold either
track. In SIRIUS mode, press to
select the next or previous
330
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: against the use of any hand-held device
AM/FM/CD/SYNC while driving and encourage the use of
WARNING: Driving while distracted electronic devices while driving.
and injury. We strongly recommend that Note: You can operate your audio system
you use extreme caution when using any for up to one hour after you switch the
device that may take your focus off the ignition off. Press the on and off control to
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operate the system with the ignition turned
operation of your vehicle. We recommend off. The system automatically turns off after
one hour.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
E216045
331
Audio System
A Eject: Press to eject a CD. J MENU: Press to access different

audio system features. See
B OK and Arrow buttons: Press
Menu Structure later in this
OK to confirm menu selections.
chapter.
Press to scroll through the menu
choices. K SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
C Information: Press to access
Bass, Fade or Balance. Use the
any available radio or CD
up and down arrow buttons to
information.
select the various settings. When
D TUNE: Press to manually search you make your selection, press
through the radio frequency the left and right arrow buttons
band. to change the settings. Press OK
E Number block: In radio mode, to set or press MENU to exit.
you can store your favorite radio Sound settings can be set for
stations. To store a radio station, each audio source
tune to the station, then press independently.
and hold a preset button until L PHONE: Press to access the
sound returns. In CD mode, phone features of the SYNC
select a track. In phone mode, system. See your SYNC
enter a phone number. information.
F CLOCK: If not in phone mode, M MEDIA: Press to open the media
press to display the clock. source menu. You can press this
G Function buttons: Select multiple times to change to CD
different functions of the audio or to a SYNC-Media device or
system depending on which scroll through the media sources
mode you are in (such as Radio using the arrow buttons. Press
mode or CD mode). OK to select a source.
H Seek, Fast Forward and N RADIO: Press this multiple
Reverse: In radio mode, select times to select a radio band.
a frequency band and press Press and hold to select the
either button. The system stops autostore function. Press to
at the first station it finds in that return to the main screen of the
direction. In media mode, press active radio band.
to select the previous or next
track. Press and hold either
track.
I VOL and Power: Press to
switch the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
332
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: you use extreme caution when using any
AM/FM/USB PORT/ device that may take your focus off the
BLUETOOTH operation of your vehicle. We recommend
WARNING: Driving while distracted voice-operated systems when possible.
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Make sure you are aware of all applicable
and injury. We strongly recommend that local laws that may affect the use of
E211745
A Display: Shows the status of C SOUND: Press the button to

the current mode selected. adjust the sound settings for
bass, treble, balance and fade.
B USB socket: Insert to play audio
from a compatible external
device or memory stick.
333
Audio System
D Seek up: Press the button to go K MEDIA: Press the button to

to the next station up the radio access Bluetooth audio
frequency band or the next track. streaming, USB or Aux input
Seek down: Press the button to playback.
go to the next station down the L RADIO: Press the button to
radio frequency band or the select different radio bands.
previous track. In Bluetooth Press to cancel the menu or list
audio and USB modes, press the browsing.
buttons to go to the next or
previous track. M Cursor up and down: Press a
button to scroll through
D Dial and end call: Press the on-screen choices. In radio mode
button to make or end a call. press to manual tune.
E Numeric keypad: Press the N OK, Play and Pause: Press the
button to recall a previously button to confirm on-screen
stored station. To store a selections. Press to play or pause
favorite station press and hold during playback with compatible
until the sound returns. In Phone external devices.
mode, use these keys to dial the
number.
Sound Button
F Clock: Press the button to
select clock setup. This allows you to adjust the sound
G Information: Press the button settings (for example bass, treble, balance
to access the complete and fade).
information if it does not fit the 1. Press the MINbutton.
display. 2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to
H On, Off and Volume: Press the select the required level.
button to switch the audio
system on or off. Turn the dial to Waveband Button
adjust the volume.
Press the MINbutton to select from the
I MENU: : Press the button to wavebands available (AM, FM1,FM2). You
access different audio system can use the button to return to radio
features, depending on which reception when you have been listening to
mode has been selected. another source.
J Voice Pass-Through and Station Tuning Control
Phone: Press the button to say
commands to your cell phone or Seek Tuning
to access the Bluetooth phone
feature of the system by Select a waveband and briefly press one
pressing PHONE then MENU. of the seek buttons. The unit stops at the
When paired further presses of first station it finds in the direction you
this button will display phone have chosen.
name, signal strength and the
battery level.
334
Audio System
Manual Tuning The Bluetooth cell phone part of the

system provides interaction with the audio
Use the up and down arrow buttons to system and your cell phone. It allows you
tune down or up the waveband in small to use the audio system to make and
increments or press and hold to increment receive calls without having to hold your
quickly, until you find a station you want cell phone.
to listen to.
The Voice Pass-Through allows access to
Station Preset Buttons the voice recognition commands on your
cell phone.
This allows you to store your favorite
stations. They can be recalled by selecting Bluetooth Setup
the appropriate waveband and pressing
one of the preset buttons. Note: Up to five Bluetooth devices can be
paired to the system.
1. Select a waveband.
Note: If there is an ongoing call when the
2. Tune to the station required. phone in use is selected as the new active
3. Press and hold one of the preset phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle
buttons. A progress bar and message audio system.
will appear. When the progress bar Note: Even if connected to the system, your
completes the station has been stored. phone can still be used in the usual way.
The audio unit will also mute
momentarily as confirmation. Note: A call will be disconnected if the
audio unit is switched off. If the ignition is
You can repeat this on each waveband and switched off the phone call will remain in
for each preset button. progress.
Phone and Voice Pass-Through Before you can use your cell phone with
your vehicle it must be paired to the audio
Note: Using the system with the engine off system.
will drain the battery.
The following procedure is required before
Note: As no common agreement exists, cell an initial Bluetooth phone connection can
phone manufacturers are able to implement be made.
a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth
devices. Because of this, an incompatibility The information display may show your
can occur between the phone and hands cell phone's battery charge level and signal
free system, which in some cases may strength.
significantly degrade the system
performance. To avoid this situation, only Using the device
recommended phones should be used. To 1. Press the PHONE button and then
check your cell phone's compatibility, refer keep pressing the MENU button to
to your device's manual or visit the regional scroll to the ADD DEVICE display.
Ford website. Press the OK button.
This section describes the functions and 2. Select the VIA DEVICE and press OK.
features of the Bluetooth cell phone hands 3. Once VIA DEVICE has been selected,
free system. FIND FORD BT is displayed on the
radio display.
4. Note the six digit number displayed.
335
Audio System
5. Search for Bluetooth devices using the 4. Select VIA RADIO and press
cell phone. For information on phone SEARCHING will be displayed on the
settings, refer to your phone user guide. radio display.
6. Select FORD BT from the list of 5. Select the desired Bluetooth device
Bluetooth devices found by your phone. from the list found by your audio unit
7. Check if the number on the radio and press OK.
display matches the number displayed 6. Type any PIN number in the radio with
on your phone and confirm pairing if 6 digits.
prompted. 7. Check if the number on the radio
8. Once pairing has been successful SET display matches the number displayed
PRIMARY will be displayed on the on your phone and confirm pairing if
radio display. prompted.
9. Press the OK button twice to confirm 8. Once pairing has been successful SET
your phone as the primary device for PRIMARY will be displayed on the
all future connections. radio display.
10. LOAD PHONEBK is then displayed 9. Press the OK button twice to confirm
on the audio unit. Press the OK your phone as the primary device for
button twice to confirm that the all future connections.
contents of your phonebook are 10. LOAD PHONEBK will then be
downloaded to the system. displayed on the audio unit. Press the
11. The Bluetooth device name is OK button twice to confirm that the
displayed on the audio unit. contents of your phonebook are
downloaded to the system.
When you press and hold the Voice
Pass-Through button, the screen displays 11. The Bluetooth device name is
the message VR-APP ACTIV, a tone displayed on the audio unit.
sounds and you can give a command with
a clear and natural voice. Phonebook Downloading
Note: Some devices may not accept this If your phonebook was not downloaded
pairing procedure. If these instructions do during initial Bluetooth pairing follow this
not work for your device, follow the process:
instructions using the radio. 1. Press the PHONE button and then
keep pressing the MENU button to
Using the radio
scroll to the LOAD PHONEBK display.
1. Enable Bluetooth in your cell phone. 2. Press the OK button.
For information on phone settings, refer
to your phone user guide.
2. Press the PHONE button and then
keep pressing the MENU button to
scroll to the ADD DEVICE display.
Press the OK button.
3. Select the VIA RADIO and press
SEARCHING will be displayed on the
radio display.
336
Audio System
Deleting a Paired Device or Phone • Load Phonebook.

To remove a paired device follow this • Reject on or off.
process: Press the OK button to select the required
1. Press the PHONE button and then option, and use the up and down arrows
keep pressing the MENU button to to change features.
scroll to the DEL DEVICE display.
Making and Receiving Calls
2. Press the OK button. The first paired
device name will be shown. Scroll to Outgoing calls can be made by:
the required device name using the up • Entering a number using the keys on
and down arrow. Once choose the the radio.
device, press OK, the message "DEL
DEVICE" will appear. Press OK, Scroll • Saying a command to call someone
to select "YES" and press OK to after pressing the Voice
confirm. Select delete all to erase all Pass-Through button.
paired devices. • Selecting a contact from the
3. Press the OK button multiple times to downloaded phonebook.
unpair the device from the audio unit. • Selecting a number or contact from the
call history log.
Privacy Mode
• Using quick dial by pressing one of the
You can transfer a call from hands free to radio preset buttons.
private mode during an active call. • Using the redial function.
Press the MENU button until PRIVACY • Using the cell phone.
appears, then press the OK button to
Incoming calls can be answered by:
transfer. To return to hands free mode,
press the dial button. • Pressing the call pickup button on the
audio unit.
Phone Menu Options • Using the cell phone.
Press the PHONE button to select phone Calls can be rejected using the end call
mode. Press the PHONE button again to button on the audio unit or by using the cell
display information such as phone name, phone directly.
signal strength and battery level.
USB
When in phone mode, press the MENU
button to scroll through the various phone Note: Only use USB Mass-Storage device
options: compliant devices.
• Dial. Note: Always switch your audio unit to a
• Phonebook. different source (for example the radio)
• Call History. before unplugging the USB device.
• Add Device. Note: Do not install or connect USB hubs
or splitters.
• Select Device.
• Set Primary.
• Delete Device.
• Bluetooth on and off.
337
Audio System
Note: The system is only designed to Select the iPod as the audio source by
recognize and read suitable audio files from pressing the MEDIA button until IPOD
a USB device that conforms to the USB appears in the display. After first
Mass-Storage device class or an iPod. Not connecting the iPod, the first track within
all available USB devices can be guaranteed the first folder will start to play
to function with the system. automatically. Following audio source
switching, the position of playback on the
Note: It is possible to connect compatible
iPod is remembered.
devices with a trailing USB lead as well as
those that plug into the USB socket directly Press the seek up and down keys to skip
(for example USB memory sticks and pen backward and forward through tracks.
drives). Press and hold the seek keys to enable fast
Note: Some USB devices with a higher rewind or fast forward through track
power consumption may not be compatible content.
(for example some larger hard drives). Various functions may be controlled from
Note: Access time to read the files on the the audio unit including:
external device will vary depending upon • Next and previous track select.
factors such as the file structure, size and
device content. • Track seek.
• Shuffle.
The audio unit supports a range of external
devices. Once connected, control of the • Repeat.
external device is possible via the audio
unit. Bluetooth Audio Streaming
Operating the USB Device Note: Make sure the device is paired before
using this feature.
Note: USB playback will start automatically Compatible Bluetooth devices can be
when you connect a compatible device. To connected to the audio unit to playback
turn this feature off, select AUTOPL and using the vehicle audio system.
then select OFF using the menu function.
Select the device as the audio source by
Connect the device to the audio unit. pressing the MEDIA button until BT
Select the USB device as the audio source AUDIO appears in the display.
by pressing the MEDIA button until the The device playback can be controlled
USB screen appears in the display. After using the audio unit buttons play, pause,
first connecting the USB device, the first next and previous track.
track within the first folder will start to play
automatically. Following audio source
switching, the position of playback on the
USB device is remembered.
Press the seek up and down keys to skip
backward and forward through tracks.
Press and hold to fast forward and reverse
through the track.
iPod
Connect the iPod to the audio unit.
338
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: operation of your vehicle. We recommend

AM/FM against the use of any hand-held device
WARNING: Driving while distracted local laws that may affect the use of
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash electronic devices while driving.
you use extreme caution when using any Note: Depending on your vehicle option
device that may take your focus off the package, your system may look different
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe from what you see here.
A B
J C
G D
F E
E175058
A Display: Shows the status of

the current mode selected.
B Clock: Press to display the
clock.
339
Audio System
C Seek, Fast Forward and F MENU: Press to access different

Reverse: In radio mode, select audio system features.
a frequency band and press G SOUND: Press to access
either button. The system stops settings for Treble, Midrange,
at the first station it finds in that
Bass, Fade or Balance.
direction. In media mode, press
to select the previous or next H AUX: Press to access the
track. Press and hold either auxiliary features, it will also
button to move quickly forward cancel the menu or list browsing.
or backward through the current I RADIO: Press this multiple
track. times to select a radio band.
D Numeric keypad: In radio Press and hold to select the
mode, you can store your autostore function. Press to
favorite radio stations. To store return to the main screen of the
a radio station, tune to the active radio band.
station, then press and hold a J Arrow left and right: Press to
preset button until sound scroll through the menu choices.
returns.
K Mute: Press to mute the sound.
E VOL and Power: Press to
switch the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume. Clock Button
This allows you to adjust the clock settings.
Press the Clock button until the following message is displayed.

Set Hour Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
hour.
Press the Clock button again until the following message is displayed.
Set Minutes Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
minutes.
340
Audio System
Setting 24 Hour or 12 Hour Display
Press the Menu button until the following message is displayed.

24 Hour Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to select one of the
following:
12 Hour
24 Hour
Note: The default setting is 24 hour.
Station Tuning Buttons Menu Button

This allows you to adjust all of the audio
Seek Tuning system settings. Press the button
Select a frequency band and briefly press repeatedly until the required setting is
one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop displayed. Use the cursor up or down arrow
at the first station it finds in the direction buttons to adjust the following settings:
you have chosen. • Clock hour.
Manual Tuning • Clock minutes.
• 24 hour, 12 hour.
Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons
to tune up or down the frequency band in • Bass.
small increments. To increment quickly, • Treble.
press and hold until you find a station you • Balance.
want to listen to.
• Fade.
Station Preset Buttons • RDS.
This feature allows you to store your Sound Button
favorite stations. They can be recalled by
selecting the appropriate frequency band This allows you to adjust the sound
and pressing one of the preset buttons. settings for bass, treble, balance or fade.
1. Select a frequency band. 1. Press the sound button until the
2. Tune to the station required. required setting is displayed.
3. Press and hold one of the preset 2. Use the cursor up or down arrow
buttons. The audio unit will also mute buttons to select the required level.
momentarily as confirmation. Note: Fade settings are only adjustable if
You can repeat this on each frequency there are speakers in the rear of your vehicle.
band and for each preset button.
AUX Button
Connect your media device to the audio
unit. See USB Port (page 347).
341
Audio System
Select your media device as the audio The multicast indicator appears in FM
source by pressing the AUX button. After mode (only) if the current station is
connecting your media device, the first broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
track will start to play automatically. The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
DIGITAL RADIO programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
available in all markets. only available digitally.
HD Radio technology is the digital When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your can access the following functions:
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where • Scan allows you to hear a brief
available) in addition to the analog sampling of all available stations. This
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital feature still works when HD Radio
broadcasts provide a better sound quality reception is on, although it does not
than analog broadcasts with free, scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
crystal-clear audio and no static or see the HD logo appear if the station
distortion. For more information, and a has a digital broadcast.
guide to available stations and • Memory presets allow you to save an
programming, please visit active channel as a memory preset.
www.hdradio.com. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a until the sound returns. There is a brief
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, mute while the radio saves the station.
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your Sound returns when finished. When
screen. When this logo is available, you switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
may also see Title and Artist fields preset, the sound mutes before the
on-screen. digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
342
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
343
Audio System
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. This is
when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. normal behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor variety of music, news, sports, weather,
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not traffic and entertainment satellite radio
responsible for the content sent using HD channels. For more information and a
Radio technology. Content may be complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
changed, added or deleted at any time at channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
the station owner's discretion. United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
344
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted news, weather, traffic and entertainment
right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
responsible for any such programming for availability.
changes.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
E208625
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
345
Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
346
Audio System
AUDIO INPUT JACK (If Equipped) The audio input jack allows you to connect
and play music from a portable music
player through your vehicle speakers. You
can use any portable music player
WARNING: Driving while distracted designed for use with headphones. The
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash audio extension cable must have a 0.14 in
and injury. We strongly recommend that (3.5 mm) male connector at each end. The
you use extreme caution when using any audio extension cable must be long
device that may take your focus off the enough to allow the portable music player
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe to be safely stored while your vehicle is
operation of your vehicle. We recommend moving.
against the use of any hand-held device 1. Make sure your vehicle is stationary
while driving and encourage the use of with the audio unit and the portable
voice-operated systems when possible. music player switched off.
local laws that may affect the use of 2. Plug the extension cable from the
electronic devices while driving. portable music player into the audio
input jack.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do 3. Switch the audio unit on. Select either
not connect or adjust the settings on your a tuned FM station or a CD.
portable music player while your vehicle is 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
moving.
5. Switch the portable music player on
and adjust the volume to half its
WARNING: Store the portable music maximum level.
player in a secure location when your
vehicle is moving, for example the glove 6. Press the AUX button on the audio
compartment. Hard objects may become unit. You should hear music from the
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which portable music player even if it is low.
may increase the risk of serious injury. 7. Adjust the volume on the portable
music player as desired. Do this by
switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT

E185568
347
Audio System

WARNING: For safety reasons, do

not connect or adjust the settings on your
device while your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Store all devices in a E201595

secure location when your vehicle is
moving, for example the glove
compartment. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which
may increase the risk of serious injury.
E185567
The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See General
Information (page 349). The extension
cable must be long enough to allow the
device to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:
348
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Use the advanced voice recognition

system that works with your system.
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device
portable media player. supports this).
This allows you to: *
These features are not available in all
• Make and receive calls. markets and may require activation.
• Access and play music from your Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
portable music player. market.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, via Make sure that you review your device's
SYNC Applink .
*
manual before using it with SYNC.
• Access phonebook contacts and music Support
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected The SYNC support team is available to
phone. help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
• Text message.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
349
SYNC™
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC:

In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. • Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. or damaged. Place cords and cables
Times are subject to change due to out of the way, so they do not interfere
holidays. with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
SYNC Owner Account • Do not leave playing devices in your
Why do I need a SYNC owner account? vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
• Essential for keeping up with the latest device's manual for further information.
software downloads available for
SYNC. • Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have. Privacy Information
Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
For your safety, certain features are your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
speed-dependent and restricted when your phone. This profile is created in order to
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
Safety Information things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
WARNING: Driving while distracted including history of calls when your cellular
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash phone was not connected to the system.
and injury. We strongly recommend that In addition, if you connect a media device,
you use extreme caution when using any the system creates and retains an index of
device that may take your focus off the supported media content. The system also
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe records a short development log of
operation of your vehicle. We recommend approximately 10 minutes of all recent
against the use of any hand-held device system activity. The log profile and other
while driving and encourage the use of system data may be used to improve the
voice-operated systems when possible. system and help diagnose any problems
Make sure you are aware of all applicable that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
350
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without USING VOICE RECOGNITION

special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor This system helps you control many
Company and Ford of Canada will not features using voice commands. This
access the system data for any purpose allows you to keep your hands on the
other than as described absent consent, a wheel and focus on what is around you.
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government Initiating a Voice Session
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may Press the voice button. A list of
seek to access the information available voice commands
independently of Ford Motor Company and E142599 appears in the display.
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist. Global Voice Commands
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 365). These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You

can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses

Helpful Hints
between words.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is • You can interrupt the system at any
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from time while it is speaking by pressing the
open windows and road vibrations may voice button. You can cancel a voice
prevent the system from correctly session by pressing and holding the
recognizing spoken commands. voice button.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
351
SYNC™
System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use
The system provides feedback through the system. You can change these settings
audible tones, prompts, questions and at any time.
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less Press the voice button. When
instruction and feedback. prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
352
SYNC™
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
To disable this automatic fan speed

Changing the Voice Settings reduction feature during voice sessions,
In addition to using voice commands to press and hold the climate control AC and
change the voice settings, you can also use Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
the menu in the audio display. release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
To change the voice settings press the the above sequence.
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
SYNC-Settings
Hands-free calling is one of the main
Voice settings
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
Note: Depending on the current climate dependent on your cellular phone's
control settings, the fan speed may functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
automatically go down while issuing voice phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
commands or while making and receiving support the following functions:
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
• Answering an incoming call.
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal • Ending a call.
operation once the voice session ends. Fan • Using privacy mode.
speed can also be adjusted normally during
• Dialing a number.
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan • Redialing.
speed to desired setting. • Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
353
SYNC™
Other features, such as text messaging 4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook display, confirm that the PIN provided
download, are phone-dependent features. by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
To check your phone's compatibility, see on your cell phone. Your phone is now
your phone's manual and visit paired and the display indicates that
www.SYNCMyRide.com, the pairing was successful. If you are
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
www.syncmaroute.ca. enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
Pairing a Phone for the First Time is successful.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC Depending on your phone's capability and
allows you to make and receive hands-free your market, the system may prompt you
calls. with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
Note: SYNC can support downloading up SYNC automatically tries to connect with
to approximately 4000 entries per first upon vehicle start-up) and
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. downloading your phonebook.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into Using Voice Commands
park (P) for automatic transmission or first Make sure to switch on your
gear for manual transmission. phone's Bluetooth feature
Using the Audio System
E142599 before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio Press the voice and when prompted
system. say:
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the Voice Command Action and Descrip-
search. See your device's manual if tion
necessary. (pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc-
2. Press the PHONE button. When the device | phone | tions on the audio
audio display indicates there is no Bluetooth audio) | display.
paired phone, select the option to add. add phone)
3. When a message to begin pairing You can say any of the voice commands
appears in the audio display, search for that appear within open and close brackets
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing that are separated by |. For example,
process. where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
354
SYNC™
Depending on your phone's capability and SYNC may prompt you with more cell
your market, the system may prompt you phone options. Your cell phone may also
with questions, such as setting the current prompt you to give SYNC permission to
phone as the primary phone (the phone access information. For more information
SYNC automatically tries to connect with on your cell phone’s capability, see your
first upon vehicle start-up) and cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
downloading your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Press the voice button. When
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition prompted, say any of the
and the radio. Shift the transmission into E142599 following:
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Voice Command
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio (phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
system.
Then say any of the following:
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the call (___)
search. See your device's manual if
necessary. call ___ at home
2. Press the PHONE button. call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
3. Select the option for Bluetooth call ___ on (cell | mobile)
Devices.
4. Press the OK button. call ___ on other
5. Select the option to add. This starts dial [[a] number] 1
the pairing process.

6. When a message to begin pairing ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone 2
appears in the audio display, search for | privacy on)

SYNC on your device.
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s

display, confirm that the PIN provided join (calls | call) 2
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed

on your cell phone. Your phone is now mute call [on] 2
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are (mute call off | un-mute call) 2
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen. (turn ringer on | silent mode off)
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful. (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
355
SYNC™
Voice Command
To access text messages say:
[text] (messages | message) 3
Voice Command
help [text] (messages | message)
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the Then say any of the following:
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home". (listen to | read) ([text] message)
1
See Dial table below. forward (text | [text] message)
2
These commands are only valid while in reply to (text | [text] message)
a phone call.
3 call [sender]
See the text message table below.
Phonebook Hints
Dial Commands
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
Press the voice button and when prompted
name browse phonebook, select a contact
say any of the following commands:
and press:
Voice Commands
Menu Item
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
Hear it
700 (seven hundred)
Changing Devices Using Voice
800 (eight hundred) Commands
900 (nine hundred) Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
Clear (deletes all entered digits) phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the

phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
356
SYNC™
on the steering wheel or select the end call

Voice Command option in the audio display.
(connect | You can state the name of Receiving Calls

device) ___ the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy” Accepting calls
or“My iPod”. SYNC may When receiving a call, you can answer the
ask you to confirm the type call by pressing the accept call button on
of device (Phone, USB, or the steering wheel or use the screen.
Bluetooth Audio).
To use the screen to accept a call
Making Calls select:
Menu Item
E142599 Accept
Press the voice button. When Rejecting Calls

prompted, say:
When receiving a call, you can reject the
Voice Command call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
call [[a] name]
dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say To use the screen to reject a call select:
number] the numbers that you wish Menu Item
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system Reject
confirms it. You can then
say: Ignore the call by doing nothing.
When the system has stated the Phone Options during an Active
number, you say any of the following: Call
Voice Command During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
(dial | send) This initiates the call. putting a call on hold or joining calls.
(delete | This erases the spoken To access this menu, choose one of the
correct) digits. options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
To end the call, press the end call button from the following options:
357
SYNC™
Menu Item Description and action
Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the

microphone on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call History Access your call history log.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the

Accessing Features through the phone menu.
Phone Menu 2. Select one of the options available.
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
358
SYNC™
Display Description and action
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
When a new message arrives, an audible
SYNC allows you to receive, send, tone sounds and the audio display
download and delete text messages. The indicates you have a new message.
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have To hear the message you can say:
to take your eyes off the road.
Voice command Description and
Receiving a Text Message action
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. (listen to | read) Select this option
Your phone must support downloading text ([text] message) to have the system
messages using Bluetooth to receive read the message
incoming text messages. to you.
359
SYNC™
Using the screen you also have the following options:

Menu Description and action
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
Choose from the following options:

Menu Description and action
Item
New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
360
SYNC™
Sending a Text Message Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
Note: You can only send a text message to
and selecting the text option from the audio
one recipient at a time.
display or by replying to a received message
1. Select the send option when the in the inbox.
desired selection highlights in the audio
display. Accessing Your Phone Settings
2. Select the confirmation option when These are phone-dependent features. Your
the contact appears. phone settings allow you to access and
3. Press the OK button again to confirm adjust features such as your ring tone and
when the system asks if you want to text message notification, modify your
send the message. A pre-defined phonebook, and set up automatic
signature appears on each text download.
message. 1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:

Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
361
SYNC™
Menu Item Phonebook preferences
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name Last/First name
1. Press the PHONE button.

Bluetooth Devices 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you and then press the OK button.
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:

Add Pair additional phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
362
SYNC™
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio

display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button.
363
SYNC™
Scroll to select from the following options:

Display Description and action
Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's

Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 351).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
364
SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
SERVICES (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
In order for the following features to work, operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
your cellular phone must be compatible in which 911 is the emergency number.
with SYNC. To check your phone's Note: Before setting this feature on, make
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or Notice later in this section for important
www.syncmaroute.ca. information.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
an emergency. or off, that setting applies for all paired
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
to and use certain applications such as a voice message plays or a display message
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
compatible). started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by Note: Every phone operates differently.
market. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
911 Assist using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
setting is set on before a crash, the system pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
will not dial for help which could delay vehicle may be able to contact emergency
response time, potentially increasing the services by dialing 911 through a paired and
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
to make an emergency call if you can do it www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
yourself. Dial emergency services www.syncmaroute.ca.
immediately to avoid delayed response See Supplementary Restraints System
time which could increase the risk of (page 46). Important information about
serious injury or death after a crash. If you airbag deployment is in this chapter.
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be See Roadside Emergencies (page 194).
damaged or non-functional. Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
365
SYNC™
Setting 911 Assist On or Off • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,
Press Menu then select battery power and signal strength.
Menu Action and Description • The vehicle must have battery power
Item and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
SYNC-Applications emergency number.
911 Assist Select the desired option, on In the Event of a Crash
or off.
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
If you choose not to activate this Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
feature you will have the following damage or loses its connection to SYNC
options: during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
Menu Action and Description to connect to a previously paired cell
Item phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Voice Provides a display and voice Before making the call:
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON at vehicle start. • SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Voice Provides a display reminder If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
Reminder only without a voice reminder attempts to dial 911.
OFF at phone connection. • SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
To make sure that 911 Assist works 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
properly: your screen or press and hold the
• SYNC must be powered and working phone button on your steering wheel".
properly at the time of the incident and If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
throughout feature activation and use. makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on message plays for the 911 operator, and
before the incident. then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
• You must pair and connect a to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible provide your name, phone number and
cell phone to SYNC. location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone information electronically.
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time 911 Assist May Not Work If
of the incident.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
366
SYNC™
911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may Some apps work automatically with no
disclose to emergency services that your setup. Other apps want you to configure
vehicle has been in a crash involving the your personal settings and personalize your
deployment of an airbag or activation of experience by creating stations or favorites.
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or We recommend you do this at home or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable outside of your vehicle.
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other Note: AppLink is not available if your
details about your vehicle or crash to assist vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
911 operators to provide the most system.
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do To Access Using the SYNC Menu
not switch the feature on.
Press the MENU button to access the
SYNC Mobile Apps menu on-screen. Then select:
The system enables voice and steering Menu Action and Description
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled Item
smartphone apps. When an app is running SYNC-Apps
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice Mobile Scroll through the list of
commands and steering wheel controls. Apps available applications and
Note: You must pair and connect your select a particular app or
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. select:
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Find New Apps
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and Accessing an App's Menu
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website. When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps wheel control to access the app menu.
will vary by region.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
367
SYNC™
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:

Menu Item Action and Description
mobile (apps | Say the name of the application after the tone.
applications) The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
help Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:

mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an

app to start it on SYNC.
list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
App permissions are organized by groups. permissions, for example:
You can grant these group permissions • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
individually. You can change a permission information to the app such as, but not
group status any time when not driving, by limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
using the settings menu. consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
368
SYNC™
• To allow your vehicle to provide location based apps.

location information, including: GPS
Note: You only need to grant permissions
and speed.
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
and voice capabilities while running in any damages or loss of privacy relating to
a background state. Push notifications usage of an app, or dissemination of any
may be particularly useful for news or vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps each connected device the first time you
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC select a mobile app using the system.
requires user consent to send and receive Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
app authorization information and updates not responsible for any additional charges
using the data plan associated with the you may receive from your service provider,
connected device. when your vehicle sends or receives data
Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. This includes
through the connected device. The any additional charges incurred due to
information is encrypted and includes your driving in areas when roaming out of a home
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous network.
usage statistics and debugging App Status
information. Updates may take place
automatically. You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
369
SYNC™
There are three possible statuses:

Update Needed The system has detected a new app

requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Up-To-Date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Update settings
Request Update Select this option from the settings menu

to manually preform a needed update.
Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been

formatted correctly and has the following
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR specifications:
MEDIA PLAYER • USB 2.0.
You can access and play music from your • File format must be FAT16/32.
digital music player over your vehicle's The format of the audio files on the USB
speaker system using the system's media device must be:
menu or voice commands. You can also • MP3.
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album. • Non DRM protected WMA.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up • WAV.
to 15,000 songs. • AAC.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any Connecting Your Digital Media
digital media player including: iPod, Zune, Player to the USB Port
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, Note: If your digital media player has a
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
370
SYNC™
To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports. USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
Press the voice button and when either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
prompted, say: source list in the audio display.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
tion
(USB [stick] | iPod You can now play

| MP3 [player]) music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do

not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:

Message Description and Action
Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE Albums
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the Genres
following:
Browse USB
Message
Reset USB
Play all
Media Voice Commands
Playlists
Press the voice button and when
Songs prompted say:
E142599
Artists
371
SYNC™
Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Command Description and Action
pause Pauses device playback.

play Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media.
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | Plays the previous track on current media.
podcast | chapter | episode]
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track.
372
SYNC™
Command Description and Action
shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order.

(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
could be the name of anything, such as a • Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles". Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
Examples of USB Commands
music from your cellular phone through
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive Bluetooth.
ways to find and play a song using voice. To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
For example, if we have a song called the MEDIA button and select:
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
Menu Item
play this song:
• Play song "Penny Lane". BT audio
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Press the MEDIA button and select either

Media Menu Features USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
373
SYNC™
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the

Accessing Your USB Song Library audio display) to select USB playback.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media.
374
SYNC™
If there are media files, you have the following options:

Display Description and Action
Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
375
SYNC™
Display Description and Action
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
You can access and view your USB songs additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
using voice commands. at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
port. inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
Press the voice button and when
You can plug in an additional USB device
prompted, say any of the following
into the second USB port.
commands:
You can access both USB devices by using
Accessing and Viewing USB Media voice commands.
(browse | search | show) all (album | To access a USB device press the voice
albums) button and when prompted say:
(browse | search | show) all (artist | Voice command
artists)
USB 1
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres) USB 2
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs one you plug in first). When you connect a
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
(browse | search | show) album ___
Bluetooth Devices and System
(browse | search | show) artist ___
Settings
(browse | search | show) genre ___
You can access these menus using the
(browse | search | show) playlist ___ audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 353).
376
SYNC™
Voice Commands for Audio Voice Command

Sources
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
Your voice system allows you to change (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
audio sources with a simple voice | which) (song | track | artist) is this |
command. (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
E142599 help
*
Press the voice button and when If equipped.
prompted say:
Radio Voice Commands
Voice Command
If you are listening to the radio,
(music | audio | entertainment) [system] press the voice button, and then
E142599 say any of the commands in the
Below are a few examples of voice following table.
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
[tune [to]] AM1 tone, say:
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | Voice Command
autoset)
Radio
[tune [to]] AM 2
You can then say any of the following
Bluetooth (audio | stereo) commands.
(disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___
tune [to] SAT *
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
Sirius * [tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
377
SYNC™
Voice Command Voice Commands
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM preset ___ tune [to] [Sirius]
FM ___ HD ___ * Help
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] Sirius You can say the
[channel] ___ channel number (0-
HD ___ * 233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands
Tune
If you are listening to a CD, press
help the voice button, and then say
*
E142599 any of the commands in the
If equipped.
following table.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped) If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
To listen to Sirius satellite radio, say:
press the voice button and, after
E142599 the tone, say: Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play

Voice Commands
You can then say any of the following
Sirius commands.
pause
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice play
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table. [play] next track
Voice Commands [play] previous track
tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off
[tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |

songs) [on]]
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
378
SYNC™
Voice Command Use the website at any time to check your

phone's compatibility, register your
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | account and set preferences as well as
disc) [on] access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
shuffle off
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
The audio control settings Review your phone's manual

There is excessive back-
on your phone may be about audio adjustments.
ground noise during a phone
affecting SYNC perform-
call.
ance.
Try turning off the device,
During a call, I can hear the
This may be a possible resetting the device,
other person but they
phone malfunction. removing the device's
cannot hear me.
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent Try turning off the device,
feature. resetting the device or
removing the device's
SYNC is not able to down- battery, then trying again.
load my phonebook. Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
This may be a possible the Add Contacts feature.
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.
379
SYNC™
Phone issues
If the missing contacts are

stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
resetting the device or
This is a phone-dependent removing the device's
feature. battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
I am having trouble from SYNC, deleting SYNC
connecting my phone to from your device and trying
SYNC. again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
This may be a possible Bluetooth connection on
phone malfunction. your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
380
SYNC™
Phone issues
Turn off the Auto phone-

book download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature. your phone's compatibility.
Text messaging is not Try turning off the device,
working on SYNC. This may be a possible resetting the device or
phone malfunction. removing the device's
USB and media issues

resetting the device,
removing the device's
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
I am having trouble This may be a possible
connecting my device. device malfunction. Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
SYNC does not recognize
leaving the device in your
my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
vehicle during very hot or
car.
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
Bluetooth audio does not This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your
stream. feature. phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
381
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Make sure you correctly

connect the device to SYNC,
The device is not connected.
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre Make sure that all song
information. details are populated.
SYNC does not recognize
The file may be corrupted.
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
The song may have copy-
change the USB settings
right protection, which does
from mass storage to MTP
not allow it to play.
class.
Voice command issues
Review the phone voice

commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand After pressing the voice icon,
what I am saying. wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
You may be speaking too
appears before saying a
soon or at the wrong time.
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist. voice commands.
of the media section.
382
SYNC™
Say the song or artist

exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
You may be saying the by Prince and the Revolution
name differently than the or Prince and the New
way you saved it. Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
The system may not be them. LOLA requires you to
reading the name the same say "L-O-L-A".
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
voice commands. contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong Wilson".
contact when I want to
make a call. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it. read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
383
SYNC™
The system works better if

The system may not be
you list full names, such as
reading the name the same
"Joe Wilson" rather than
way you are saying it.
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters. nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
Your phonebook contacts have to spell it. JAKE
may be in CAPS. requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Ensure you have a compat-

ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
AppLink Mobile Applica-
ally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
384
SYNC™
AppLink issues
login on the app on the

phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.'
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for Don't forget to restart the
example. app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
connected, my app(s) are some older versions of the phone by turning it off and
running, I restarted them, Android operating system then turning Bluetooth back
but I still cannot find any that may cause apps that on. If you are in your vehicle,
apps. were found on your previous SYNC should be able to
vehicle drive to not be found automatically re-connect to
again if you have not turned your phone if you press the
off Bluetooth. "Phone" button.
385
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
My iPhone phone is and plug the USB cable
connected, my app is back in to the phone. After a
The USB connection to
running, I restarted the app few seconds, the app should
SYNC may need to be reset.
but I still cannot find it on appear in SYNC's Mobile
SYNC. Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC, but there is no
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
sound or the sound is very
most often found on the
low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
386
SYNC™ 3
GENERAL INFORMATION Getting to Know Your System

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
WARNING: Driving while distracted touchscreen and voice commands. By
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
and injury. We strongly recommend that phone, the touchscreen provides easy
you use extreme caution when using any interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
device that may take your focus off the control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe 3 compatible apps.
against the use of any hand-held device Using the Touchscreen
while driving and encourage the use of To operate the touchscreen, you can
voice-operated systems when possible. simply touch the item or option that you
Make sure you are aware of all applicable want to select. The button changes color
local laws that may affect the use of when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E207614
387
SYNC™ 3
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 428).
D Outside This displays the current outside temperature.
Temperature
E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The touchscreen allows you quick access The Status Bar

to all of your comfort, navigation,
Additional icons also display in the status
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar bar depending on market, vehicle options
you can quickly select the feature you want and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
to use.
icons may move to the left or right
Note: Your system is equipped with a depending on what options are active.
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
388
SYNC™ 3
E223058
Callout Item Description
A Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is

muted. A caller cannot hear you.
B Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted.
C Download This icon displays when SYNC 3 has received a soft-
ware update. Pressing the icon will show more details
about the new software.
D Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.
E Wi-Fi in Range This icon displays when an available Wi-Fi network
is within range.
F Roaming This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.
G Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
389
SYNC™ 3
Callout Item Description
H 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
I Bluetooth Alert This icon displays when there is an active Bluetooth
alert.
J Bluetooth This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
Messages may also appear in the status

bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item Functions
Audio Allows you to control the media playing in

your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
Navigation Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
(If equipped) your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Apps Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Settings You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
390
SYNC™ 3
Cleaning the Touchscreen SEEK NEXT:

You can remove fingerprints with a dry, • While in radio mode, press to seek
clean, soft cloth. between memory presets.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
apply a small amount of alcohol to the mode, press to seek between songs or
cloth and try to clean it again. press and hold to fast seek.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of SEEK PREVIOUS:

solvent to clean the touchscreen. • While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
Using Voice Recognition press and hold to fast seek.
Using voice commands allows you to keep PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
your hands on the wheel and focus on or switch between calls.
what is in front of you. The system provides PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
feedback through audible tones, prompts, reject an incoming call.
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
level of interaction (voice settings). be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
The system also asks short questions PHONE ACCEPT.
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch
possible responses to your request. between media sources (modes).
When using voice commands, words and See Steering Wheel (page 80).
icons may appear in the status bar Using Your Bezel Controls
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition Depending on your vehicle and option
(page 396). package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
• Power: Switch the audio system on
Depending on your vehicle and option and off.
package, you can use different controls on • VOL: Control the volume of playing
your steering wheel to interact with the audio.
touchscreen system in different ways.
• Seek and Tune: se as you normally
VOL: Control the volume of audio output. would in audio modes.
Mute: Mute the audio output. • Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press system.
again to stop the voice prompt and • SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
immediately begin speaking. Press and to advance through available media
hold to end a voice session. modes.
391
SYNC™ 3
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound • Do not leave playing devices in your
menu where you can adjust sound and vehicle during extreme conditions as it
other audio settings. could cause them damage. See your
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to device's user guide for further
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory information.
preset. See Audio System (page 326). • For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You are speed-dependent. Their use is
can also touch the screen to switch the limited to when your vehicle is traveling
display back on. at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
• Temperature, fan and climate manual before using it with SYNC 3.
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of Speed-restricted Features
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 109). Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
Safety Information so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information,
WARNING: Driving while distracted such as Point of Interest reviews and
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
and injury. We strongly recommend that sports scores, movie times or ski
you use extreme caution when using any conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
voice-operated systems when possible. • All lists are limited so the user can view
Make sure you are aware of all applicable fewer entries (such as phone contacts
local laws that may affect the use of or recent phone call entries).
electronic devices while driving. See the following chart for more specific
examples.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
392
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone.

Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
System Functionality Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Text Messages Viewing received text messages.
Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Website
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
www.syncmaroute.ca
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest Updating Your System
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any You can choose to download the update
questions you may have. onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register. USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
Website into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
393
SYNC™ 3
Website
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
www.syncmaroute.ca select:
Menu Item
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download Settings
the update.
Wi-Fi
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum Available You can then select your
requirements. Once you have inserted the Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network. You may
USB drive into your computer, choose to Networks have to enter the security
start the download. Follow the instructions code if the network is
provided to download the files to the USB secured. The system
drive. confirms when it has
connected to the network.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates You must also give the system permission
cannot be installed in the background, to update automatically. Upon vehicle
because the files are too large. delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
To install the update in your vehicle, If you agree to automatic updates, you can
remove anything that is plugged in the USB press OK to confirm. If this selection does
ports on the media hub and plug in the not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
USB drive containing the update. When access it through the General Settings.
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation See Settings (page 428). You can also
should begin immediately. After a perform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
successful installation, the update is Troubleshooting (page 442).
available the next time the vehicle is
started. If you would like to switch this feature
Please refer to the website for any further on later, select:
actions.
Menu Item
Updating Over Wi-Fi Settings
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
General
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply. Automatic From this menu, you can
System enable automatic updates.
Updates If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
394
SYNC™ 3
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are Privacy Information

enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is When you connect a cellular phone to
available, it downloads at that time. SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
Software downloads can take place for up your vehicle that links to that cellular
to 30 minutes after you have switched your phone. This profile helps in offering you
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt more cellular features and operating more
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If efficiently. Among other things, this profile
a download does not complete for any may contain data about your cellular
reason, the download continues where it phone book, text messages (read and
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected unread), and call history, including history
opportunity. Upon activation of an update, of calls when your cell phone was not
a banner displays on the touchscreen connected to the system. In addition, if you
indicating the system update. Select the connect a media device, the system
icon to see more detail. This icon displays creates and retains an index of supported
for two ignition cycles. media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
To switch this feature off: minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
Menu Item used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
Settings
The cellular profile, media device index,
General and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
Automatic In this menu selection, you accessible only in your vehicle when the
System can change the selection cellular phone or media player is
Updates for automatic updates to connected.
OFF.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
Support your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
The SYNC support team is available to information. You can find more information
help you with any questions you are not about the Master Reset in General
able to answer on your own. Settings. See Settings (page 428). System
data cannot be accessed without special
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST. equipment and access to your vehicle's
United States: 1-800-392-3673. SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access the system
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
data for any purpose other than as
Times are subject to change due to described absent consent, a court order,
holidays. or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
395
SYNC™ 3
HOME SCREEN Press the voice control button

on the steering wheel and wait
E142599 for the voice prompt.
Note: Press the voice control button again
to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
speaking.
Note: Turn the volume control when a voice
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: Press and hold the voice control
button on the steering wheel to use Siri on
your iOS device.
The following voice commands are
E224134 designed to help you from any screen:
• List of Commands
A See Entertainment (page 402).
• Help
B See Phone (page 412).
The following tables list some of the more
C See Navigation (page 417). frequently used voice commands. For a
complete list of voice commands, refer to
the regional Ford website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands. This allows you
to keep your hands on the steering wheel
and focus on what is in front of you.
General
Voice Command Description
___ List of Commands 1

Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Cancel Cancel an active voice session.
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Go back Return to the previous screen.
Main Menu Go to the main menu.
396
SYNC™ 3
Next Page Go to the next page.

Previous Page Go to the previous page.
1 Add the name of the feature to the command.
Entertainment
Audio Source
Radio Use the radio.

CD Player Use the CD player.
Bluetooth Stereo Use a Bluetooth device.
USB Use a USB or media player.
Radio
AM Listen to AM radio.
AM ___ 1
Tune to a specific AM frequency.
DAB Listen to DAB radio.
FM Listen to FM radio.
FM ___ 1
Tune to a specific FM frequency.
1 Add the radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.
397
SYNC™ 3
USB and Media Player
Browse All Albums

Browse All Artists
Browse All Audiobooks
Browse All Genres Browse your music.
Browse All Playlists
Browse All Podcasts
Browse All Songs
Browse Album ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
1
Browse your music by category.
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Podcast ___
Play Album ___
Play Artist ___
1
Play Genre ___ Play your music by category.
Play Playlist ___
Play Song ___
1 Add
an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcast
name or track name to the command. Say the name exactly as it appears on your device.
Climate Control
Note: Not available through the system on
all models.
398
SYNC™ 3
Set Temperature ___ Set a temperature between 60°F (15.5°C) and 85°F
1
(29.5°C).
Max Set the temperature to maximum.
Min Set the temperature to minimum.
1 Add the required temperature to the command.
Phone
Pair Phone Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth enabled device.

Redial Redial the last number that you dialed.
Dial ___ 1
Dial a number.
Call ___ 2
Call a specific contact from your phonebook.
Call ___ ___ Call a specific contact from your phonebook at a
3
specific location.
Listen to Message Listen to a text message.
Listen to Message ___ Listen to a specific text message from a list of text
messages.
Reply to Message Reply to the last text message.
1 Add the number you want to dial to the command.
2 Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the name exactly as
it appears on your device.
3 Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the first
and the last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
399
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)

Setting a Destination
Find an Address Enter a destination address. When prompted,

provide the house number, the street and city.
Find a POI Search for a point of interest by name or by category.
Destination Nearest ___ 1
Search for a nearby point of interest by category.
Find a POI Category 1
Search for a point of interest category.
Drive Home Set your saved home address as your destination.
Drive to Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Show Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destina-
tions.
Show Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
1 Add a point of interest name or category to the command.
Route Guidance
Cancel Route Cancel the current route.

Detour Select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeat the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Display an overview of the route.
Show Traffic Display a list of traffic events on your route.
Show All Traffic Display a list of all traffic events.
Show Map Display the map on the touchscreen.
400
SYNC™ 3
North Up Display a two-dimensional map with north toward

the top of the touchscreen.
Heading UP Display a two-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the top of the touchscreen.
Show 3D Display a three-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the front.
Apps
General
Mobile Applications Start an app. The system prompts your for the app
name.
List Applications Get a list of apps running on your device.
Find Applications Search and connect to apps running on your device.
Active App
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.
Exit ___ 1
Close an app.
1 Add an app name to the command.
Voice Settings
Voice Settings Go to the voice settings menu.

Interaction Mode Novice Switch long voice prompts on.
Interaction Mode Advanced Switch short voice prompts on.
Phone Confirmation On Switch call confirmation on. The system prompts
you to confirm before making a call.
401
SYNC™ 3
Phone Confirmation Off Switch call confirmation off. The system does not
prompt you to confirm before making a call.
Voice Command Lists On Display the display of voice commands on.
Voice Command Lists Off Switch the display of voice commands off.
Switching Automatic Blower Motor

Automatic Blower Motor Speed Speed Reduction Off
Reduction
Simultaneously press the A/C and
If necessary, the system decreases the recirculated air buttons.
blower motor speed when you are using
voice commands to reduce the amount of
background noise in your vehicle. It returns
to normal when you are finished.
ENTERTAINMENT
E207617
402
SYNC™ 3
You can access these options using the

Message Message and description touchscreen or voice commands.
A Sources Sources
B Direct Tune Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
C Presets
Menu item
AM
FM
SIRIUS *
CD
USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio Once you have entered the station's

call numbers, you can select:
Tuning a Station
Menu item Action and descrip-
You can use the tune or seek controls on tion
the radio bezel to select a station.
Enter Press to begin
To tune a station using the playing the station
touchscreen, select: you have entered.
Menu item Cancel Press to exit

without changing
Direct Tune the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in Presets

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are To set a new preset, tune to the station
currently listening to. and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
You can press the backspace button to briefly while the system saves the station
delete the previously entered number. and then returns.
403
SYNC™ 3
There are two preset banks available for SiriusXM satellite radio is a
AM and three banks for FM. To access subscription-based satellite radio service
additional presets, tap the preset button. that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
The indicator on the preset button shows news, weather, traffic and entertainment
which bank of presets you are currently programming. Your factory-installed
viewing. SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If that begins on the date of sale or lease of
Activated) your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active For more information on extended
subscription. subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
E234451 Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Menu item Action and description
Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
404
SYNC™ 3
Menu item Action and description
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Live When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
There are three preset banks available for

Memory Presets SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
To set a preset, tune to the station then
preset button shows which bank of presets
press and hold one of the memory preset
you are currently viewing.
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
the station is stored. Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
interference ence and the audio system may mute.
405
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
Message Cause Action
Acquiring Signal Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel. shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear
system failure present. shortly, or with an ignition key
SIRIUS system failure cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
signal… usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating… Update of channel program- No action required. The
ming in progress. process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1- Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
888-539-7474 longer available. 539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
None found. Check All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
channel guide. category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked. that station.
SIRIUS Subscription SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
updated channels available for your
vehicle.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio

HD Radio™ Information (If Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Available) Settings (page 428).
Note: This feature may not be available in Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
all markets. available in all markets.
406
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your station, and then changes to orange when
system has a special receiver that allows digital audio is playing. When this logo is
it to receive digital broadcasts (where available, you may also see Title and Artist
available) in addition to the analog fields on-screen.
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital The multicast indicator appears in FM
broadcasts provide a better sound quality mode (only) if the current station is
than analog broadcasts with free, broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
crystal-clear audio and no static or The highlighted numbers signify available
distortion. For more information, and a digital channels where new or different
guide to available stations and content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming, please visit: programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
Website multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
www.hdradio.com
Note: There is also an additional feature
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a for stations that have more than 1 HD
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
you may notice the following indicators on HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
your screen: Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message Action and description
Presets Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
407
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or The radio is shifting between No action required. The recep-
blending in and out. analog and digital audio. tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
408
SYNC™ 3
Issues Cause Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster. *
playing audio.
There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster. *
currently selected
frequency.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under Website

license from DTS Inc. U.S. and foreign
patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of
DTS Inc. Ford Motor Company and DTS CD
Inc. are not responsible for the content sent
using HD Radio technology. Content may Once you select this option, the system
be changed, added or deleted at any time returns you to the main audio screen.
at the station owner's discretion.
The current audio information appears on
* You can find the form here: the screen.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or

play buttons to control the audio playback.
409
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB access media that you store on your

Bluetooth device or USB device such as
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
410
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
USB Ports Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
E211463
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
The USB ports are in the center console or from your USB device by metadata tags.
behind a small access door in the Metadata tags, which are descriptive
instrument panel. software identifiers embedded in the
This feature allows you to plug in USB media files, provide information about the
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives file.
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they If your indexed media files contain no
support this feature. information embedded in these metadata
Select this option to play audio from your tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
USB device. metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
Apps 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as Pandora or iHeartRadio
through a USB or Bluetooth enabled
device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 425).
411
SYNC™ 3
PHONE 4. Confirm that the six-digit number

appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
WARNING: Driving while distracted pairing is successful.
and injury. We strongly recommend that 6. Your phone may prompt you to give
you use extreme caution when using any the system permission to access
device that may take your focus off the information. To check your phone’s
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe compatibility, see your phone’s manual
operation of your vehicle. We recommend or visit the website.
while driving and encourage the use of Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
voice-operated systems when possible. Menu Item
local laws that may affect the use of Add Phone
Then select:
Hands-free calling is one of the main
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands. 1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
While the system supports a variety of 2. Select your phone's name when it
features, many are dependent on your cell appears on the touchscreen.
phone’s functionality.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the appearing on your phone matches the
First Time six-digit number on the touchscreen.
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with pairing is successful.
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to information. To check your phone’s
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if compatibility, see your phone’s manual
necessary. or visit the website.
To add a phone, select: At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
Menu Item following functions:
Add Phone • Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. • Dialing a number.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the • Call waiting notification.
system on your phone. • Caller identification.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
412
SYNC™ 3
Other features, such as text messaging Websites

using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features. www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
Websites
a phone.
owner.ford.com
G
E251249
A Recent Displays your recent calls.

Call List You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
413
SYNC™ 3
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down
menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
All Incoming Outgoing Missed
B Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabet-
ical order.
A-Z Jump Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
C Phone Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the
Settings phone settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring
tones and alerts.
D Change Gives you access to the list of paired or connected
Device Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a
device.
E Text Displays all recent text messages.
Messages
F Phone Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Keypad Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call Press this button to begin a
call.
G Do Not Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatic-
Disturb ally. Text message notifications do not display on the
screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services

may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 396). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
414
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, To accept the call, select:

select:
Menu Item
Accept
Contacts You can then select the Note: You can also accept the call by
name of the contact you pressing the phone button on the steering
want to call. Any numbers wheel.
stored for that contact
display along with any To reject the call, select:
stored contact photos. You
can then select the Menu Item
number that you want to
call. The system begins the Reject
call. Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
To call a number from your recent calls, wheel.
select:
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
Menu Item Action and Description logs it as a missed call.
Recent Call You can then select an During a Phone Call
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
To call a number that is not stored in with the call duration.
your phone, select: The phone status items are also visible:
Menu Item Action and Description • Signal Strength.
• Battery.
Phone Select the digits of the
Keypad number you wish to call. • 911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 428).
Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during
Pressing the backspace button deletes the an active phone call:
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
415
SYNC™ 3
Item
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
End Call Immediately end a the cell phone or
phone call. You can back to SYNC 3.
also press the
button on the Text Messaging
steering wheel.
Note: Downloading and sending text
Keypad Press this to access messages using Bluetooth are cell
the phone keypad. phone-dependent features.
Mute You can switch the Note: Certain features in text messaging
microphone off so are speed-dependent and not available
the caller does not when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
hear you. 3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View View the text on the touchscreen.
Call To call the sender.
Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close To exit the screen.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
and Android Auto to access your phone. features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Apple CarPlay
Auto, you can:
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
• Make calls. newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
• Send and receive messages. the latest iOS version is recommended.
• Listen to music. 1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
• Use your phone's voice assistant. USB Port (page 347).
416
SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the

touchscreen. Menu Item
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple Android Auto Preferences
CarPlay. Enable Android Auto
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when Note: Android Auto must be switched on
plugged into a USB port. after plugging in your device.
To disable this feature from the To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select: Settings screen, select:
Menu Item Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select: device and select:
Disable Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple Note: You may need to slide your Settings
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
app. Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay To return to SYNC 3, select the
support. speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
Android Auto touchscreen, and then touch the option to
Android Auto is compatible with most return to SYNC.
devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
1. Download the Android Auto app to support.
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require NAVIGATION
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be Your navigation system is comprised of
available within your current market. two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 347).
3. To switch this feature on from the
Settings screen, scroll left on the
screen and select:
417
SYNC™ 3
Map Mode North up (2D map) always

shows the northern direction to
Map mode shows advanced viewing be upward on the screen.
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks E207749
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of 3D map mode provides an
buildings, visible land use, landscape elevated perspective of the map.
features, and detailed railroad Adjust this viewing angle and
infrastructure for the most essential cities E207748 rotate the map 180 degrees by
around the globe. touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value. Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
3D city models are complete 3D models map away from your vehicle’s
of entire city areas including navigable current location.
E207751
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in Mute: Press to mute the audio
3D map mode only. Coverage of these navigation guidance. Press the
varies and improves with updated map button again to un-mute the
releases. E251780 guidance.
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207752 E251779
Select the zoom out icon to see Points of Interest (POI)

a farther away view of the map. grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207753 E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
You can adjust the view in preset at the same location a box is used to
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in display a single category icon instead of
or out of the map. repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
The information bar tells you the names clutter. When you select the box on the
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover map, a pop-up appears indicating how
over them with the crosshair curser. many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can change your view of the map by You can scroll through and select POIs
tapping on the location indicator icon on from this list.
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options: If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
Heading up (2D map) This station icons automatically display on the
always shows the direction of map.
forward travel to be upward on
E207750 the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
418
SYNC™ 3
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic You can choose to display traffic icons on
and Travel Link (where available), traffic the map representing twelve different
flow will be indicated on the map by green types of incidents. See Settings (page
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red 428).
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is You can set a destination by hovering
indicated where the information is above a location and selecting:
available and varies across the US.
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item Description
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
419
SYNC™ 3
Latitude and Longitude

(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete Select this option to remove all previous destinations.
All
Home Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Save Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
420
SYNC™ 3
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:

Save This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible.
Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
421
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen you destination, press:

Start The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom

Navigation Menu of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button
Menu
You can then select:
Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation.
Highway Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
Exit Info of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
422
SYNC™ 3
Button
Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 428).
Settings
Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road.
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
View Route Press this to see a map of the full route.
Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.
Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can Optimize Order
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
To return to Go
your route
press:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying

Waypoints glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route. 2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
To add a waypoint: has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
423
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press: Go
SYNC AppLink cityseeker (If Equipped)
The AppLink app allows you to use some Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone. information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
First Mile Navigation Canada and 15 in Mexico).
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your cityseeker, when available, is a service that
destination. provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
POI Search hotels and attractions.
Your paired phone can be used to access When you have selected a point of interest,
additional points of interest (POI). These the location and information appear, such
points of interest can only be access when as address, phone number and a star
your phone is paired. rating.
Send To Car Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
You can send destinations to your average room or meal price and the web
navigation system using a computer or address. This screen displays the point of
phone using AppLink. interest icons.
424
SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide The system calculates a reasonable

information such as star rating, average efficient route based on available speed
cost, review, handicap access, hours of limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
operation, and website address. know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
information such as star rating, price
difference in minutes or miles with the
category, review, check-in and checkout
SYNC 3 route.
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include: Navigation Map Updates
• Restaurant
Annual navigation map updates are
• Business center available for purchase through your
• Handicap facilities dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
• Laundry the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
• Refrigerator visit:
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center Website
• Internet access www.navigation.com/sync
• Pool
• Wi-Fi You need to specify the make and model
Attractions include nearby landmarks, of your vehicle to determine if there is an
amusement parks, historic buildings and update available.
more. cityseeker can provide information HERE is the digital map provider for the
such as star rating, reviews, hour of navigation application. If you find map data
operation and admission price. errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
Equipped) evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available investigation by e-mail.
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate Map coverage includes the USA (including
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
and Travel Link information. It helps you Canada and Mexico.
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the APPS
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps The system enables voice, steering wheel,
(page 425). and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.
425
SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
vary by market. is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
Note: You must pair and connect your the required app is running on the mobile
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to device.
access AppLink.
Menu Item Action and Descrip-
Note: iPhone users need to connect the tion
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps, Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search
supported smartphone devices and and connect to
troubleshooting tips please visit: compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Websites
owner.ford.com Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
Note: Make sure you have an active account using the data plan associated with the
for the app that you have downloaded. connected device.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure The connected device sends data to Ford
your personal settings and personalize your in the United States. The information is
experience by creating stations or encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
favorites.We recommend you do this at module number, odometer, usage
home or outside of your vehicle. statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
Note: We encourage you to review the necessary to provide this service,
smartphone app’s terms of service and troubleshoot, and improve products and
privacy policies because Ford is not services and to offer you products and
responsible for your app or its use of data. services that may interest you where
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system allowed by law.
feature. Accessing mobile apps through Note: You must enable mobile apps for
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto each connected device the first time you
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps select a mobile app using the system.
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
Smartphone Connectivity information to any time.
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, not responsible for any additional charges
the app needs to be running in the you may receive from your service provider,
background of your phone. If you shut down when your vehicle sends or receives data
the app on your phone, it shuts down the through the connected device. This includes
app on SYNC 3 as well. any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
426
SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable apps through operation of your vehicle. We recommend
settings. See Settings (page 428). against the use of any hand-held device
App Permissions while driving and encourage the use of
The system organizes the App permissions Make sure you are aware of all applicable
into groups. You can grant these group local laws that may affect the use of
permissions individually. You can change electronic devices while driving.
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu. Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
While in the settings menu, you can also not be available in all markets.
see the data included in each group.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, Travel Link, your vehicle must have
the system may ask you to grant certain navigation.
permissions, for example Vehicle
Note: A paid subscription is required to
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
access and use these features. Go to
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
can enable all groups or none of them
information.
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
permission control. click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
Note: You are only prompted to grant
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Note: If you disable group permissions,
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
vehicles.
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu. When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If best gas prices, find movie listings, get
Equipped) current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
427
SYNC™ 3
Traffic on Route Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
Traffic Nearby places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Area Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Sound
SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound Settings
Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
428
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Speed Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
Compensated or turns the feature off.
Vol.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Podcast Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Cover Art Priority Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote® Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
Management such as genre, artist, album.
429
SYNC™ 3
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion media device.
Update Media Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
Index
You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Clock Format Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
Reset Clock to When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any Bluetooth

updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item Action
Bluetooth Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Phone

Bluetooth-enabled device.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth the system before using the functions in
device is the same as pairing a phone. See hands-free mode.
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
430
SYNC™ 3
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.

To add a phone, select: 2. Select your phone's name when it
Menu Item appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Add Phone appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the pairing is successful.
system on your phone.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
3. Select your vehicle's make and model the system permission to access
as it displays on your phone. information. To check your phone’s
4. Confirm that the six-digit number compatibility, see your phone’s manual
appearing on your phone matches the or visit the website.
six-digit number on the touchscreen. Other features, such as text messaging
5. The touchscreen indicates when the using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
pairing is successful. download, are phone-dependent features.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give To check your phone’s compatibility,
the system permission to access see your phone’s manual or visit the
information. To check your phone’s website:
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website. Website
Alternatively, to add a phone, select: owner.ford.com

www.syncmyride.ca
Menu Item www.syncmaroute.ca
Add Phone
Once you have paired a device you can
Then select: adjust the following options.
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
View Devices
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
Device the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
431
SYNC™ 3
Disconnect
Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device

name allows you to see phone and device
information
Manage Contacts
Auto-Download Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Contacts phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name Last Name
Re-download Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Contacts
Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Set Phone Ringtone

No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
432
SYNC™ 3
Text Messaging
No Alert No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:

Mute Audio in When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
Privacy duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
Warning you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
Notification is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off

911 Assist setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
Note: This service is only available in the you can adjust the following option:
United States and Canada.
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
433
SYNC™ 3
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
Sirius XM (If equipped)

Set Category for After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which
Seek are inside that selected category.
Parental Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows
Lockout you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Edit Alerts Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.
The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary
to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
434
SYNC™ 3
Map Preferences
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
Icons to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always Use ___ Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Route calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
435
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a

Guidance route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
Roads route.
Avoid If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
Ferries/Car a navigation route.
Trains
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Prompts
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only Only voice instructions are given.
Tones Only Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
The connected devices sends data to Ford

Mobile Apps in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
You can enable the control of compatible module number, anonymous usage
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or statistics and debugging information.
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable Updates may take place automatically.
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization Note: All Mobile Apps may not be
information and updates using the data compatible with the system.
plan associated with the connected device.
436
SYNC™ 3
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford

is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Mobile Apps Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has No update is The system is trying to receive
detected a new app required. an update.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
Request Update Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
437
SYNC™ 3
Request Update
All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
be SYNC 3 sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
enabled apps can see which signals are included in each group.
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for General

any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any Access and adjust the system settings,
vehicle data that you approve Ford to voice features, as well as phone, navigation
provide to an app. and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English,

Spanish or French.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Panel Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
System Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi & Hotspot
You can access the following:
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
438
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Available This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
Notifications network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)

You can access the following:
Wi-Fi Hotspot Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

On/Off
Settings Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.
Data Usage Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.
Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Note: It is the account owner’s
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition responsibility to remove the vehicle from
is On and may remain operational while the the vehicle network carrier account when
ignition is Off. ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier agreement, your vehicle network carrier for more
information.
coverage and availability.
439
SYNC™ 3
Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
vehicle network carrier to provide the This sets the color to the highest intensity.
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with You can drag the colors up and down to
your vehicle network carrier agreement, increase or decrease the intensity.
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old To switch ambient lighting off, press the
to new embedded modem and to confirm active color once or drag the active color
any updates are successfully delivered. all the way down to zero intensity.
Note: : For your convenience data usage Vehicle
may be available for monitoring under
Settings but may not reflect actual or Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
current usage. The vehicle network carrier these features.
is responsible for providing information You can select the following features to
about your account. Please contact the update their settings.
vehicle network carrier for more information.
Note: : Ford may need to update operating Door Keypad Code (If equipped)
system software on your vehicle, including Select this button to add or erase a
security updates and bug fixes, to keep personal door keypad code. To add or
connected services current, like Vehicle erase a personal code, you first need to
Hotspot, without prior notice to you. enter the five-digit factory set code. You
Note: If you do not have an active vehicle can find this code on the owner's wallet
hotspot data plan, open your web browser card in the glove box or from your
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol authorized dealer.
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red,
Aids yellow and green highlights at the top of the image.
Rear Camera You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
440
SYNC™ 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
Selecting this button on the settings menu registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode You can select:
Auto The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Off The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Auto Dim Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts

and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
441
SYNC™ 3
Valet Mode To unlock the system, enter the same pin

number. The system reconnects to your
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. phone and all of your options are available
No information is accessible until the again.
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN However, should questions arise, please
you chose but you must use the same PIN refer to the tables below.
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code. To check your cell phone's compatibility,
visit the Ford website.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center. Website
United States: 1-800-392-3673 owner.ford.com

Canada: 1-800-565-3673 www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
Cell phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
There is back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC 3 performance.
During a call, I Try switching your cell phone off, resetting

can hear the it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
other person Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
malfunction.
but they cannot 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
hear me. icon on the phone screen.
During a call, I To restart your system, shut down the
cannot hear the engine, open and close the door, and then
The system may need to
other person lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
be restarted.
and they cannot Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me. and the lighted USB port is off.
SYNC 3 is not This is a cell phone-
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
able to down- dependent feature.
load my phone-
book.
442
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve

contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Possible cell phone You must switch on your cell phone and
malfunction. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
The system contacts from your phone. Refer to your
says "Phone- cell manual.
book down-
If the missing contacts are stored on your
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
memory.
book is empty or
is missing You must switch on your cell phone and
contacts. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phone-
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
trouble deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
connecting my again.
cell phone to Possible cell phone
SYNC 3. malfunction. Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Text messaging dependent feature. Check your cell phone's compatibility.
is not working
on SYNC 3. Possible cell phone Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then try again.
443
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.

• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
dependent feature.
incoming text messages.
Audible text
messages do Because each cell phone is different, refer
not work on my to your device's manual for the specific cell
cell phone. This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
444
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try

switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having Possible device malfunc- cable.
trouble tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
connecting my
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
device.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
does not 3 and that you have started the media
stream. The device is not player on your device.
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
information.
SYNC 3 does The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
not recognize corrupted. version.
music that is on
my device. The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
The file format is not Convert the file to a supported format. See
supported by SYNC 3. Entertainment (page 402).
445
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page

re-indexed. 428).
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
When I connect to SYNC 3.
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Wi-Fi Issues
Failed connection. Password error. Verify password.

Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi
signal.
Multiple Access points Use a unique name for your
within range with the same SSID, don’t use the default
SSID. name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as
part of the MAC address.
Disconnecting after Weak signal probably due Position the vehicle close to
successful connection. to distance from the the hotspot with the front of
hotspot, obstruction or high the vehicle facing the
interference. hotspot direction and
remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and
cordless phones may cause
interference.
446
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 There may be an obstruction If the vehicle is equipped
despite being near a between SYNC 3 and the with heated windshield, try
hotspot. hotspot. positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not
facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield,
position the vehicle to face
the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the
windows in the direction of
the hotspot if that is feas-
ible.
Try to remove other
obstructions that may
impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
A hotspot is not listed in the The hotspot was defined as Please set the network to
list of available networks. a hidden network. visible and try again.
SYNC 3 is not seen when SYNC 3 does not currently SYNC 3 currently does not
searching for Wi-Fi networks provide a hotspot. provide a hotspot
from your phone or other
devices.
Software download takes Poor signal strength, too far Check the signal quality
too long. from the hotspot, hotspot is (under network details), if
supporting multiple SYNC 3 indicates good or
connections, slow Internet excellent, test with another
connection or other prob- high-speed equipped
lems. hotspot where the environ-
ment is more predictable.
SYNC 3 seems to connect It is possible that there is no Test the connection with
with a hotspot and the new software. The another device, if the
signal strength is excellent connected hotspot may be hotspot requires a subscrip-
but the software is not being a managed one and it tion, you may contact the
updated. requires either a subscrip- service provider.
tion or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
447
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Make sure you have a

compatible smartphone; an
Android with OS 2.3 or
higher or an iPhone 3GS or
AppLink Mobile Applica- newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
tions: When I select You did not connect an Additionally, make sure you
"Connect Mobile Apps," Applink Compatible phone pair and connect your phone
SYNC 3 does not find any to SYNC 3. to SYNC 3 in order to find
applications. AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB
cable.
Make sure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Make sure the app is running
AppLink-enabled apps are on your phone. Some apps
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on require you to register or
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. login to the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC 3 find the
application if you cannot
Sometimes apps do not discover it inside the vehicle.
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open On an Android device, if
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC 3, apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for option, then select it and
example. restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
select the phone's settings
menu and select 'Apps',
448
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
then find the particular app

and choose 'Force stop.' Do
not forget to restart the app
afterward, then select
"Connect Mobile Apps" on
SYNC 3.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
then appear in SYNC 3's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and
connected, my app(s) are on some older versions of then on to reset it on your
running, I restarted them, the Android operating phone. If you are in your
but I still cannot find any system that may cause apps vehicle, SYNC 3 should be
apps. that were found on your able to automatically re-
previous vehicle drive to not connect to your phone if you
be found again if you did not press the "Phone" button.
switch Bluetooth off.
449
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone is connected, my
back in to the phone. After a
app is running, I restarted You may need to reset the
the app but I still cannot find USB connection to SYNC 3.
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
it on SYNC 3.
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Increase the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The Bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC 3, but there is
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
no sound or the sound is
most often found on the
very low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
Bluetooth ports that apps 3 to find. If the app has a
I can only see some of the can use to connect. If you "Ford SYNC" setting, disable
AppLink apps running on my have more AppLink apps on that setting in the app's
phone listed in the SYNC 3 your phone than the number settings menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. of available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
Review the cell phone voice commands

and the media voice commands at the
You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
not understand
voice session to find a list of voice
what I am
commands there.
saying.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong you state your command.
time.
450
SYNC™ 3
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
Make sure you are saying the complete title
SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
not understand appears on your device.
Nettles".
the name of a
song or artist. If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
characters that are not and playlists names do not have any special
being recognized by characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does exactly as it appears on your phone. For
the name exactly as it
not understand example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
appears on your phone-
or is calling the say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
book.
wrong contact is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
when I want to The contact name may
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
contain special charac-
have any special characters like *, - or +.
ters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
The SYNC 3 rules of the selected language to the
voice control contact names stored on your cell phone.
system is having You may not be saying Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
trouble recog- the name exactly as it manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
nizing foreign appears on your phone- for phonebook and then contact name.
names stored book. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
on my cell 3 will read the contact name to you, giving
phone. you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
451
SYNC™ 3
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
trouble recog- rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
nizing foreign stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
tracks, artists, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
albums, genres for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC 3.
and playlist U2) such that you can always use the
names from my English pronunciation for these artists.
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
The system voice.
generates voice
prompts and SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3 uses text-to- features for a wide range of languages.
the pronunci-
speech voice prompt Dialing a contact name directly from the
ation of some
technology. phonebook without pre-recording (for
words may not
be accurate for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
my language. track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
452
SYNC™ 3
General
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
display does not
language for the instru- current active language.
match the
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
language
display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3

troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford
Website.
Ford Support
Customer Relation- United States: 1-800-392-3673

ship Center
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Website owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
453
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories Lifestyle

that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the • Ash cup and smokers packages.
online store web site: • Cargo area illumination.
• Cargo area mats.
Web Address (United States)
• Cargo liners.
www.Accessories.Ford.com • Cargo organizers.
*
• Device holder.
Web Address (Canada) • Hitch and towing accessories.
www.Accessories.Ford.ca • Roof racks.
*
• Seat covers.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace • Window grilles.
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be Peace of Mind
defective in factory-supplied materials or *
workmanship during the warranty period, • Back-up alarm.
as well as any component damaged by the • Hitch scan rear park assist sensor.
*
defective accessories. *
• Roadside assistance kits.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford accessory through the warranty that • Keyless entry keypad.
provides the greatest benefit: • Remote start.
*
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. • Telematics.
• The remainder of your new vehicle • Vehicle security system.
limited warranty.
• Wheel locks.
Contact an authorized dealer for details *
The accessory manufacturer designs,
and a copy of the warranty.
develops and therefore warrants Ford
Exterior Style Licensed Accessories, and does not design
*
or test these accessories to Ford Motor
• Hood protector. Company engineering requirements.
• Side window deflectors.
* Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details
• Splash guards. and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
• Step bars. Accessories product limited warranty from
• Wheel covers.
* the accessory manufacturer.
• Wheelhouse liners.
Interior Style
• Floor liners.
• Ambient lighting.
• Carpeted floor mats.
454
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep AUXILIARY SWITCHES

the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your The auxiliary switchboard on the center
vehicle: console makes aftermarket customization
• When adding accessories, equipment, easier, with four prewired switches
passengers and luggage to your attached to the power distribution box for
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight electrical accessories.
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use E163431
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio When using the auxiliary switches for an
transmitters, for example two-way extended period of time, we recommend
radios, telephones and anti-theft that the engine is running to prevent the
alarms. Any such equipment installed battery from running out of charge.
in your vehicle should comply with A fuse and relay kit is included with this
Federal Communications Commission option. The kit contains the required fuses
(FCC) and Canadian Radio and relays that are included under the
Telecommunications Commission driver seat in the pre-fusebox. Refer to the
(CRTC) regulations and should be instructions included with the kit. See an
installed only by an authorized dealer. authorized dealer for service.
• Mobile communications systems may
There is one power lead connector for each
harm the operation of your vehicle,
switch. These can be found at either the
particularly if they are not properly
43-way connector for the AUX 1 and AUX
designed for automotive use.
2 switches or the 6-way connector for the
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add AUX 3 and AUX 4 switches. Both
any non-Ford electrical or electronic connectors are behind the passenger side
accessories or components to your cup holder.
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability,
and may adversely affect the
performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
455
Accessories
The relays are coded as follows:

Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Rating
1 CAC05 Yellow 20A
AUX 1
1 CAC06 Green with brown 20A
AUX 2
trace
1 CAC13 Blue with orange 40A
AUX 3
trace
2 CAC14 Yellow with orange 40A
AUX 4
trace
1 Operates when you switch the igntion on.
2 Operates only when the engine is running.
If different switch functionality is required

please contact the Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service. See Special Notices
(page 13).
456
Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership.
Ford Protect Extended Service • Repairs performed by factory trained
Plans (U.S. Only) technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect extended service plan means Rental Car Reimbursement

peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and 1st day Rental Benefit
provides more protection beyond the New If you bring your car into your dealer for
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford the day.
Protect extended service plans!
Extended Rental Benefits
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
One trip to the Service Center could easily repairs, you are eligible for rental car
exceed the price of your Ford Protect coverage, including warranty repairs, and
extended service plan. With Ford Protect Field Service Actions.
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising Roadside Assistance
repair costs.
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle including:
Components • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
There are four mechanical Ford Protect jump starts.
extended service plans with different levels • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Travel expense reimbursement for
details. lodging, meals and rental car.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
comprehensive coverage. With over coverage or other transportation.
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to Transferable Coverage
list what’s not covered.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, Protect extended service plan coverage
and includes many high-tech items. expires, you can transfer any remaining
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
more peace of mind.
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
457
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Protect extended service plan also You can get more protection for your
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
covers all scheduled maintenance, and extended service plan. Ford Protect
selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine Belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
o-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only). added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 10% down payment will provide you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of
security and benefits Ford Protect Canada, the United States and Mexico are
extended service plan has to offer while not eligible for Ford Protect extended
paying over time. You are pre-approved service plan coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. For
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Ford Protect extended service plan that is
P.O. Box 321067 right for you.
Detroit, MI 48232
458
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 12-month or 12,000 mi (20,000 km) parts
inadequate maintenance and may help to and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the correct
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep the cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to crash repairs.
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
the specifications identified in this owner's or body shops. Please contact your dealer
manual. See Capacities and for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts Maintenance is an investment that pays
affected by the lack of maintenance. dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your maintain the correct performance of your
Dealership? vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
Factory-trained Technicians maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L or 3.7L Engine
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Your vehicle is equipped with the
dealership about the training and Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
certification their technicians have displays a message in the information
received. display at the correct oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
459
When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals

the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil This owner's manual and the Ford
change within two weeks or 500 miles Workshop Manual list the recommended
(800 kilometers) of the message additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
appearing. Make sure you reset the We do not recommend using chemicals or
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil additives not approved by us as part of
change. See Changing the Engine Oil your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
and Oil Filter (page 235). consult your warranty information.
If your information display resets Oils, Fluids and Flushing
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from normal operating characteristic and, by
your last oil change. Never exceed one year itself, does not necessarily indicate a
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil concern or that the fluid needs to be
change intervals. changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
All Vehicles dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built foreign material contamination
with multiple, complex, performance immediately.
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
specifications and performance features. fluids at the specified intervals or in
That is why it is important to rely upon your conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
dealership to correctly diagnose and repair viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
your vehicle. sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
Ford Motor Company has recommended flushed only with new fluid that is the same
maintenance intervals for various parts as that required to fill and operate the
and component systems based upon system or using a Ford-approved flushing
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company chemical.
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement Owner Checks and Services
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and Make sure you perform the following basic
recommends against maintenance maintenance checks and inspections every
schedules that deviate from the scheduled month or at six-month intervals.
maintenance information.
Check every month
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Engine oil level.
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your Function of all interior and exterior lights.
vehicle.
Tires (including spare) for wear and
correct pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
460
Multi-point inspection
Check every six months
Exterior lamps and hazard warning
Battery connections. Clean if necessary. system operation.
Body and door drain holes for obstruc- *
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary.
tions. Clean if necessary.
For oil and fluid leaks.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant
strength. Horn operation.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses.
necessary.
Suspension component for leaks or
Hinges, latches and outside locks for damage.
correct operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Steering and linkage.
Parking brake for correct operation.
Tires (including spare) for wear and
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and **
correct pressure .
function.
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag
and seatbelt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean *
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir,
or replace blades as necessary.
automatic transmission, power steering (if
equipped with hydraulic power assist
Multi-point Inspection steering) and window washer.
**
In order to keep your vehicle running If your vehicle is equipped with a
correctly, it is important to have the temporary mobility kit, check the tire
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. sealant expiration Use By date on the
This can help identify potential issues and canister. Replace as needed.
prevent major problems. We recommend
having the following multi-point inspection Be sure to ask your dealership service
performed at every scheduled advisor or technician about the multi-point
maintenance interval to help make sure vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
your vehicle keeps running correctly. way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
Multi-point inspection immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
Accessory drive belt(s).
Battery performance.
Engine air filter.
Exhaust system.
461
NORMAL SCHEDULED monitor helps reduce the cost of owning

your vehicle and reduces environmental
MAINTENANCE waste at the same time.
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™ The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you change intervals depend on several factors
should change the engine oil based on how and generally decrease with severity of
your vehicle is used. By using several use.
important factors in its calculations, the
When to expect the oil change message
Interval Vehicle use and example
Normal
7500-10000 miles Normal commuting with highway driving.

(12000-16000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
5000-7499 miles Moderate to heavy load or towing.

(8000-11999 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
Normal Maintenance Intervals
*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
**
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
462
*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Diesel engine fill diesel exhaust fluid.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
1
Other maintenance items
Torque rear axle U-bolts to specification.

Every 30000 miles (48000 2
km) Diesel engine replace fuel filter.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 45000 miles (70000 Change diesel foam air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000 Change engine coolant.
3
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) 4
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
Every 150000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
(240000 km)
463
1
Other maintenance items
Change rear axle fluid.

Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Replace early if indicated by per Water In Fuel warning lamp. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 95).
3
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
4
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within
SPECIAL OPERATING 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the oil
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED change required message appearing in the
MAINTENANCE information display.
• Example 1: The message appears at
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any 28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
of the following conditions, you need to 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
perform extra maintenance as indicated. transmission fluid replacement.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally • Example 2: The message does not
under any of these conditions, it is not appear, but the odometer reads
necessary to perform the extra 30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
maintenance. For specific the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
recommendations, see your dealership reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)).
service advisor or technician. Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
service as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60000 miles Replace spark plugs.
(96000 km)
464
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 60000 miles Replace spark plugs.
(96000 km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Inspect frequently, Replace engine air filter.

service as required
Every 5000 miles (8000 Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
km) noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter.*
km) or six months
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate if
service as required equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter.*
km) or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
465
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Hot climate oil change intervals

Exceptions
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
There are several exceptions to the Normal North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
Schedule: locations with similar climates using an
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
drive vehicles) fluid changes or level oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).
checks are not required unless a leak is If the available API SM or SN oils are not
suspected or the assembly has been available, then the oil change interval is
submerged in water. Contact an authorized 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
dealer for service.
Engine air filter replacement
California fuel filter replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
If you register your vehicle in California, the on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
California Air Resources Board has Vehicles operated in these conditions
determined that the failure to perform this require frequent inspection and
maintenance item does not nullify the replacement of the engine air filter.
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
urges you to have all recommended RECORD
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
466
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
467
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
468
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
469
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
470
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
471
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
472
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
473
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
474
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
475
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
476
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
WARNING: Do not place objects or Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
mount equipment on or near the airbag meet electromagnetic compatibility
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
front seats), or in front seat areas that may applicable local requirements). It is your
come into contact with a deploying airbag. responsibility to make sure that any
Failure to follow these instructions may equipment an authorized dealer installs on
increase the risk of personal injury in the your vehicle complies with applicable local
event of a crash. legislation and other requirements.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
and brake pipes. telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.
Car
E239120
477
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
478
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio

frequency transmitters, check for END USER LICENSE
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
AGREEMENT
standby and transmit modes.
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Check all electrical equipment: LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• With the ignition ON.
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
• With the engine running. have acquired a vehicle having several
• During a road test at various speeds. devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
Check that electromagnetic fields include software licensed or owned by
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
transmitter installed do not exceed ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
applicable human exposure requirements. software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
479
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") liable for any damages arising out of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY errors in the speech recognition
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE process. It is your responsibility to
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT monitor any speech recognition
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, functions included in the system.
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF Decompilation and Disassembly:
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). You may not reverse engineer,
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This decompile, translate, disassemble or
EULA grants you the following license: attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• You may use the SOFTWARE as SOFTWARE nor permit others to
installed on the DEVICES and as reverse engineer, decompile or
otherwise interfacing with systems disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and/or services provide by or through and only to the extent that such activity
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third is expressly permitted by applicable
party software and service providers. law notwithstanding this limitation or
Description of Other Rights and to the extent as may be permitted by
Limitations the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
• Speech Recognition: If the with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE includes speech • Limitations on Distributing,
recognition component(s), you should Copying, Modifying and Creating
understand that speech recognition is Derivative Works: You may not
an inherently statistical process and distribute, copy, make modifications
that recognition errors are inherent in to or create derivative works based on
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
480
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may charges from your wireless service

permanently transfer your rights under provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
this EULA only as part of a sale or or third party software and services
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you suppliers provide or make available to
retain no copies, you transfer all of the you Supplemental Components and
SOFTWARE (including all component no other EULA terms are provided
parts, the media and printed materials, along with the Supplemental
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Components, then the terms of this
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, designated agent reserve the right to
any transfer must include all prior discontinue without liability any
versions of the SOFTWARE. Internet-based services provided to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any you or made available to you through
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY the use of the SOFTWARE.
may terminate this EULA if you fail to • Links to Third Party Sites: The
comply with the terms and conditions SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of this EULA. ability to link to third party sites. The
• Internet-Based Services third party sites are not under the
Components: The SOFTWARE may control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
contain components that enable and its affiliates and/or its designated
facilitate the use of certain agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services. You COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
acknowledge and agree that FORD designated agent are responsible for
MOTOR COMPANY, third party (I) the contents of any third party sites,
software and service suppliers, its any links contained in third party sites,
affiliates and/or its designated agent or any changes or updates to third
may automatically check the version party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
of the SOFTWARE and/or its other form of transmission received
components that you are utilizing and from any third party sites. If the
may provide upgrades or supplements SOFTWARE provides links to third
to the SOFTWARE that may be party sites, those links are provided to
automatically downloaded to your you only as a convenience, and the
DEVICES. inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
• Additional Software/Services: The FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
its designated agent to provide or make You recognize your obligation to drive
available to you SOFTWARE updates, responsibly and keep attention on the
supplements, add-on components, or road. You will read and abide with the
Internet-based services components DEVICES operating instructions
of the SOFTWARE after the date you particularly as they pertain to safety
obtain your initial copy of the and you agree to assume any risk
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental associated with the use of the
Components".) SOFTWARE updates DEVICES.
may cause you to incur additional
481
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the subject to U.S. and European Union export
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or applicable international and national laws
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
replacement copy for the existing other governments.
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
this EULA, including any additional EULA you any rights in connection with any
terms accompanying the upgrade trademarks or service marks of FORD
SOFTWARE. MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: party software and service providers.
All title and intellectual property rights in PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
limited to any images, photographs, provided in the documentation for the
animations, video, audio, music, text and DEVICES product support, such as the
"applets" incorporated into the vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the Should you have any questions concerning
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may please refer to the address provided in the
not copy the printed materials documentation for the DEVICES.
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title No Liability for Certain Damages:
and intellectual property rights in and to EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
the content which may be accessed MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
through use of the SOFTWARE is the SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
property of the respective content owner AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
and may be protected by applicable LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
copyright or other intellectual property CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
rights to use such content outside its CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
intended use. All rights not specifically PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
granted under this EULA are reserved by LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
and third party software and service PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
services which may be accessed through EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the VEHICLE.
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
482
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

Information Read and follow features may require manual
instructions: (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
• Before using your SYNC® system, read while driving can distract your attention
and follow all instructions and safety and could cause an accident or other
information provided in this end user serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not and legal manner before attempting
following precautions found in the these operations.
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
General Operation as an aid. Make your driving decisions
• Voice Command Control: Certain based on your observations of local
functions within the SYNC® system conditions and existing traffic
may be accomplished using voice regulations. Any such feature is not a
commands. Using voice commands substitute for your personal judgment.
while driving helps you to operate the Any route suggestions made by this
system without removing your hands system should never replace any local
from the wheel or eyes from the road. traffic regulations or your personal
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not judgment or knowledge of safe driving
access any function requiring a practices.
prolonged view of the screen while you • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal suggestions if doing so would result in
manner before attempting to access a an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
function of the system requiring would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged attention. or if you would be directed into an area
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the that you consider unsafe. The driver is
volume excessively. Keep the volume ultimately responsible for the safe
at a level where you can still hear operation of the vehicle and therefore,
outside traffic and emergency signals must evaluate whether it is safe to
while driving. Driving while unable to follow the suggested directions.
hear these sounds could cause an • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
accident. used by this system may be inaccurate
• Navigation Features: Any navigation because of changes in roads, traffic
features included in the system are controls or driving conditions. Always
intended to provide turn by turn use good judgment and common sense
instructions to get you to a desired when following the suggested routes.
destination. Please make certain all • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
persons using this system carefully any navigation features included in the
read and follow instructions and safety system to route you to emergency
information fully. services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
483
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
484
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
485
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to You
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to You individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy Your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
486
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
487
Appendices
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
488
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
489
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
490
Appendices
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
491
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
492
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
493
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
494
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO
and their officers, employees and tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
agents from and against any claim, ARGENTINO”
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
demand or action, alleging loss, MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
costs, expenses, damages or injuries AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
(including injuries resulting in death) 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
arising out of the use or possession ENERO DE 2011”
of the data or the Data. “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi- Guade-
tion to all of the rights and obligations loupe,
of the parties under the Agreement. French
To the extent that any of the provi- Guiana
sions of this Section are inconsistent and
with, or conflict with, any other provi- Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
sions of the Agreement, the provisions nique Nacional de Estadística y
of this Section shall prevail. Mexico Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
495
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, Client only after receiving certification
HERE shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
496
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
497
Appendices
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
498
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
499
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you rigCustomer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
500
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
501
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
502
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A AND CONDITIONS
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER By activating, using and/or accessing the
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE other content or material provided by
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL and/or Services), you must accept
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY certain terms and conditions. The following
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL is a brief summary of the terms and
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS conditions that apply to you. To view the
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON full terms and conditions relevant to your
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Taiwan Territory
Website
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
radiation motors: ditions/
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models, 1. Acceptance
companies, firms or users must not alter
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
the frequency, increase the power or
you will be deemed to have accepted and
change the characteristics and functions
agreed to be bound by the terms and
of the original design without authorization.
conditions fully detailed at:
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect Website
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
be detected, immediately stop using the ditions/
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any 2. Intellectual Property
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless SUNA Products and/or Services are for
telecommunication of the telco, the your personal use. You may not record, or
low-power radio frequency motor must be retransmit the content, nor use the content
able to tolerate legal limits of interference in association with any other traffic
from telecommunication, industrial, information or route guidance service or
scientific and radio wave equipment. device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
503
Appendices
SUNA Products and/or Services are Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier

intended as an aid to personal motoring has been advised of the possibility of such
and travel planning, and do not provide damages. You also acknowledge that the
comprehensive or accurate information on neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
all occasions. On occasions, you may guarantees nor make any warranties that
experience additional delay as a result of relate to the availability, accuracy or
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You completeness of SUNA Products and/or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or Services, and to the extent which it is
suitable, for use in applications where time lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
of arrival or driving directions may impact Supplier excludes any warranties which
the safety of the public or yourself. might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
Products and/or Services.
while driving
7. Please Note
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Great care has been taken in preparing this
Services are available or installed and manual. Constant product development
active, remain at all times responsible for may mean that some information is not
observing all relevant laws and codes of entirely up-to-date. The information in this
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only document is subject to change without
actively operate SUNA Products and/or notice.
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
504
Index
9 Apps..................................................................425
..................................................................................425
911 Assist............................................................57 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................427
911 Assist May Not Work If................................58 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............98
911 Assist Privacy Notice...................................58 Airbag Secondary Warning..............................98
In the Event of a Crash.......................................58 Door Ajar.................................................................98
Exterior Lamps On...............................................98
A Key in Ignition........................................................98
Parking Brake On.................................................98
A/C Seatbelt Reminder..............................................98
See: Climate Control.........................................109 Transmission Selector Lever Not in park
About This Manual...........................................7 (P)........................................................................98
ABS Audio Control..................................................80
See: Brakes...........................................................156 Audio Input Jack...........................................347
ABS driving hints Audio System................................................326
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock General Information.........................................326
Brakes................................................................156 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Accessories....................................................454 SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................327
Exterior Style.......................................................454 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Interior Style........................................................454 SYNC..............................................................331
Lifestyle.................................................................454 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/USB
Peace of Mind.....................................................454 Port/Bluetooth..........................................333
Accessories Bluetooth Audio Streaming...........................338
See: Replacement Parts iPod.........................................................................338
Recommendation............................................12 Making and Receiving Calls............................337
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................247 Phone and Voice Pass-Through..................335
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................248 Phone Menu Options........................................337
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................247 Sound Button......................................................334
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................80 Station Preset Buttons....................................335
Airbag Disposal...............................................56 Station Tuning Control....................................334
Air Conditioning USB..........................................................................337
See: Climate Control.........................................109 Waveband Button.............................................334
Air Filter Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L FM...................................................................339
Power Stroke Diesel.....................................255 AUX Button...........................................................341
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.5L Clock Button.......................................................340
Ecoboost™.....................................................256 Menu Button.........................................................341
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - Sound Button.......................................................341
3.7L......................................................................257 Station Preset Buttons.....................................341
Alarm Station Tuning Buttons....................................341
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76 AM/FM/CD..................................................329
Alarm System........................................................76 Autolamps........................................................86
Arming the Alarm.................................................76 Windshield Wiper Activated
Disarming the Alarm...........................................76 Headlamps........................................................86
Triggering the Alarm............................................76 Automatic Crash Notification
Appendices.....................................................477 System.............................................................57
505
Index
Automatic Transmission.............................151 Capacities and Specifications -

Automatic Transmission Adaptive 3.7L..................................................................321
Learning.............................................................154 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................153 Climates...........................................................324
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Capacities..............................................................321
Snow..................................................................154 Specifications......................................................322
SelectShift Automatic™ Capacities and Specifications...............305
Transmission...................................................152 Cargo Lamps...................................................88
Understanding the Positions of Your Switching the Cargo Lamps Off.....................88
Automatic Transmission..............................151 Switching the Cargo Lamps On.....................88
Automatic Transmission Fluid Car Wash
Check............................................................240 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................261
Autowipers.......................................................83 Catalytic Converter - 3.5L/3.7L................142
Auxiliary Power Points................................122 On-Board Diagnostics System......................142
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................122 Changing a Bulb...........................................249
AC Power Point....................................................122 Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............252
Locations................................................................122 Front Clearance Lamp......................................251
Auxiliary Switches.......................................455 Headlamp.............................................................249
Interior Lamp.......................................................252
B License Plate Lamp...........................................252
Reading Lamps...................................................253
Battery Rear Lamps...........................................................251
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................244 Side Direction Indicator....................................251
Bonnet Lock Sun Visor Mirror Lamp.....................................253
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........229 Changing a Fuse...........................................227
Booster Seats..................................................33 Fuses.......................................................................227
Types of Booster Seats......................................34 Changing a Road Wheel...........................292
Bottle Holder..................................................125 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Brake Fluid Check.........................................241 Information.....................................................293
Brakes...............................................................156 Front Jacking Points.........................................298
General Information..........................................156 Installing a Road Wheel..................................302
Breaking-In.......................................................191 Locking Lug Nuts...............................................294
Bulb Specification Chart...........................253 Rear Jacking Points...........................................299
Removing a Road Wheel.................................301
C Removing a Wheel Trim..................................299
Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle Jack.........303
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L Vehicle Jack.........................................................296
Power Stroke Diesel..................................313 Vehicles With a Spare Wheel.......................294
Capacities..............................................................313 Changing the 12V Battery.........................244
Specifications......................................................314 Removing the Battery......................................244
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Replacing the Battery......................................246
Ecoboost™..................................................316 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Power Stroke Diesel.................................255
Climates...........................................................320 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.5L
Capacities..............................................................317 Ecoboost™.................................................256
Specifications......................................................318 Changing the Engine Air Filter -
3.7L..................................................................257
506
Index
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Creating a MyKey...........................................65

Filter...............................................................235 Programming/Changing Configurable
Engine Lubrication for Severe Service Settings..............................................................66
Operation.........................................................235 Cruise Control...................................................81
Changing the Front Wiper Blades.........246 Principle of Operation......................................168
Checking MyKey System Status..............66 Cruise control
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................246 See: Using Cruise Control................................168
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Cup Holders....................................................125
Maintenance.................................................44 Customer Assistance..................................201
Child Restraint Positioning.........................35
Child Safety........................................................17
General Information.............................................17
D
Child Safety Locks..........................................37 Data Recording..................................................9
Left-Hand Side.....................................................38 Event Data Recording..........................................10
Right-Hand Side...................................................38 Service Data Recording........................................9
Cigar Lighter....................................................123 Daytime Running Lamps.............................87
Cleaning Products......................................260 Diesel Particulate Filter - 3.2L
Cleaning the Engine....................................262 Diesel..............................................................145
Cleaning the Exterior...................................261 Diesel Particulate Filter Automatic
Body Paintwork Preservation........................262 Regeneration...................................................146
Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................261 Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................261 Regeneration...................................................148
Cleaning the Rear Window.............................261 On-Board Diagnostics System......................146
Sliding Door Tracks...........................................262 Digital Radio..................................................342
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and HD Radio Reception and Station
Instrument Cluster Lens........................265 Troubleshooting............................................343
Cleaning the Interior...................................263 Direction Indicators........................................87
Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats, Headliners Doors and Locks.............................................70
and Floor Mats...............................................263 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 3.2L
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens Power Stroke Diesel.................................242
and Radio Screens.......................................264 Changing the Fuel Filter..................................242
Leather Interior...................................................264 Purging Air From the Fuel System...............243
Rear Windows.....................................................264 Drive Belt Routing - 3.2L Power Stroke
Seatbelts..............................................................264 Diesel.............................................................258
Storage Compartments, Cup Holders and Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™/
Ashtrays...........................................................264 3.7L.................................................................258
Suede Micro Fiber Fabric................................264 Driver Alert......................................................169
Cleaning the Wheels..................................266 Principle of Operation......................................169
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Using Driver Alert................................................169
Blades...........................................................263 Driver and Passenger Airbags....................47
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................66 Children and Airbags...........................................52
Climate Control............................................109 Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........47
Cold Weather Precautions.........................191 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Coolant Check Adjustment........................................................52
See: Engine Coolant Check............................236 Driving Aids.....................................................169
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........55 Driving Hints....................................................191
Driving Through Water................................192
507
Index
DRL CD...........................................................................409
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................87 HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................406
E SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................404
Economical Driving.......................................191 Sources.................................................................403
Electromagnetic Compatibility...............477 Supported Media Players, Formats and
Emergency Exit..............................................195 Metadata Information..................................411
Emission Law..................................................141 USB Ports...............................................................411
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Environment.....................................................16
Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........142 Essential Towing Checks...........................183
Tampering With a Noise Control Before Towing a Trailer.....................................188
System................................................................141 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
End User License Agreement..................479 Water Craft (PWC).......................................189
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE Safety Chains.......................................................184
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................479 Tow Hitch..............................................................184
Engine Block Heater....................................129 Trailer Brakes........................................................184
Using the Engine Block Heater......................130 Trailer Lamps.......................................................188
Engine Coolant Check...............................236 Trailer Towing Connector.................................183
Adding Coolant...................................................237 When Towing a Trailer......................................188
Coolant Change.................................................239 Event Data Recording
Engine Coolant Temperature See: Data Recording..............................................9
Management..................................................240 Export Unique Options.................................15
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................239 Exterior Mirrors.................................................91
Recycled Coolant...............................................238 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................92
Severe Climates.................................................238 Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................91
Engine Cooling Fan - Diesel.....................236 Power Folding Mirrors..........................................91
Engine Cooling Fan - E85/
Gasoline.......................................................236
Engine Emission Control.............................141
F
Engine Immobilizer Fan
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75 See: Engine Cooling Fan - Diesel.................236
Engine Oil Check..........................................234 See: Engine Cooling Fan - E85/
Adding Engine Oil..............................................234 Gasoline...........................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke Fastening the Seatbelts..............................40
Diesel.............................................................233 Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................41
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy...............40
Ecoboost™.................................................234 Flat Tire
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L..........................234 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................292
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power Floor Mats........................................................192
Stroke Diesel..............................................305 Ford Credit.........................................................12
Engine Specifications - 3.5L US Only......................................................................12
Ecoboost™.................................................306 Ford Protect...................................................457
Engine Specifications - 3.7L.....................307 Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
Entertainment..............................................402 (CANADA ONLY)..........................................458
AM/FM Radio......................................................403 Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Apps..........................................................................411 Only)..................................................................457
Bluetooth Stereo or USB.................................410 Front Door Storage Compartment........125
508
Index
Front Wiper Blades

See: Changing the Front Wiper Blades......246
G
Fuel and Refueling........................................131 Gauges...............................................................93
Fuel Consumption........................................139 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............93
Advertised Capacity..........................................139 Fuel Gauge.............................................................94
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................140 Information Display.............................................93
Filling the Fuel Tank..........................................140 Tripmeter Reset and Distance to
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................136 Empty..................................................................94
Fuel Filter - Gasoline..................................244 Gearbox
Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................132 See: Transmission...............................................151
Biodiesel.................................................................133 General Information on Radio
Diesel Fuel Additives ........................................134 Frequencies...................................................59
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right General Maintenance Information.......459
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Multi-point Inspection......................................461
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Owner Checks and Services.........................460
Required ...........................................................132 Protecting Your Investment..........................459
Fuel Requirements - Choosing the Right Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................459
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is Required Dealership?.....................................................459
(United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Virgin Islands and Other Locales)...........132 Canada.........................................................204
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................135 Getting the Services You Need...............201
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Away From Home...............................................201
Vehicles.............................................................135
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline............................................................136
H
Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................134 Handbrake
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................134 See: Parking Brake - Vehicles With:
Fuel Shutoff....................................................195 Mechanical Parking Brake..........................157
Ignition Switch.....................................................195 See: Parking Brake - Vehicles With: Push
Fuse Box Locations....................................208 Down Parking Brake......................................157
Body Control Module.......................................208 Hazard Flashers............................................195
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................208 Headlamp Adjusting
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........208 See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................247
Pre-fuse Box.......................................................208 Headlamp Removal
Fuses................................................................208 See: Removing a Headlamp..........................248
Fuse Specification Chart - 3.2L Power Headrest
Stroke Diesel..............................................208 See: Head Restraints..........................................113
Body Control Module........................................216 Head Restraints..............................................113
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................209 Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................114
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............212 Installing the Head Restraint .........................114
Fuse Specification Chart - 3.5L Removing the Head Restraint.........................114
Ecoboost™/3.7L.........................................217 Heated Seats.................................................120
Body Control Module........................................225 Heated Windows and Mirrors....................111
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................218 Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................111
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............221 Heated Rear Window..........................................111
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................109
509
Index
Hill Start Assist..............................................158

Switching the System On and Off...............159
J
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................158 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................196
Hints on Controlling the Interior Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................197
Climate...........................................................110 Jump Starting.......................................................197
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................110 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................196
General Hints........................................................110 Removing the Jumper Cables........................197
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................110
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel
K
and Footwell Positions..................................111 Keys and Remote Controls.........................59
Recommended Settings for Cooling ..........110 Principle of Operation........................................59
Recommended Settings for Heating...........110
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather...............................................................111
L
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods Lane Keeping System.................................170
During Extreme High Ambient Lane Keeping Alert.............................................170
Temperatures...................................................110 Lighting Control..............................................85
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Headlamp Flasher...............................................86
Brakes............................................................156 Headlamp High Beam.......................................86
Home Screen................................................396 Lighting Control Positions................................85
Hood Lock Parking Lamps......................................................85
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........229 Lighting..............................................................85
General Information............................................85
I Load Carrying..................................................174
Load Limit........................................................174
Ignition Switch...............................................126 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
In California (U.S. Only)............................202 Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Information Display Control.......................82 Vehicles..............................................................179
Information Displays....................................99 Vehicle Loading - with and without a
General Information...........................................99 Trailer..................................................................174
Information Messages................................103 Load Retaining Fixtures..............................174
Installing Child Restraints............................18 Securing Cargo.....................................................174
Child Safety Restraint..........................................18 Locking and Unlocking.................................70
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................19 Autolock...................................................................73
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Autounlock..............................................................74
Children (LATCH).............................................21 Configurable Unlocking......................................74
Using Tether Straps.............................................27 Locking.....................................................................70
Instrument Cluster.........................................93 Locking and Unlocking the Doors From
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................87 Inside....................................................................70
Interior Lamps.................................................88 One-Stage Unlocking..........................................74
Courtesy Lamp.....................................................88 Opening and Closing the Sliding Door..........71
Reading Lamps.....................................................88 Opening the Double Rear Doors.....................72
Interior Mirror...................................................92 Rear Emergency Exit............................................73
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................92 Two-Stage Unlocking.........................................74
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................92 Unlocking.................................................................70
Introduction.........................................................7 Zone Re-Locking...................................................74
510
Index
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................292
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................235
M Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System..............................................................235
Maintenance..................................................229 Oil Check
General Information.........................................229 See: Engine Oil Check......................................234
Manual Climate Control............................109 Opening and Closing the Hood..............229
Manual Seats..................................................114 Closing the Hood...............................................230
Adjusting the Armrest........................................116 Opening the Hood.............................................229
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................115 Ordering Additional Owner's
Moving the Seat Backward or Literature.....................................................206
Forward..............................................................114 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........206
Recline Adjustment............................................115 Overhead Console........................................125
Media Hub......................................................348 Overhead Storage Compartments..............125
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................99
Mirrors
P
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................111 Parking Aid......................................................163
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................90 Switching the Parking Aid System
Mobile Communications Equipment......14 Off.......................................................................164
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke Parking Aids....................................................163
Diesel............................................................308 Principle of Operation.......................................163
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Parking Brake - Vehicles With:
Ecoboost™.................................................308 Mechanical Parking Brake......................157
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...............................310 Center Parking Brake.........................................157
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................68 Parking Brake - Vehicles With: Push
MyKey™.............................................................64 Down Parking Brake..................................157
Principle of Operation........................................64 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................75
SecuriLock®...........................................................75
N PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75
Navigation........................................................417 Perchlorate.........................................................12
cityseeker..............................................................424 Personalized Settings.................................102
Destination Mode...............................................419 Measure Units......................................................102
Map Mode.............................................................418 Phone................................................................412
Navigation Map Updates................................425 During a Phone Call...........................................415
Navigation Menu................................................422 Making Calls.........................................................414
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................425 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
SYNC AppLink....................................................424 Time....................................................................412
Waypoints.............................................................423 Phone Menu.........................................................413
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........462 Receiving Calls.....................................................415
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................462 Smartphone Connectivity...............................416
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................462 Text Messaging...................................................416
Post-Crash Alert System...........................198
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................70
Power Running Boards.................................77
511
Index
Power Seats....................................................116 Locating Your Vehicle.........................................62

Power Lumbar......................................................118 Programming a New Remote Control..........62
Power Steering Fluid Check......................241 Switching the Panic Alarm On and
Adding Power Steering Fluid..........................241 Off.........................................................................63
Power Windows.............................................90 Remote Control - Vehicles Without:
Accessory Delay...................................................90 Passive Anti-Theft System
Bounce-Back.........................................................90 (PATS)............................................................60
Driver Side One-Touch Down.........................90 Changing the Remote Control Battery........60
Driver Side One-Touch Up...............................90 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................60
Protecting the Environment........................16 Locating Your Vehicle..........................................61
Puncture Programming a New Remote Control.........60
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................292 Switching the Panic Alarm On and Off........61
Remote Start...................................................112
R Removing a Headlamp.............................248
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............265
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............111 Replacement Parts
Adjusting the Blower Motor Speed................111 Recommendation........................................12
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents..........111 Collision Repairs....................................................12
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Vents.....................................................................111 Repairs..................................................................12
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents and Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................13
the Footwell Air Vents....................................111 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Rear Quarter Windows.................................92 Control............................................................63
Closing the Rear Quarter Windows...............92 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Opening the Rear Quarter Windows.............92 Only).............................................................206
Rear Seats........................................................118 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Installing the Seats............................................120 Only).............................................................206
Recline Adjustment............................................118 Roadside Assistance...................................194
Removing Seats (Passenger Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Vehicles)............................................................119 Assistance........................................................195
Rear View Camera.......................................165 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Manual Zoom.......................................................167 Assistance Program Coverage.................195
Rear View Camera Delay..................................167 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Rear View Camera Locations.........................165 Assistance........................................................195
Using the Rear View Camera System.........165 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Vehicles with Parking Aid.................................167 Roadside Assistance....................................194
Rear View Camera Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
See: Rear View Camera....................................165 Roadside Assistance....................................194
Recommended Towing Weights.............181 Roadside Emergencies...............................194
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Running-In
Weight for Your Vehicle...............................183 See: Breaking-In...................................................191
Reduced Engine Performance..................191 Running Out of Fuel....................................136
Refueling..........................................................137 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
System Warnings................................................139 Container...........................................................137
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Passive Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................136
Anti-Theft System (PATS).......................61
Changing the Remote Control Battery........62
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................61
512
Index
S Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................286
Safety Canopy™.............................................53 Spare Wheel
Safety Precautions........................................131 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................292
Satellite Radio..............................................344 Special Notices................................................13
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................13
(ESN)................................................................345 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............345 Maintenance..............................................464
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................345 Exceptions...........................................................466
Troubleshooting.................................................346 Speed Control
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........466 See: Cruise Control............................................168
Scheduled Maintenance..........................459 Speed Limiter................................................169
Seatbelt Extension........................................45 Engine Speed Limiter........................................169
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42 Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed........................169
Seatbelt Reminder........................................43 Stability Control.............................................161
Belt-Minder®.........................................................43 Principle of Operation........................................161
Seatbelts...........................................................39 Starter Switch
Principle of Operation........................................39 See: Ignition Switch...........................................126
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Starting a Diesel Engine..............................127
Chime...............................................................42 Cold Weather Operation..................................128
Conditions of operation.....................................43 Engine Glow Plugs..............................................128
Seats...................................................................113 Failure to Start.....................................................128
Security...............................................................75 Starting a Cold or Hot Engine........................128
Selective Catalytic Reductant System - Starting a Gasoline Engine........................127
3.2L Diesel....................................................143 Cold or Hot Engine..............................................127
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue) Engine Idle Speed after Starting...................127
Guidelines.........................................................143 Flooded Engine....................................................127
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue) Level...........143 Starting and Stopping the Engine..........126
Warning Lamps and Messages.....................143 General Information..........................................126
Settings...........................................................428 Steering.............................................................172
911 Assist...............................................................433 Steering Wheel...............................................80
Ambient Lighting..............................................440 Storage Compartments.............................125
Bluetooth.............................................................430 Supplementary Restraints System.........46
Clock......................................................................430 Principle of Operation........................................46
Display....................................................................441 Switching Off the Engine...........................129
General..................................................................438 Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................129
Media Player........................................................429 Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Mobile Apps.........................................................436 SYNC™ 3........................................................387
Navigation............................................................434 General Information.........................................387
Phone....................................................................430 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................442
Radio......................................................................433 SYNC™ Applications and
Sound.....................................................................428 Services........................................................365
Valet Mode...........................................................442 911 Assist...............................................................365
Vehicle...................................................................440 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................367
Voice Control........................................................441 SYNC™...........................................................349
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................438 General Information.........................................349
Side Airbags.....................................................52 SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................379
Sitting in the Correct Position...................113
513
Index
T Traction Control............................................160
Principle of Operation......................................160
Technical Specifications Trailer Sway Control.....................................181
See: Capacities and Specifications............305 Transmission Code Designation.............312
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Transmission...................................................151
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................203 Transporting the Vehicle...........................198
Tire Care..........................................................269 Trip Computer................................................102
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................271 All Values...............................................................102
Inflating the Tires...............................................278 Average Fuel Consumption............................102
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Digital Speedometer.........................................102
Grades..............................................................269 Distance to Empty.............................................102
Information Contained on the Tire Outside Air Temperature.................................102
Sidewall............................................................272 Resetting the Trip Computer..........................102
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel Valve Trip Odometer.....................................................102
Stems.................................................................281 Trip Timer..............................................................102
Location of the Tire Label...............................278
Tire Age..................................................................282
Tire and Wheel Alignment.............................284
U
Tire Damage.........................................................281 Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................283 Stroke Diesel..............................................230
Tire Replacement Requirements.................282 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Tire Rotation........................................................285 Ecoboost™..................................................231
Tire Safety Practices.........................................283 Under Hood Overview - 3.7L....................232
Tire Wear................................................................281 USB Port..........................................................347
United States Department of Using Cruise Control...................................168
Transportation Tire Quality Switching Cruise Control Off.........................168
Grades...............................................................270 Switching Cruise Control On..........................168
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........287 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Systems..........................................................68
Monitoring System.......................................289 Using Power Running Boards.....................77
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Automatic Power Deploy...................................77
Procedure.........................................................291 Automatic Power Stow.......................................77
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring Bounce-back..........................................................78
System..............................................................289 Enabling and Disabling......................................78
Tires Manual Operation................................................78
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................268 Manual Power Deploy.........................................77
Tow/Haul.........................................................154 Resetting the System..........................................79
Towing a Trailer.............................................180 Using Snow Chains.....................................286
Load Placement.................................................180 Using Stability Control................................162
Towing Points................................................199 Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Front Towing Point.............................................199 Player.............................................................370
Rear Towing Point..............................................199 Accessing Your USB Song Library................374
Towing Eye Location........................................200 Bluetooth Devices and System
Towing the Vehicle on Four Settings.............................................................376
Wheels..........................................................189 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
Emergency Towing............................................189 USB Port...........................................................370
Recreational Towing.........................................190 Media Menu Features.......................................373
Towing..............................................................180 Media Voice Commands..................................371
514
Index
USB 2......................................................................376 Engine....................................................................266

Voice Commands for Audio Sources..........377 Fuel system..........................................................267
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............353 General..................................................................266
Accessing Features through the Phone Miscellaneous......................................................267
Menu..................................................................358 Removing Vehicle From Storage..................267
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................361 Tires.........................................................................267
Bluetooth Devices.............................................362 Ventilation
Making Calls.........................................................357 See: Climate Control.........................................109
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............354 VIN
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................355 See: Vehicle Identification Number..............311
Phone Options during an Active Call..........357 Voice Control....................................................81
Phone Voice Commands................................355
Receiving Calls....................................................357
System Settings.................................................363
W
Text Messaging...................................................359 Warning Lamps and Indicators................95
Using Traction Control...............................160 Airbag Warning Lamp........................................95
Switching the System Off...............................160 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
System Indicator Lights and Lamp....................................................................95
Messages.........................................................160 Battery Charging Condition Warning
Using a Switch.....................................................160 Lamp....................................................................95
Using the Information Display Brake System Warning Lamp..........................95
Controls............................................................160 Diesel Warning Lamps.......................................95
Using Voice Recognition............................351 Direction Indicator...............................................96
Apps........................................................................401 Door Ajar.................................................................96
Automatic Blower Motor Speed Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Reduction........................................................402 Lamp....................................................................96
Climate Control..................................................398 Engine Warning Lamps.....................................96
Entertainment.....................................................397 Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp......................97
General..................................................................396 Headlamp High Beam Indicator.....................97
Initiating a Voice Session.................................351 Lamps on Indicator..............................................97
Navigation...........................................................400 Lane Departure Warning Indicator................97
Phone.....................................................................399 Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................97
System Interaction and Feedback..............352 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp..................97
Voice Settings......................................................401 Low Washer Fluid Level Warning
Using Winter Tires.......................................286 Lamp....................................................................97
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Message Center Indicator.................................97
Program (Canada Only)........................204 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp..............................97
Stability Control and Traction Control
V Indicator.............................................................98
Stability Control and Traction Control Off
Vehicle Care..................................................260 Warning Lamp.................................................98
Vehicle Certification Label........................312 Tow/Haul Warning Lamp.................................98
Vehicle Identification Number..................311 Washer Fluid Check....................................242
Vehicle Storage............................................266 Washers
Battery....................................................................267 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................261
Body.......................................................................266 Waxing.............................................................262
Brakes.....................................................................267 Wheel Nuts
Cooling system...................................................267 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................292
515
Index
Wheels and Tires.........................................268

General Information.........................................268
Technical Specifications.................................303
Windows and Mirrors...................................90
Windshield Washers.....................................84
Windshield Wipers........................................83
Intermittent Wipe.................................................83
Speed Dependent Wipers................................83
Winter Tires
See: Using Winter Tires...................................286
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................246
Wipers and Washers.....................................83
516
JK3J 19A321 AA, Edition date: 201705

Ford Transit 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ford Transit 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ford Transit 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the document discussing?

What are the document discussing?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

2018 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

2018 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and

Introduction Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......55

Supplementary Restraints Power Running Boards

Voice Control ...................................................81 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate

Refueling .........................................................137 Driving Aids

Using Snow Chains ....................................286 SYNC™

Audio System Ford Protect

ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual may qualify the location of a

WARNING: Driving while distracted

against the use of any hand-held device

Brake fluid - non petroleum Fan warning

Brake system Fasten seatbelt

Brake system Flammable

Cabin air filter Front airbag

Check fuel cap Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset

Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers

Heated rear window

Interior luggage compartment

Keep out of reach of children

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level Passenger airbag deactivated

Note operating instructions Side airbag

Horn control Shield the eyes

Panic alarm Stability control

Parking aid Hill descent control

Parking brake Trail control

Power steering fluid Windshield wiping system

Windshield wash and wipe

Power window lockout

Requires registered technician Service Data Recording

information for vehicle improvement or Event Data Recording

PERCHLORATE REPLACEMENT PARTS

Warranty on Replacement Parts On Board Diagnostics Data Link

WARNING: Never place front seat

Before you drive your vehicle, please read

Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow Other Vehicle Modifications

Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Web Address

If your light truck is equipped with the Ford www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas

Using mobile communications equipment

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For details about Ford Motor

GENERAL INFORMATION Technician (CPST) to make sure that you

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Use a child safety seat

• You are required by law to properly use

WARNING: Depending on where you

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.

The LATCH system is composed of three

Do not attach a child restraint to any lower